AHOY,

Update; 03/24/13 20:22 hours, Okay so it looks like the color code (highlighting) is still visible with this published page i.e. the info you see after clicking on the page from my blog's home page, dose include the color code, highlights. However, for what ever reason, the color coded info, dose not show here in the "edit page". However the "update" color code highlights do, for example what you are reading right now.

Now lets go down the rabbit hole here for a minute. You, see this highlighting i.e. color coded info is not as helpful to the average patriot reading this post as it should be. What I mean is at one point I just decided as I was trying to decide which copy of Tri-F, to post on my blog, that I would just post my personal copy. This is when I also posted the "appendixes" too. And this was the same time period I came to believe most patriots were going to go with their own organization of the info. Now the thing is, with my personal copy, I had paid much less attention, to the color code rules, in most cases, I had just been using the "green" for any and every change I made, weather I had edited the info or not. It was just quicker for me as I worked with multiple copies.

Now back to the rabbit hole, you see the "agents" monitory this blog imo, also have access to my computer. Thus all the issues I have with my computer when ever I work in my Tri-F files. So knowing all this and at least figuring I would mention all these issues on my blog, (as I have) and deleting the highlights and changing things like settings etc now and then, the agents have been able to make my blog look or seem more intriguing on an espionage basis, than it would have been. "They" lol, want my patriots i.e. in the agents eyes potential terrorist, to think there was some real "ALLLL, QUIIIIEEEEEEEE, DAHHHHHHH" sh*t involved. You know secret codes. At the same time when I posted that copy imo the agents also had to make sure, though various "geek" means, (before publishing my sloppy copy, lol) that it was not like a "mirror" site of the (i.e. their) "mirror" site, with those "smudges" of course, LOL, you know, put up or should I say in, by someone else. That would be "Eastern Europeans", any of our European allies, Chinese, or IVAN!

So, here now, I'm basically going to re-post the Defensive notes. Last night, I myself had deleted the highlighting from the updated info, so as not to have any issues posting with no benefit i.e. color code anyways. I'm also going to update this copy when I do updates, with images of pages, just like I do the books I'm posting. This well make posting images real easy. And in case no patriot has realized this, I have, because, its true. Another reason "they" fear me, is because they know my every key stroke. AND THEY SEE THE COINCIDENCES, AND KNOW THERE IS SOMETHING wITCHY, SPOOKY, WHAT EVERY YOU WISH TO CALL IT, GOING ON HERE WITH ME, NEWJARHEADDEAN.
I managed to get some of the "Preparations and conduct of patrols" section in here just now too.

Update; 03/23/13, 23;05 hours, I'm going to try to post most if not all of the Defense section. I well have to add images later. Those I have to email to myself first, lol believe it or not. I just realized the fucking color code is gone. Its not showing with the text after "Preface" etc. It dose appear at least for now that the "bold" and "italics" etc are working which is an improvment from the 2012 version, so I'll keep posting the sections in time. And like I've said before most people imo are organizing this all for themselves anyways and I don't believe everyone out there is able to see what I post. So FUCK YOU AGENTS AKA "USEFULL IDIOTS", you are dumb ass cowards, have another glass of kool-aid.

Can you imagine I'm having trouble posting this thing, with color code included. There is not much additional info at all, just the color code. I'm going to try it peace meal i.e. one part at a time, ...

Preface

Note pink highlighted material is that, that IMO, is questionable factually or needs to be defined i.e. explained or studied more. Also it could be a personal note. Yellow is location undecided and or unedited material, green means a change has been made i.e. an update, it well also be used for “reference” entries i.e. notes, suggesting farther reading or related material within Tri-F. Red is info I find of particular importance usually including the word note.

So, this is my collection of combat notes. One might call it my anthology of combat tactics, techniques, methods and skills. The note taking began about thirty-three years ago with the observation of 10 rules listed with in a book covering the French and Indian wars, entitled “Roger’s Rangers”. This preceded numerous sources including approximately one hundred books and about a dozen field manuals, of which a few were of the WWII era. These were found at libraries, half price bookstores and garage sales. Since going on line in 2007, I have found material on web sites such as Bayonet strength, Defense and National Interest (DNI), Global security, Strategy page (SP) and “Combat lessons” who’s address fallows, (http://www.efour4ever.com/street_fighting.htm), under lessons learned section. Wikipedia too.

Previously referred to as K.O.O.L.N. (acronym definition, top secret) I have now titled my work Fragmented Fighting Facts or Tri-F; the name derives from the computer grammar function always alerting me to the fragmented nature of my sentences. This is due to the “just the facts, ma’am” manor the material is written i.e. there has been little if any effort to write in whole sentences or provide context. This is not to say there is no order with Tri-F, in fact there is a theme. I have laid out the information as one might expect a commander or members of a unit to recall it thus utilizing it to conduct a mission.

My original thoughts were to start with defense, due to the fact that IMO a unit needs to be secure somewhere before it can go somewhere. However, I reasoned that well educated leaders with solid plans are the bases of everything and one of the main reasons for setting up in the Defense to begin with i.e. to make plans. Therefore, we start with Planning, fallowed by the section on Defense, then there’s Preparations and conduct of patrols or PCP, and we end with Conduct of Engagements or COE, i.e. engagements being my word for shootouts. Each section of Tri-F consists of basic numbered rules, fallowed by detailed notes that either relate to, explain, or give examples pertaining to the basic rules. As with the general format of Tri-F, I have laid out each section’s basic rules, as one might need to recall them. This is most obvious in the last section COE starting with rule number one, Flash report, i.e. actions to take upon first contact with the enemy. This sections last basic rule deals with handling POWs.

Keep in mind this is a work in progress; I’m constantly discovering new information to add which in turn still at times requires rearranging things. At the same time, interestingly enough to me, I have not needed to rearrange my original order of the basic rules for quite some time. There are however, two instances where the detailed information fallowing a pair of basic rules became so similar I decided to combine the pair into one basic rule. These two occurrences are noted in footnotes.

By using green high-light to mark any changes, patriots can fallow the progress with out having to read Tri-F in it’s entirety each time to stay current. This well be added info not every little change.

Out of all the information contained within this work, only an estimated 1% was taught to me while I was serving in the U.S.M.C. Moreover, to put a fine point on it, it’s worth noting I served in Charlie Company, First Battalion, Fifth Marines, First Marine Division, i.e. an Infantry unit. Before my discharge (after only a two year cruse), I attended Jungle Warfare School in the northern training area of Okinawa (for two weeks), Mountain Warfare School in Korea (for one week) and Combat Town Camp Pendleton for MOUT training (for one day). I did not take part in any amphibious training nor did I ever go to Twenty Nine Palms for Desert Warfare training. We did ride around in AAVs once at Camp Pendleton. All in all I would say the only things I missed out on were a beach landing (at Coronado I believe) and a little sun burn, due to the fact that those twenty nine palms, I was told in the early eighties were all located at the front gate of that base. Needless to say, the training did not impress me, and I now know it was not going to get any better as some suggested to me at the time, and still others later claimed that I should have just stayed in longer.

With my position on the lack of training, I do wish to make it perfectly clear that I do support the women and men serving in the U.S. armed forces. I also believe them to be as brave as any people on earth. My concern is in the way they are being sacrificed. I want people to understand my experience and IMO a lot of evidence suggest Uncle Sam intends to use his infantry in ways that dose not include training any generation in the art of traditional Guerilla combat tactics i.e. as a Commando would be. I am not talking about SWAT team close quarter tactics, like the Stick dynamic entry. That tactic should be called the “cluster f**k”. Just call that sort of tactic what it is, NYPD (Cops T.V. show bad-boys, bad-boys) in Afghanistan. The problem is that that tactic was developed by police departments to deal with an objective occupied by drugged up party animals, i.e. untrained civilians. The police never use it in a spur of the minute situation. They use it when the house has been under constant surveillance for mouths in some cases and the police know all manor of information about everyone in the house and the structure and neighborhood in general. The cops choose a time when everyone is pasted out from partying the night before and have long lost any weapons (between the cushions or under the bed) they might have had on them as show peaces during the party. The primary reason for the large numbers of police in close proximity is to make sure the gang dose not think the raid is a rival gang “brake in” and thus resist in any way. There is lots of yelling too, thus reinforcing the message that no one is trying to be covert like one would be to get away with a crime.

This brings up an intriguing observation of mine; that being that by the book an assault should be made from the top down, yet the troops in Afghanistan and elsewhere use the Stick dynamic entry and usually enter from the front door, like a SWAT team, however resent high profile raids show the SWAT teams attacking from the top down. Examples you may recall are the raids on the Shinning path group in Peru in 2000 and the Mumbai raid by Indian forces on the Jewish center in 2008. IMO this proves the existence of what I’ll refer to as a “need to know” training policy by various governments, the purpose being to limit the number of true Commandos that could become tomorrows rebels, apposing corrupt governments. One last thing about the Stick, IMO every single time the regular forces units conducting one of these foolish Stick dynamic entries comes under fire i.e. runs into resistance, the Stick brakes i.e. the whole unit evacuates and awaits some kind of support form tanks, guns, tubes or air. Bottom line IMO the Stick is used as a probing tactic and is meant to be a moral boosting show peace tactic to make the unit feel as if it has taken a hill, which was nothing more than another empty building, that IMO Intel suggested, was the case before the entry was ordered. Recalling the police policy of long periods of surveillance prior to raids.

It also seems to me that in light of the old saying “you can fight a war with bombs and blockades but only boots on the ground can win it” (that IMO, Uncle Sam has now revised, as fallows) “you can win a war with bombs and blockades, but only the infantry can end the war”, farther more IMO Uncle Sam has gone one more step and decided to use private security companies and local i.e. indigenous people for the infantry role. All this fear of true commandos is all similar to the Mujahideen not being allowed by various governments to return to their homelands after fighting the Soviets. And as for the U.S. and other Western nations, training foreigners to fight a counter insurgency goes. IMO this training includes nothing more than police procedures i.e. conducting investigations, forensics, searching individuals and buildings to collect evidence and yes serving warrants with the all mighty stick tactic. And of course, lots of “new innovative techniques and tactics” involving CAS and IMO (Old) so called high tech equipment the U.S. Military Industrial Complex wants to clear out of the warehouses.

All in all IMO Uncle Sam has chosen to put just about all his eggs in one advanced technology system, think Star Wars Storm Troopers or Matrix i.e. the Operator or Morpheus trying to guide Neo and others to safety. IMO it looks something like this; (x) unit go to (x) address, kick in front door, use stairs to your right, go south down hallway to (x) door, it is unlocked, interning room go to (x) window looking out window to the north you well see your target running though the neighbors garden. All this information provided by a fleet of satellites as well as Near space assets that are never mentioned by the media as current military assets and of course there’s the robots, UAVs and a flood of other covertly deployed sensors as well as covert eves dropping of any civilian electronic devices in the Area of operations. Thus in light of these and similar so called “new innovative, techniques and tactics” (notice the media and governments choice of words as if were talking Commando tactics i.e. why not use some new high tech terms the system is so eager to introduce us all to normally as a matter of routine), IMO Uncle Sam has placed the traditional Guerrilla combat tactics, on the back burner and is hoping they all go the way of other black arts. This is not just true of the infantry; let us take a peak at aerial combat. Dose anyone out there actually think today’s U.S. pilots are turning and burning, pulling high (G) maneuvers trying to hit the entry windows and get inside the bandits turn. Think any pilot has conducted a yo-yo or split S maneuver lately or made the choice between a single or two-circle fight. Now days its all about stealth, ECM and missiles mostly BVR. IMO this is why the U.S. Navy is not concerned with not having a front line fighter equal to the USAF F-22 Raptor. An article I recently read on Strategy page mentioned a lot of talk about an F/A-18E at an air show displaying a little F-22 silhouette decal i.e. a simulated Kill credit symbol/icon. IMO the F/A- 18E did not gun down that kill. The truth is U.S. forces could equip just about any commercial aircraft on the market with all the lastest western high tech sensors and weapons systems and out fight any other airforce on earth.

And then everyone knows that just about all now and IMO soon all weapons systems including the bayonet well have a chip in it.

So if the electronics ever fail (maybe due to a shift in the axis of earths electromagnetic field, passed a certain point or perhaps a record size solar flare) IMO it well be the masters of the age-old Guerrilla combat tactics i.e. Tri-F basic rules that survive, keeping in mind “no one wins”.

I also wish, that those who join the various services where told all this up front i.e. “we do not intend to train you as a traditional Commando”.

Another thing I would like everyone to consider is that; what makes a Marine special is not the training she or he receives, no it’s the steel the youth demonstrates when they choose to join the Marines. Even when compared to the Special Forces, who IMO are only specialists in their particular field, once again mostly high tech specialties and whose ranks are filled with older personnel that have already been serving and have graduated from a boot camp i.e. are aware of the hoop and hype hurry up and wait tactics. And who are then usually chosen i.e. coached into changing their MOS. I am aware of the change in recruitment policy after 2001 allowing for direct entry into the S.F. community. IMO a rarity and IMO it is still not the same as just choosing to go to a Marine Corps Recruit Depot from the start.

Further more, to those who just well not accept the truth about the lack of training along the lines of traditional Guerrilla combat tactics. I can now say that I have exchanged comments with a number of Iraqi and Afghanistan combat vets. These comments can be found on the internet if you Google up my call sign, Newjarheaddean also spelled with one (D). IMO it is obvious that the tactics I speak of are news to the vets, some have made commits that proves in combat they were just winging it. And no, I don’t believe that all the vets are observing some kind of code of silence on these tactics including the vets who are against the wars. Unless everyone wants to say that YouTube and other internet companies are conspiring to edit all combat footage that shows these tactics being used and that, the vets are staging other videos that show them (albeit with great bravery) as armatures without a clue and winging it. If anyone ever sees video, showing the tactics listed in Tri-F being used, be sure and provide a link with your comment. I once saw a flash of film on CNN showing combat in Lebanon during the 1980s that showed some of these tactics being used by a Guerrilla fighter. I well also say I do believe that UAV footage is edited by the Pentagon to keep the public from seeing the few but well trained Taliban and other Guerrilla fighters that are using these tactics. Alternatively, maybe people think our professional highly trained well-equipped military is unable to defeat 10 – 20 thousand religious extremist amateur thugs in almost a decade of fighting. All the while killing at least by some estimates 100 a mouth including dozens of top commanders.

Let me also say, on the numbers of U.S. PTSD casualties, i.e. IMO, WIA, (And IMO deserving of a Purple Heart). The Government portrays these cases as a result of fighting a war that is “unlike any other war we have fought before” (LOL). Facing an enemy that is fighting in some mysterious and or cowardly manor that simply cannot be countered by military means. I believe the high numbers are a result of US forces fighting in a manor that is suicidal i.e. pointless and counter productive to the real world situation. Example; you have a young brave American ready to fight for the nation, while on one of these IMO “Russian roulette parades” someone shoots at the unit from some building, everyone scrambles for cover, as some spray and pray, then after determining the location using SWATS (Soldier Worn Acoustic Targeting Systems) sniper detectors, or one of the many similar vehicle mounted systems the commander calls in some sort of CAS, if someone’s brains have been blow out especially if it was an officer or the location is vague, a real “crowd pleaser” maybe used i.e. 2000 pounder. IMO this is how 90% of engagements (fought by regular infantry units) are resolved. Special Forces are now and in the feature more and more regular infantry well be using the Matrix style system. And to those that think this is the exception I say show me the number of WIA or KIA (On either side) by small arms fire i.e. during traditional firefights. Even if one includes sniper fire those figures are really low. So IMO after witnessing all the carnage and innocent civilian life being lost and receiving all those looks from the witnesses, it is the American that realizes it is his unit that is not fighting right. This is reinforced and really sinks in back in the states when the vet is asked to tell the Commando stories that never occurred and thus the vet must tell the truth i.e. give up the Commando reputation, keep it all inside or start lying. If the first option is chosen that unveiling reality is demoralizing and makes it all not worth it. If either one of the other chooses are made IMO the vet becomes the ticking bomb. And I can tell you all that many times, I have recalled being told once that “when you go home keep your mouth shut about the things we did. If you don’t you well be thought of as a liar or crazy and either which way your life well be over”. That First Sergeant was right, but like my daddy use to say, “He’s right but he dose not know why he’s right” i.e. IMO the First Sgt. thought of what we did in terms of remarkable heroic feats. However, IMO certainly since the beginning of the Vietnam era, it is the lack of training i.e. the manor in which our service women and men are fighting that keeps this tragedy going.

I would also suggest the vets of today are just like I was 25 or so years ago in the sense that they know there training is lacking, however, they just cannot explain what’s missing. Well I now know the tactics they and I should have been trained in and I can now say, “The PFC that told the Corp it was out of step, now has provided the proof”. What surprises me is that most vets it seems don’t care at all about the tactics I speak of and seem to view me as an unpatriotic “party pooper” lol, when I’m just a U.S. Marine trying to improve the Corps and save lives. Bottom line IMO the infantry needs to consist of unmarried i.e. undistracted, NO CHILDREN, dedicated true professionals, trained in the tactics listed in Tri-F and many more I am sure exist. Desertion. Men desert to save their wives and children, not themselves. The principle advantage of the invaders is that their families are safe. Never pad troop numbers with married men; have them dig bunkers. Recruit only unmarried men and women to be civilian snipers. Women make better snipers than men because they posture less. This info was found on the site Sniper Flashcards. IMO the main reason men feel such pressure to get marriage is the immature fear of being accused of being gay if not married by say 21 years of age.

And to those that say “chivalry is for the museums” I say “first we must have peace on earth”.

In light of all this, I do encourage every Marine and any Warrior i.e. Commando types to read and study this information discussing and sharing it with others and me, thus making the most of it and forming your own conclusions. Above all, keep training and studying a side from the “new innovative techniques and tactics” taught by Uncle Sam, this can only save lives. And Remember IMO it’s not just what you know it’s how competent you are and ultimately who is in the right that determines the victor. If nothing else IMO you well understand much more about how Uncle Sam’s enemies are fighting. And if the Matrix crashes (lol) or for any reason you find yourself up close and personal with those Bad-actors you well have a fighting chance.

General information to support my Matrix and other unusual opinions; most info was obtained from web site “how stuff works”.

Feature warrior system;

It’s the "borg" effect. Everything is a sensor, fixed wing, rotor wing, UAV, ground vehicle, robotic platform and individuals. You can send or take data, video or audio from it.

Uniform provides superhuman strength. The fabric is filled with nanomachines that mimic the action of human muscles, flexing open and shut when stimulated by an electrical pulse. These nanomachines will create lift the way muscles do. Limits are the bone strength my SWAG about 300 lbs.

"It makes the soldier become a weapons platform or "F-16 on legs."

The exoskeleton will merge structure, power, control, actuation and biomechanics. Here's some of the challenges:

Structural materials - have to be made of strong, lightweight and flexible materials.

Power source – last at least 24 hours.

Control - must be seamless. Users must be able to function normally move smoothly with system engaged.

Actuation - must be quiet and efficient.

Powering the suit is a 2- to 20-watt micro turbine generator fueled by a liquid hydrocarbon. A plug-in cartridge containing 10 ounces of fuel last up to 6 days. Battery patches embedded in the helmet provide three hours of back-up power.

SP (Strategy page) infantry, Bullet Proof Batteries; March 3, 2009: A defense contractor has come up with a clever idea for solving the problem of infantry having to haul around so many batteries. While the ultimate solution is fuel cells, an interim solution is a modified E-SAPI ballistic plate with a 10mm thick lithium ion battery fitted onto it as an additional layer. The bulletproof plate is normally 25x30cm (10x12 inches) and 2.5cm (1inch) thick. Actually, there are four of these flat batteries on each plate. A special vest contains attachments for the various equipment batteries you need to recharge, or a direct connection to some equipment. The E-SAPI plates normally weigh about 5 lbs, adding the panels adds about a lb. Overall; you carry about 10% less weight and more comfortably. The powered plates will be available for sale by the end of the year (from BAE), and two of them are supposed to supply enough juice for a typical 72 hour mission.

The helmet has 360-degree situational awareness and voice amplification. GPS, radio with wide and local area network connections. With onboard computers, soldiers will be aware of their own bodies and the action around them, communication between soldiers, will use sensors that measure vibrations of the cranial cavity, eliminating the need for an external microphone. This bone-conduction technology allows communication with one another, and controls the menus visible through the drop-down eyepiece i.e. a voice activated HUD system. The sound system will allow you to know where that sniper or mortar round came from, detect other soldiers out to a couple of kilometers, i.e. focus and amplify particular sounds while canceling out noises at a certain decibel so preventing damage to ears.

The interface will be similar to Play station 2/xbox due to service personals familiarity to these systems.

SP 1/31/09 under information warfare/the American standard; Right now, all the sensors (vidcams, radars, IR) capture data at different resolutions and speeds. The new TCDL (Tactical Common Data Link) makes this sharing possible by translating all the formats to a standard data stream. Currently, the army can share UAV and helicopter videos with ground troops, and some air force video can be used by soldiers equipped with special equipment.

U.S. Army currently employs Blue Force Tracker (BFT). The system provides commanders and other units real-time picture of AO tracking unit movements etc. U.S.M.C. used BFT, although they initially opted for a more portable and rugged system called the Enhanced Position Location Reporting System, or "ePLRS." Both give real-time tracking. The downside to both systems, however, is they are bulky, old and require computer operators who should be on patrol.

SP October 18, 2008: U.S. Army is building a new version of its "BFT" (for vehicles on the battlefield). During the 2003 invasion of Iraq, (BFT, GPS/satellite telephone devices) were hastily placed in thousands of vehicles. Anyone with a laptop, satellite data receiver, the right software and access codes could then see where everyone was (via a map showing blips for each BFT user). Currently the army and Marines have 55,000 BFTs (and far fewer laptops equipped to display BFT data) and plans to get at least as many of the BFT2 units, and perhaps as many as 120,000. BFT2 is expected to start shipping in two years. There are already eight BFT2 prototypes undergoing testing.

Panzeric on SP posted; ok I think I can give you guys some much needed answers on this matter. I am the digital master trainer on the fbcb2/bft a.k.a. blue force tracker for my battalion and one of the 30 in my brigade that has the master certification. Not bad for an 11b eh. Anyways BFT for the most part is not a laptop system. And it cost a lot more than $1500 stated in the article per system. Each vehicle system cost 40k and even the laptop models cost more than the $1500 stated. As far as my brigade goes each battalion will get two laptop BFT systems and they stay in the battalion TOC. One is unclassified while the second is classified. Everyone else gets the vehicle mounted system. If you're a company commander then you get a route planning kit that will allow you to detach the monitor from the vehicle and set it up in the company CP. Ok regarding the whole falling into enemy hands things, its just not possible. If a vehicle equipped with BFT was overrun then it can pretty much self destruct itself by frying its CPU. You can destroy it yourself with literally a couple of clicks on the monitor or another vehicle can tag your vehicle and destroy it themselves. Plus once that system turns on, everyone can see you so if you know what vehicle was overrun one day and shows up on screen two days later you pretty much know where that bad guy is. All of this is unclassified information and should be easy to look up. The army is trying to get the whole system classified though. Regarding the 5 minute delay that’s true and false. For a ground vehicle its position will update every 5 min or after several hundred meters. Helicopters update every 30 sec and I believe 800m. Depending on how you have your filters set up you can send in a sitrep or message within a few seconds. I hope this answers some of your questions.

Integrated Physiological Status Monitoring System, attitude i.e. position, heart rate, core and surface temperature and dehydration.

Bionic uniform will change the logistics of war with augmented physical strength.

Liquid Body Armor - This liquid body armor is made from magneto rheological fluid (MR fluids) a fluid that remains in a liquid state until the application of a magnetic field.

One type of MR fluid consists of small iron particles suspended in silicon oil. The oil prevents the particles from rusting. The fluid transforms from liquid to solid in just milliseconds when a magnetic field or electrical current is applied to it. The current causes the iron particles to lock into a uniform polarity and stack on top of each other, creating a shield. How hard the substance becomes depends on the strength of the magnetic field or electrical current. Once the charge or magnetic field is removed, the particles unlock, and the substance goes back to a fluid state.

Source PBS, Nova, making stuff smarter; Aerogel the lightest solid ever created. A slab size of a person weights less than a pound.

Battle jacket anti bullet hole leaks. It’s a coating that seals the hole. 1 bullet hole (the size of your little finger tip) well leak 150 gallons per hour.

Graphene, one thousand times faster than silicon at conducting electricity.

I.B.M. and its Virtical Transistors i.e. nano wires.

Sharklet a material that mimics the shape of shark skin. It keeps bacteria cells from forming on the surfaces it is applied to. Thus it is planned to use it in hospitals to reduce the number one cause of hospital cost i.e. in house infections.

Newtonian fluids and non newtonain fluids. Example on Newtonian fluid OObleck it resist movement i.e. when something tries to past through it or if someone steps on it etc.

M.R. i.e. magneto Rheological fluid react to electric currents i.e. thickens or turns into solids of a sertain shape.

Piezo-electric ceramics also a shape shifting technology used for shape changing wings on aircraft. SMA shape memory alloyds i.e. artificial muscles.

Metamaterials; note the scientist said when viewed from within i.e. inside a metamaterial cloak you would see a mirrow image only. These cloaks blend light in the I.R. range I believe. The visual range is still a bit of a problem I believe they said.

Note there is an increasing use of automation i.e. computers, robots etc in our modern military when it comes to administration and logistics, maintenance as well as planning. IMO with maintenance, why not equip personnel with a HUD type system with graphics, diagrams and schematics to project images onto actual parts and thus illustrate to mechanics or anyone else that might be available, how to perform maintenance task on all this complicated equipment. Thus, there would be less need for traditional training of maintenance and perhaps medical personnel too. An interesting article I found a long the lines of this kind of technology; (Time magazine Nov. 10 2008, page 82, University of Washington, Babak Parviz’s bionic contacts. They use tiny LEDs and are powered by radio waves and solar cells).

QUALIFFIING SUMMERY

I do not claim all the information stated in Tri-F is indeed a fact and should be fallowed like a gospel. Hence, the Three golden rules (IMO some of my most important original ideas) listed just prior to the Planning section. With Tri-F, I in fact predict one will find errors, especially with any of the numerical data or formulas; I just don’t have the basic math skills I should have picked up in grade school (when I was studying tactics lol) to double check such information. In addition, as already stated this is a work in progress, much of the information still needs editing i.e. organizing, rearranging of location, word changes or reduction. With Tri-F, only a few acronyms and or phases are listed in the order in which they were discovered. Quotes I would say have all been paraphrased.

I would also like to state that a few times repeat has accrued in Tri-F, reasons for this are that the information preceding the repeat did require context to answer a question or to make a point, especially when I was giving an example. Lastly, IMO some things are just worth repeating. That being said, my personal contribution here is the order i.e. format and condensed nature meaning no filibuster bull shit repeat I have found in every Field Manual, I ever read. In light of these attributes, IMO Tri-F is an extremely valuable tool for every Marine and any Commando or Warrior.

I am aware that some of this information may no longer apply, however I feel commonsense can determine if the rule, suggestion or data would no longer hold up. Many times people have questioned me about the validity of the basic rules; however, I did not make the vast majority of them up. As already stated I copied them from numerous sources many published by the U.S. printing department i.e. Field Manuals. There for let me remind everyone that these rules developed individually over the ages, some indeed going back as far as warfare itself. So to summarize IMO on average over the ages these rules have proven to be the best rules of thumb i.e. most beneficial to those waging war on battlefield earth.

Any additional information suggestions and especially corrections to any information will be greatly appreciated.

Semper Fi

Simplify

NOTE; I felt a quick reference to general studying tips would be helpful to patriots in making the most of your time and efforts in learning Tri-F.

STUDYING

Setting; 1) Study in familiar area on regular basis. 2) Study in similar area as knowledge well be used. 3) All study material should be kept in area of study. This is to eliminate the distraction of having to go and get something.

4) Lighting, over left shoulder for right-hander, visa versa for left-hander, this is to eliminate shadows. Take care to eliminate glare to minimize fatigue. 5) Atmosphere, reduce sounds in background and perhaps put on some soft classical music. Air, note temperature and circulation. 6) Posture, good promotes coordination and endurance. Avoid remaining in same position to long, shift and stretch often or take brief walks. Pour posture, well stress muscles and joints, causing fatigue and repetitive stress injuries. As well as the position thus the functioning of organs especially in abdominal region. Setting correctly, monitor at eye level. Stomach in, wrist strait and level, forearms bent 90 degrees i.e. perpendicular to biceps. Knees level with or above hips. Feet flat on the floor. Slouching counter by keeping shoulders back and down. Imagine a head light in your chest that most always shine forward. Standing correctly there are three natural curves to the spine. The first is in the neck with it being curved slightly forward, referred to as the Cervical curve. Avoid the forward head posture (aka buzzard neck) by keeping your eyes and collarbone in the same vertical plain. The second curve is in the upper back with it being curved slightly backwards, referred to as the Thoracic curve. The third is in the lower back with it being curved slightly forward, referred to as the Lumbar. As a result, the end product, i.e. your spine resembles a re-curve bow. Continuing with tips for standing correctly, your legs should be slightly bent at the knees. Balance your weight equally on both legs and feet. Constantly shift weight around to all four corners of your feet.

Preparations; 1) Clear your mind and relax. 2) Skim though material; check dates, content, forwards, glossaries, index’s, intros and prefixes to make sure information of interest is located within the material at hand. 3) Focus your concision attention; to set your thoughts to the subject at hand, by reviewing notes and asking yourself questions. Types of attention; immediate, i.e. automatic a heighten awareness. Can be activated or developed by scanning area with eyes and ears. Conscious, with your conscious attention it is necessary to feed it information to sustain the focus. Usually immediate picks out words or images of interest then conscious records relevant information. 4) Set goals; in the short term, goals could include deciding on what chapter to read to. With long-term goals, be patient success at multi small tasks can be better than going for one large goal at once.

Conduct; 1) Read critically; get a variety of opinions. Note average person reads 150 words per minute. 2) Retain meaning over exact wording; put notes in your own words. Do not study similar subjects consecutively. 3) Know the duration of subject i.e. length of speeches, classes etc; you tend to retain more information at the beginning and end of speeches, classes, meetings, movies etc. So by knowing the duration you can pay more attention during the mid point. Memory; Diet, some say it can help to eat more fish and nuts, Blue berries are suppose to be excellent. Mind binders, this is braking up the normal routines to enhance recall for specific invents an example might be using your right hand to perform a task if you are left handed. Types of memory; Episodic memory, this is history, personal and over all events such as conversations, schedules and plans. Procedural memory, physical skills i.e. typing, biking or martial arts. Somatic memory, math, combinations or phone numbers. Stages of memory; A) Recording, i.e. acquisition, receiving, input. Note on Distortions two types, passive, counter by avoiding, making predictions or having high expectations prior to classes, events or recording information on various subjects. Active distortions discussed below. Note on Dyslexia, it can be countered by closing one eye as you record numbers or other information. B) Retaining, i.e. storage. Note on retaining names; do not judge people negatively, and if person is just unlikable try thinking of them in comical terms. Match the name with rimming descriptive words. Use mediation link i.e. match person to actions, occupation, position, posture, or surroundings. Use name as soon as possible and as often as conversation allows. Note on recognition of faces; pick out feature that stands out the most like eyes, glasses, hat, hair, ears, nose, etc. like a political cartoonist would. C) Recall, i.e. retrieving, output, usage. Note you tend to recall things the way you wish them to be, aka selectivity, example; bed, dream, night, rest, wake. Most people when asked to recall this list include the word, sleep. This is similar to what is referred to as word association. Example; ocean equaling Tide detergent, or broom equaling witch. That is to say, if a person is told a story including the word ocean then is ask to name a deterrent most people well name Tide. Also on Distortions, now active, this includes leading questions or statements i.e. planting idea that something has happened or is a fact when it has not yet been determined. Subliminal; this is manipulating the perception threshold of ones senses.

Principals of memory; 1) Interest, it is being motivated, timing and variety are very important. Do not over do i.e. push your self too far. 2) Relaxation, this involves staying calm, cool, collective, confident, concentrate on things do not worry about them. Avoid situations were your attention is divided. Eliminate all negative thinking, remember when emotions are high intellect is low and this dose work both ways. In fact, thoughts or ideas can reveal themselves as emotions thus resulting in actions in the feature. Sleep or meditation after studying can help retain information. 3) Repetition, in the short term this is repeating facts to yourself repeatedly. In the long term, this is reviewing data from time to time. 4) Organization, this involves keeping data up to date, relating new information to old and of course keeping things in some kind of general order. Note on list making, put things in progressive order according to time and place to compliment each other, i.e. chronologically. Imagery, this can involve using a familiar family room’s four walls and eight corners counting the floor and ceiling junctures. I use a one-foot equals a mile scaled world model and place information at the location it relates to. Develop a personal collection of abstract symbols, letters, words, acronyms, colors, shapes, street signs to use in your mental models. For instance with numbers you can use dominos. Also with numbers look for patterns i.e. doubles, triples, pairs or sequences of odd and or even digits. In addition, with imagery, when ever you are performing any kind of disassembly or construction task. You can interact with tools and parts, visualizing yourself in miniature. Visualizing yourself helping i.e. standing on parts, handling and positioning tools. With any imagery technique the more detailed, the better even to the point of bizarre i.e. completely out of proportion. Over all when it comes to recalling information, there are two so-called inhibitions of importance to note. Retroactive inhibitions; new information learned recently interferes with old. Proactive inhibitions; proactive because the interference is in the feature, old information effects the recall of new. Both inhibition types can be due to numerous similarities or vast differences in the data. 5) Meaningfulness, in other words how useful information is to you on a daily basis. 6) Familiarity, aka the Big picture i.e. the more you know about subjects the easier facts and data relate or fit into your over all knowledge of a given subject, thus becoming easier to retain. 7) Feed back, this is discussing information with others, comparing notes i.e. sharing or teaching. It is the number one aid to retaining information.

(Reference, Planning, Step # 3, Debriefs)

FRAGMENTED FIGHTING FACTS

NO ONE WINS, THIS IS FORGOTTEN. WARS ARE EASY TO START, EXSPENSIVE TO CONTINUE AND DIFFICULT TO STOP. WARS OFTEN BEGIN WHEN SOMEONE FEELS VICTORY IS ASSURED. THE FIGHT CONTINUES LARGLY BECAUSE OF NATIONAL AND PERSONAL PRIDE. WARS END WHEN ONE OR BOTH SIDES ARE DEVASTATED, DEMORALIZED AND RARELY SUDDENLY ENLIGHTEN BY THE ABSURDITY OF IT ALL.

James Dunnigan

Then there is this…

THERE IS NO WAY TO PEACE, PEACE IS THE WAY.

The pacifist motto

Three golden rules

1) There well be times for exceptions to the rules; due to circumstances. 2) Avoid setting patterns; from time to time, you should conduct yourself in an unorthodox manor as apposed to an orthodox manor. Make a habit of considering if not choosing alternatives to unfolding situations. Pattern avoidance techniques, IMO the U.S. can start by not using, go go go go, I just want to add girls to that every time I hear it, why don’t Marines esp. use the old OOH- RAH, GET SOME etc. IMO every time the enemy hears go, go go go, they can be 90% sure that at that moment your entering i.e. attacking. 3) Think like the foe; for instance recall and consider your offensive knowledge when in the defense to predict your foes offensive plans.

The fallowing is from Mr Aguilar’s site “Sniper Flash Cards”, edited comments from Aslan Maskhadov. It appears Mr. Aguilar has mixed his own words and experiences with Mr. Maskhadov’s.

He may go on to spin all kinds of fanciful strategems for carrying out a counter-attack, and send hundreds of "secret" messages (using the ever popular substitution cipher) giving "orders" to his "troops," but all that really matters is that everybody knows that the invaders have committed themselves to a raid. Then, each civilian sniper independently rolls a six sided die. If they are disciplined, and they must be to trust their fate to chance, they will attack as follows:

Die Roll

Action

Attack the target from the NW

Attack the target from the NE

Attack the target from the SW

Attack the target from the SE

Attack the nearest freeway off-ramp from the left

Attack the nearest freeway off-ramp from the right

The purpose of using dice is to get the civilian snipers to completely surround the target, regardless of local conditions. You can't just tell them to spread out. There must be some mechanism in place that automatically results in the snipers distributing themselves evenly around the target.

Unless they roll dice, civilian snipers will invariably do one of three things:

1) They will make a beeline for the target without any attempt to think tactically until they are actually being shot at. The invaders aren't stupid. They knew before the raid began that there was a large residential neighborhood nearby and one or two choke points, like bridges, directly between it and the target. They'll probably have heavy, water cooled machine guns pouring bullets onto those bridges. This is one reason why I advocate civilian snipers being mounted on motorcycles. It only takes a few minutes to make a three mile radius around a target and approach it from the other side. Pedestrians don't have time for that.

2) They will go to a shooting position that seems "optimal," based on general tactical principles. For instance, elsewhere on this website I have suggested firing over a barrier, like a canal, to prevent mounted troops from rushing you. That's good advice if you're the only one in the field and are attacking a target that nobody else is aware of. It's bad advice if 90% of the civilian snipers in town are elbowing each other out of the way to position themselves behind the only canal in the vicinity. The invaders will just drop a bomb on the sniper's "optimal" shooting position.

3) They will neglect to consider the path that the enemy's reinforcements will take. Initial contact with an enemy patrol accomplishes only two things: It pins them down by wounding one or two of them, and it causes them to radio for help. The response to such a call will be impressive. A cop was once shot a few blocks from where I lived, my balcony overlooking a major thoroughfare. His vest stopped the bullet, he shot his assailant a dozen times and then radioed in an “officer down” call. I did not observe this, but I did observe the response. Thirteen patrol cars raced past, all with lights and sirens on. They took up all three lanes of the street, pushing everybody aside. There were probably another thirteen approaching in a similar manner from the other direction. This is why rolls five and six of the die direct the snipers to attack the nearest freeway off-ramp. Far more enemy casualties can be produced by attacking the reinforcements than attacking the patrol that was initially engaged and is now dug in and waiting for those reinforcements.

Newjarheaddean; As one can see I have the previous notes highlighted in yellow do to the fact I have not yet decided what all to keep and exactly were it well be nor do I agree with it all. Dose anyone care to discuse this material?

PLANNING

In this section, I have done my best to eliminate the repeat, filibuster and general B.S., which is found in all Field manuals. IMO Uncle Sam likes to change his terms and acronyms at every level of command and annually in most cases. Examples listed below…

I got this info mostly from the site “Supper Marine”. And just for your info Marines, the Corp inspires Vs motivates, motivation is like caffeine it only last for a while.

Troop leading steps; BAMCIS:
B - Begin Planning
A - Arrange Reconnaissance
M - Make Reconnaissance
C - Complete Planning
I - Issue Orders
S - Supervise (Supervise being the most important step)

Five paragraph order; O-SMEAC
O - Orientation
S - Situation
M - Mission
E - Execution
A - Administration and Logistics
C - Command and Signal

Contents of the Admin and Logistics paragraph of the 5 Paragraph Order i.e. Five Bs;
Beans - Food
Bullets - Ammunition
Batteries - Communication Resupply
Band-Aids - Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC)
Bad Guys - Enemy POWs

Acronyms for tactical control measures and planning:
LOD - Line of Departure (a line designated to coordinate the beginning of an attack)
FCL - Final Coordination Line (coordinates final deployment of assault echelon)
RFL - Restrictive Fire Line (limits the fires and effect of fires of maneuver elements)
FEBA - Forward Edge of the Battle Area
MBA - Main Battle Area

Estimating the situation; METT-TSL
M - Mission
E - Enemy
T - Terrain and Weather
T - Troops and Fire Support Available
TSL - Time, Space, and Logistics

Steps in establishing the defense; SAFE-SOC

S - Security

A - Automatic Weapons

F - Interlocking Fields of Fire

E - Entrenchment

S - Select primary and supplementary firing positions

O - Construct Obstacles

C - Camouflage, cover and concealment

What are the fundamentals of the defense? KOCOA

K - Key terrain

O - Observation and Fields of Fire

C - Cover and Concealment

O - Obstacles

A - Avenues of Approach

Many of the letters in these acronymns excuse me mimonics, are repetitive i.e. represent the same information, and you would find all of these and many more imo involved in various stages of the planning or various levels of command with in the systems used by U.S. services. This keeps generations of U.S. service women and men confused and bewildered i.e. busy learning to speak the new language and thus thinking they have learned something useful, which is only necessary because of all the never-ending changes in terms and acronyms describing the same age-old procedures of planning. My point here is that if Uncle Sam would “STOP THAT”, a warrior class could develop i.e. military knowledge would be passed from one generation to the next. Moreover, as previously stated imo conflicts would come down to who was in the right. However, of course I understand that, that is exactly what the U.S government, dose not want. Anyways any information that is covered in any of the above acronyms you well find it covered (once) in my system.

NOTE; before going any further, you need to understand the fallowing about this (Planning) section. IMO there are three phases and six steps in preparing to conduct a military operation or any organized effort.

The first Phase we well refer to as Planning; in this phase you well use all your mental faculties over coming mental challenges i.e. brain storming. Some things IMO worth considering are as fallows; O’Neal’s law, which is “Murphy was an optimist”. In addition, keep in mind, no plan survives the first few minutes of any battle. The important things are always simple, the simple things are always difficult. History has show long periods of peace, create wide gaps between theory and actual combat.

The next phase is Preparation; this is when you well conduct reduced force then full dress rehearsals. You begin Pre-positioning of equipment, supplies and troops. Start decoy and psychological operations. Short time between completing preparations and implementation. Note here the tried and true VC tactical doctrine of four fast one slow; fast advance, fast assault, fast battlefield clearance, and fast withdrawal (aabcd) are based on slow preparation.

The final phase is the Execution phase this is implementing your plan i.e. conducting your mission.

(Reference also see Step # 2 Cmdrs intent, Decision guidance, part B) Time available and Step # 3, Pro guerrilla/insurgency operations, “Exploitation phase”)

Finally, you need to know that this system should be seen and utilized as a cyclic system. Steps 1-4 are repeated at least three times in the Planning and the Preparation phases then in the Execution phase, step 4 is replaced with step 5 and step 6. Six being viewed as a last but not least task and a continuous modus operandi (M.O.) i.e. Standard operational procedure, S.O.P.. The steps are as fallows.

STEP 1) Gathering information;

Information gathered is listed and organized in various I.S.A.L.U.T.E. - R.W.P. reports. Examples are located in Step # 3 Concept of operations part (A). What information is to be gathered? The best way to answer that question is to consider everything listed in Tri-F, i.e. if you need to know something to conduct an operation, odds are your foe will have a counter part and you should be trying to discover it. For example the Commander’s intent, explained in step # 2. Information is to be gathered on current and potential foes to include current allies. Take away the enemy’s recon and you are on the road to victory i.e. denying foe the ability to know your preparations adds to your odds of winning. Recon dose give ones intentions away, however knowledge cannot be gained from ghost, spirits nor projected from heaven, it most be gathered from a trusted man on the ground (a Marine). A sufficient amount of human intelligence can determine what is real or true and what is not. This is far more convincing than data from electronic sensors on satellites, aircraft or other platforms, which may appear much more precise and tangible, but can be misleading and fail to discern between real or diversionary data. Or for that matter, information from spies that might be double or expendable i.e. dead agents.

Five types of spies; Local from the local area, i.e. area of operations. Internal their people, i.e. member of the target organization. Turned aka Double agent i.e. foes spies working for us. These are most important, seek them out make great offers i.e. bribes. Do what you can to make them appear capable and reliable to their own, for instance instruct and feed information to them. Dead spy aka Expendable, used to spread falls information to foe’s agents. Or sacrificed to promote a double agent. Living spy, are simply those that survive. No relationships are closer than those with spies and no rewards are greater. Thus, espionage is expensive. Many females go into intelligence work because they are bared from combat the traditional road to promotion. Intelligence work, requires, attention to nuance, diligence, perception, and good communication skills. These are just the traits females’ tent to have an edge over their male counterparts. In addition, there is no premium on physical strength.

POWs and informants are a copious source of human intelligence. People are difficult to deal with and interpret, that is their intent or motivations. Cross checks on their information is difficult to verify. Nothing parishes faster than information. Lots of information is just contingency plans for possible operations. When playing the great game you are exploiting the nature of the intelligence analyst. All is not what is appears to be. It is quite easy to create an illusion where none is intended. It is often not just a matter of different analyst coming to different conclusions. Each intelligence organization represent/have different interest/requirements. Another problem is differences between cultures, interpreting information or events differently.

Example; U.S. vs. Russia, the two cultures don’t think alike, it’s a classic (OCEANIC VS. CONTENINTAL) (NAVY VS. ARMY) situation. Most analyst are never able to fully perceive the unique mind set of their opposite. Scattered individuals do posses the abilities. However in most nations especially totalitarian factions, group mentality and party solidarity work against logical/correct interpretations. Highly advanced and open societies publish lots of written information like manuals. However, equipment is better to analyze. Russia is at a disadvantage here do to more export sales.

The fallowing info is highlighted in pink do to the fact I’m brain storming here, spiff-balling etc Also I was realizing that on this copy I had used green i.e. for noting changes made in this copy as compared to others, however some of the green could also have been yellow highlighted too, do to the fact that it was not just a change but unedited, but who cares right.

From the battlefield with unfolding situations information could be categorized by Timeline to include date the timeline is the most important factor/criteria, for processing information through the chain of command. Situation next so receiver knows how urgent, Command, Location.

Example; i.e. possibilities are; Situation 1) Tactical, covered Command levels, Individual Marine, Fireteam, Squad, Platoon, Company or Battalion. We’ll stick with A.O. i.e. area of operations to represent the area your unit is responsible for. IMO the A.O. would be defined by the unit’s ability (based on its Organic weapons or systems maximum ranges, NOT any supportive means it can draw on) to monitor/observe/influence or attack a given area. If you get silly I would say sending letters would be covered by Division.

Note also consider as we continue with the time, situation, command and location format information would usually coincide. That is to say duplicates would be coming in. I think the 911 systems have been dealing with that one. LOL. One suggestion would be to choice a lead/main and just record others if low on personal for instance. Tactical Timeline covering twenty-four hours or less.

Situation 2) Operational, here the units become the second in the chain of command if you well. They are your immediate supervion and reserves. So units handle the procument, Storage and analyeis i.e. turning info into intelligence for Command levels of Battalion, Regiment or Division, depending on you organizations structure. Location level, Theater covering Regions i.e. Middle East, South America or a particular Nation and its surrounding Nations. Timeline covering twenty-four hours and one second ago (LOL) and up to a mouth.
Situation 3) Strategic covering, procurement, Storage and analysis etc. for Command levels Division, Corps or service Branch Headquarters. Location level, covering Global information pertaining to locations anywhere on earth that dose not originate in one of the other two location levels. This strategic global level would also cover information about Near Space (12-62 miles of altitude) or actual space assets. Thus the top Headquarters, would divide its database into the three situation and various sub level levels. However the Corp or Division (which ever is your highest) tactical and operational databases would merely be backup copies. (See fallowing information Headquarters task). Strategic Timeline, one mouth or more.

Furthermore your top level of command would truly be more like an overall Strategy think tank. And investigate any alleged discrepancies by lower command sepecially the individual Marine reports, i.e. Cmdr using all leadership guidelines in reverse.

Headquarters’ task; headquarters monitors and maintains all primary databases at tactical and operational levels thus supervising all units databases and actions. Only the strategic database is a headquarters original and for the Generals eyes-only, if you well.

Note a database is not synonymous with ideal storage; it is the constant analytical center. Today’s modern units operating under any so-called Network centric warfare or Sea power 21 concepts would dictate that Headquarters become the webmaster. This would not only involve analyzing large amounts of information in all databases, but distributing it too. Analyzing data includes checking the accuracy and looking for indications of patterns as well as combining related information to maximize its usefulness, at a minimum. It is very important that patterns noted in lower level databases be sent to Headquarters. Other priority information to be sent (aka pushed) to Headquarters would be items like maps, photos, diaries or flyers. Various personnel assigned to monitor lower level databases yet physically located at Division or Corp Headquarters (which ever is your highest) would conduct this analyzing and lower to higher “pushing” i.e. downloading. Note only if modern computer networks where not available would it be necessary for lower level command personnel located with the various commands to conduct this function, by all means necessary i.e. radio, couriers etc. However, with computer networks, ideally lower level units need only to fight battles and feed information to their database, and then receive Intelligence from Headquarters.

Note the difference between Information and Intelligence, Information is the raw data, before it has been analyzed i.e. checked for accuracy, patterns and combined with other data to maximize its usefulness and thus converted into Intelligence.

Information possessing; all Commanders must constantly note what is known or unknown i.e. tangible or intangible with people places and events. Incoming information i.e. input, is received at a database, analyzed then used within a unit or sent to other databases. Out going information i.e. output, has been sent (“pushed”) or shared. The distribution of intelligence and the concept of “push” must have a clear definition. Push is not about higher commands sharing all information with everyone, which leads to information overload. Rather “push” is where someone who has relevant information shares it with or (pushes) it to the proper unit so that information can be utilized i.e. converted into intelligence or acted upon.

Term Actionable intelligence (IMO actionabull) i.e. bullshit hope and hype term. Prioritizing information; in this system time becomes the most important categorizing or organizing factor. Hence, IMO all information would first be analyzed to see if it applies to the tactical situation of all tactical commands then operational and lastly strategic and so on.

Prioritizing criteria; possibilities are Time, clock and date the information was received. Context, is it stated in present or past tense, is the information in the form of a question i.e. possible request or is it a statement i.e. possible verification. Location, area information originated from or referred to.

(Reference, Step # 2 Commander’s intent, Decision guidance.)

Note all this would require titles and keywords I have not put any thought into yet.

Example of prioritizing a message; fireteam requesting a dust off for a Marine who has fallen ill. This information would go into the system by means of data entry, radio transmission or maybe just a visual, observed by Strategic command with real time UAV, near space, satellite imagery or just a pair of binoculars viewing from the physical high ground. Recalling the SOP of using couriers i.e. secure means to keep bad news or casualties’ secret. Keeping in mind IMO anytime a firefight starts medical evacuation transport and equipment would be pre-positioned to perform quick reaction extractions (lol) just like air rescue teams.

Continuing with example, Strategic command would observe this request in the fireteams computer database if data categorized as Situation Tactical, Command level Tactical i.e. including I.D. of unit, Location level Tactical including grid co-ordinance, Timeline tactical in twenty-four hour clock and date. Then Strategic command would generate a request to the proper unit and level of command. Most likely and lets just say a Regiment. Thus, the strategic commands request would be categorized as Situation level Operational, Command level Operational including I.D. of unit being hailed, Location level Operational i.e. this is location of unit being hailed. Timeline Tactical i.e. related to Fireteams initial request and until it is more than twenty-four hours old. The Regiments reply would go to the fireteams database NOT to Strategic Commands. Thus it is categorized as Situation, Command, Location Tactical i.e. location of WIA. Timeline already explained. Thus Strategic and tactical unit making original request both get confirmation at same tactical time.

Note handlers are always portrayed as males, but there is the closer. Ha!

Is message from a mobile or stationary operator? Recon or infantry. Logistics, engineer etc.

Categories of “intelligence Items” 1) persons/organizations, 2) items, 3) After action reports/ Documents/ events, infrastructure/terrain and weather. Note these items were all mentioned separately in the MCA article I combined them.

Any time the unit calls for support from guns or air etc this is a Theater

Radio procedures;

Always know your location or at least note some kind of F.O.R. before going on the air. When you are on the fringes of communications, (such as in a building or at the communications boundaries edge) look for a receiving "hot spot" site and use it. Don't walk around talking while in a communications fringe area. Repeaters have much more power than you’re handheld. Even if you have a good signal from a repeater, it does not mean you are good going into the repeater. Lesson to radio for a few seconds to make sure no one else is communicating. Key mike for at least two seconds to ensure the first part of your message is not cut off, talk across the microphone i.e. hold the face of the microphone at a right angle to your face. Identify whom you are calling by call sign. Then identify yourself by saying “this is” fallowed by your call sign and “over”. Don’t forget to unkey the mike. After contact has been made i.e. once you have been acknowledged by the unit you are calling you may omit “this is” and give your message. Never say numbers in combinations, transmit number sequences as a series of individual numbers. Spell out proper names using the phonetic alphabet. If your message is a question, deduction, WAG, or hearsay, identify it as such. Just like separating facts from opinions in written messages with a line. Many people with radios have a tendency to talk and/or repeat too much. Say what you need to say without unnecessary repeats. Keep in mind that you must strive to get your message through the first time. Speak slowly; pausing after logical phrases, especially important if the message needs to be written down. Speak, distinctly, clearly; and do not let your voice trail off at the end of words or sentences. Give each and every word equal force.

Do not use the word "break" when you pause. It is confusing, wastes time and has other connotations i.e. Brake is used if some emergency requires you to stop giving the radio your undivided attention. You end each transmission with “over” or “clear”. If the other station has questions, they should key up and make their request known. This also permits others with emergency traffic to break in. When you are completely through you end with “this is (call sign) over and out”.

If you did not understand any part of a message reply with “say again”.

When you have understood the message, acknowledge the receipt with the word "roger". The word "copy" is used to ask if someone is ready to copy your message. If you must write notes acknowledge that you received the message with copy or acknowledge fallowed with “stand by”. In 1957 "roger" was replaced by "romeo," the current designation, but by then "roger" = "received" was so entrenched that the brass knew better than to try and change it.

Intelligence preparation of the battle field, I.P.B., Area studies, Net assessments:

Comparing of intelligence on two nations/groups to answer questions concerning mission and most likely victor. Receptiveness; determining if a particular group will respond favorably to a particular psyops task. Actual and possible behavior of group, before during and after ops. Vulnerabilities; possible reprisals for cooperation. Weaknesses of any kind that a competitor could exploit to reduce support or security of an Allie. Daily activities; routines when they sleep, (people on the street (P.O.S.) sleep during the day to avoid bugs, rats and snakes that come out at night) get up, what and when they eat, where and how they get there food and water. P.O.S. do grocery store dining i.e. left a few eggs from carton. As well as taking advantage of all free samples i.e. promotional give a ways. Location of items connected with various aspects of life and ceremonies. Pay attention to not only obvious but subtle ways group demonstrates views, gestures, accepted ways of meeting. Who is lessoned too most often and under what conditions and circumstances, especially emergencies. Note out side help the particular needs, views of friends’, values, judging one another, accepted extremes. Diversity within groups is not uncommon. Separated segments living in isolation can be of radically different compositions biological, sociological customs, conflicting histories, religion, political and materiel needs.

The Qawm [tribe], not Afghanistan, is the basic unit of social community and, outside the family, the most important focus on individual loyalty.

History Irish the brits didn’t understand 60k of us had given our life’s at Somme. Irish guerrilla units. Provies, stickies, taigs, prods and brits: the INLA, UDA, UVF, UFF; SDLP, Unionists, loyalists and peace people: orange orders, black orders and UDR men who murdered Catholics: and protestants who called themselves Irish. It was too much for me all I saw here was a confusing mass of tribes and clans.

Criminals, trust is established on the bases of personal history, experiences, criminal acts/M.O., customs, foods, up bringing, neighborhoods and prisons, ethnicity, shared friends, forms of entertainment, recreation, dress habits, languages. Italian is as much a language of gestures and facial expressions.

Groups should not be judged by your values. But based on groups social values and experiences, history. People posses’ attitudes because they meet current or past needs. Races that live in tropics and in country of jungle/brush are timid as compared to men who live in Mountains, and nomadic wonders of desert or Islanders. Often previously written reports are to general in nature or bias to be of any use. Talk directly to others who have been there. Evaluation of discussions made to discover errors. Conclusions made by you previously will be treated as tentative in nature. When asking questions, any suggestion of correct answers will be avoided. People tend to give answers they think you won’t to here. With these things in mind a revaluation can be made. Company commanders spending lots of time at city council meetings.

SP the data mining was initially used to figure out who the bomb making crews were, and where they operated from. Then, using math techniques first developed during WWII, the intel geeks began creating predictions about where IEDs were most likely to show up next. These predictive models get better as the quality of the information going into them improves i.e. as history record improves terrorists captured and interrogated.

“The real problem in gathering info as we shop (local markets) etc is the language barrier, each of my men has a pack of flash cards with basic phrases in English and Arabic, the Arabic spelled phonetically and also in script. If he can't say it right, he can point." Some troops purchased computerized translation systems like (Phrase-later). The PDA sized unit allows the user to speak into it, and in a few seconds, what was said comes out in Arabic or any other language the Phrase-later is programmed for.

U.S. offered the large Arabic speaking population in the State of Ohio special one tour enlistment packages, with big bonuses. It didn't matter how old they were, there was no PFT, all they wanted was translators who they knew would be loyal to us. "Finally, I've told the locals that anyone who works for us will be eligible for a Green Card. SP 10/10/08 but the danger is great. From 2005-7, when two out of every thousand American soldiers serving in Iraq were killed, some 30 out of every thousand translators died. In June, 2006, ten interpreters were killed in Afghanistan.

SP the oldest biometric is your appearance, which is pretty unique. Next came fingerprints, which were first recognized as a biometric indicator four centuries ago, but did not become a feature of police work until 150 years ago. That was followed by blood types and a whole bunch of stuff you could only do with dead bodies. New forms of evidence are using unique behaviors of people to identify them. The first one of these to get heavy use was typing patterns. First discovered in the 19th century, when telegraph operators found they could recognize each other by the pattern each used when tapping the telegraph key. This was called an operators "chop", and now applies to keyboards, software is used to recognize individuals.

Cheaper and higher resolution digital cameras made possible new biometric identifiers, like gait analysis (we each walk with a distinctive gait). Used as a surveillance tool i.e. allowing UAVs to spot elusive terrorists. Of course you can deceive behavioral biometrics, but it isn't easy, and you're never sure that your change up has fooled the software.

Pattern recognition software, it might be used not only for color, but size, shape, texture, and movement, thus I.D. items.

(Reference, PCP, rule # 8)

“Besides the pictures, iris and fingerprints, what other information is tied to this biometric?” LT. COL. VELLIQUETTE: “well, when you take the person's biometrics, you have them bring in their jensea (ph) card, which is the Iraqi national identification card. Essentially we're assigning fingerprints to this person's identity. So all that information off the jensea card (ph) his name, address, other personal biographical information, his height, weight, hair color all the travel names, father's name, mother's name is all entered into the database. And the database is both in English and Arabic.

Equip every patrol with a camera. If the patrol is fired on, it attempts to get a picture of those doing the firing. Then, a "contract" is put out on those who can be identified. Sponsor a local T.V. program where POWs who have killed civilians are interrogated by the local police. This has been highly effective in Iraq. IMO; But don’t show it on CNN.

Distinguish between POWs on the basis of motivation, tribe, religion or some other basis that local people will recognize. Then, treat some as “honored guests” and send them home, while continuing to detain others. This can cause suspicions and divisions among our opponents. "One time, we planted someone to get kidnapped. A Nighthunter disguised as an NGO worker. We had implanted a tracking device in his body. During his captivity we learned a lot about our enemies. It was easy to rescue him knowing exactly where he was."

(Reference, COE, rule # 17)

Blue color workers use to gather information. IMO Guerrillas do not kill temporary workers like CNN portrays. Relatives kidnapped to make them cooperate, provide support i.e. relatives living overseas are used as fund raisers or their family members in the old country are killed.

In Ireland against the I.R.A. operatives gathered information with a laundry service, worked two ways, first by chatting to the housewives who provided the mounds of soiled clothes and second by allowing for forensic examination. Also laundry mats, using sensors in ducking to detect traces of explosives or collect other DNA evidence. RFIDs, real Id ACT. Money at ATM serial numbers recorded, then at point of being spent i.e. at stores too by recording of the stores, bank deposits, if nothing else.

Reported by weekly standard 1/30/09 concerning victims of US UAV missile strikes in FATA. U.S. Army issued payments to the families of those killed, including the Taliban commander. The Associated Press reports: On the back of an Afghan army truck, U.S. officials paid $40,000 in Afghan currency to representatives of the 15 people killed — $2,500 for each death plus $500 for two wounded men and $1,500 for village repairs. Lt. Col. Steven Weir, a military lawyer who helped oversee the payments, said the payments were not an admission by the U.S. that innocents were killed. "It's a condolence payment," he said. "The villagers said none of them were in the Taliban, just peaceful individuals from the village. So by this payment they will understand it's not our goal to kill innocent people. This may help them understand we're here to build a safer and more secure Afghanistan." When asked if the U.S. was paying money to relatives of people that the U.S. had wanted to kill or capture, Weir said: "If we did accidentally shoot someone, we want to make that right, and if we have to pay money to someone who didn't deserve it ... it's kind of like it's better to let nine guilty people go free than to jail one innocent person."

But didn't the Taliban commander "deserve it"? It's just this kind of fuzzy logic that gets U.S. troops killed. The money given to the Taliban commander's family will be funneled back into the Taliban coffers--in fact, the odds are good the Taliban will move back into the town and collect all of the money disbursed.

Statement by Michael Asher an SAS member, living with a nomadic tribe in the Sahara. This tribe valued nothing so much as courage and endurance they were a stern rugged people who had survived for centuries where survival was only just possible. These nomads lived by a code as strict as anything I had known in the SAS. A man must defend his traveling companions until death. He must offer hospitality to complete strangers and guard them with his life while they dwelt in his tent. He must share every last drop of water and every last piece of food. He must take upon himself the sacred duty of revenge especially for an affront to the honor of his tribe. These people had no outlets for their violence as we had had in the army. I realized there were no fist-fights to determine pecking order, no milling. Fist fights are after all a kind of game played to a set of conventions. These nomads did not know how to make a fist; they carried daggers and were not slow to use them. Every fight was a fight to the death. To them, war was a limited affair, a skirmish in which one or two people were killed and honor was satisfied, in a fight to defend your life, wife, land or livestock. These were things a man could fight for. I thought there was no shame in being a warrior, it had been and honorable profession since the dawn of time. However our society had become so huge and complex that you were fighting not for things that really mattered but for abstract concepts or merely a police action. It was then that I learned my final lesson, fight, but do not fight another man’s war. These nomads had few of the illusions of so called civilization. They did not as Carl Gustav Jung said, “believe in the welfare state, in universal peace, in the equality of man, in his eternal human rights, in justice, truth or the kingdom of god on earth”. There struggle for existence over the millennia had taught them the sad truth. Mans life, is a complex of inexorable (relentless) opposites day and night, birth and death, happiness and misery, good and evil. They are not sure, even that one will prevail against the other, or that good will avenge evil or joy defeat pain. Life is a battle ground. It always has been and it always well be. If it were not so, existence would come to and end. The ability of people to dehumanize anyone outside their own tribe is the sole cause of war. It is also paradoxically the reason for human survival. The world exists in harmony, but everywhere nature is in conflict tooth and claw. Conflict is what gives nature its structure. Adversity like love, makes you a person, it defines you and gives you an identity. Identity not food or land is what the fighting is really about. The enemy is what makes you yourself. Without the enemy you are nothing.

Churchill on the FATA tribesmen; They, when they fight among themselves, bear little malice, and the combatants not infrequently make friends over the corpses of their comrades or suspend operations for a festival or a horse race. At the end of the contest cordial relations are at once re-established. And yet so full of contradictions is their character, that all this is without prejudice to what has been written of their family vendettas and private blood feuds. Their system of ethics, which regards treachery and violence as virtues rather than vices, has produced a code of honor so strange and inconsistent, that it is incomprehensible to a logical mind. I have been told that if a white man could grasp it fully, and were to understand their mental impulses -- if he knew, when it was their honor to stand by him, and when it was their honor to betray him; when they were bound to protect and when to kill him--he might, by judging his times and opportunities, pass safely from one end of the mountains to the other. But a civilized European is as little able to accomplish this, as to appreciate the feelings of those strange creatures, which, when a drop of water is examined under a microscope, are revealed amiably gobbling each other up, and being themselves complacently devoured.

Types of campaigns; Demonstrative: Tactics, hunger strikes, boycotts, hostage taking, warnings announced in advance of attacks, avoids undermining sympathy. Lots of property damage. Many people watching, not dieing. It is as much political theater as violent. Goals include gaining publicity for recruitment, attention to grievances, gain support from sympathizers on the other side, 3^rd parties. Examples of groups using this method. Orange volunteers of N. Ireland, National liberation army of (Colombia) Red brigades of (Italy). Destructive: AKA Robin Hood. Tactics, Selective killings, balance between fear and sympathy. Ex; killing only the rich or certain group. May under take Suicidal missions for vital reason. Suicide missions vs. suicide attack. Suicide mission, attempted even though the odds are greatly against success. Plan also includes some attempt to survive and or escape. Suicide Campaigns: aka the art of martyrdom. Tactics, all out, no concern for saving sympathy. Pros: suggest no threat can deter. Suicide attacker deliberately orchestrates the circumstances around death to further increase expectations of future attacks. Can also make last minute adjustments, one attacker allowed himself to be run over to place bomb in the correct location. No escape plan or rescue necessary. Secondary task Ex; information gathering immediately before attack. SP Most of them have come from the Meshud tribe in Waziristan. Here, a small group of Meshud tribesmen have been recruiting suicide bombers. The Meshudi terrorists claim they can take a volunteer and train and equip them for a suicide bomb attack in six hours. This follows the pattern in Iraq, were a few terrorist cells produced most of the suicide bombers.

Recruitment of Assets, with suicide bombers Head hunters look for those sympathetic to group’s cause, loners who have little future. Uneducated little chance of mirage, people who are not good looking, homosexuals, out case, minimum family ties. Families can be large or small, poor or rich. Especially those who have lost love ones. People living away from home. Passive outlook, sights air of resignation, quietness lack of interest, communication or appetite. With people in general first work on weak then those less frequently aroused more stable. Use verity of approaches, lines of persuasion. Consequently there’s a better chance of hitting on common ground. Always carry cigarettes and lighter. Ideas of others must be respected stress accord and a sincere approval of ones values. Avoid dogmatisms and minor disagreements, people like to win, keep larger picture in mind. Gain report by showing interest in there tools and skills. You might comment on how hard they work. What a difficult job it was. People hear and incorporate only what they understand. Never promise them anything unless you can deliver. Person is isolated and alienated then just as they can't take it anymore, the planned/chance meeting in public. Every thing said at first meeting/appearance has to be provable or true. You could, use the old confession in second meeting “I was not sure about you, so I lied, you understand” Etc. The pitch a slow methodical mine game. High ranking respected member embraces recruit in public. Make them feel important needed, recruit told of his /her talents virtues that pertain to mission/group, such as loyalty to the group, not individual thoughts. To control others you must firsts ID what they see as reward, then control reward based on performance. To ID reward consider all possibilities, especially those they may not be aware of. Greed, punishment, intimidation, peace, health, acceptance, approval, companionship, fulfillment, love, physical power, praise, morality, righteousness- (appealing to there sense of right and wrong), spiritual, sexuality, income. Watchers do back ground cheeks, looking for leads to other groups. Recruits first used as support so more can be learned about them there family and past. Suspicious activity sleepy, overly observant/nosy, regularly injured. Black men do not stand out as being resent arrival from north or south. When there is a spy suspected within camp, have Marines retire to tents. Spies well have nowhere to go. The buddy system to prevent spy within units, Marines are teamed up. They are always together. Allow Marines to pick first partner, spies may team up. Then commander chooses alternates. Final recruitment step, person is placed on short list. Sleepers AKA pathfinders if they act as support for other units. Sleepers cannot be left alone indefinitely. However long term relationships with Handlers, to reaffirm reliability are difficult to maintain with out arousing rival suspicions.

Motives; coercion two choices, punishment or denial. Altruistic - Have a sense of duty for majority. Appeal for public approval. Often a public act. EX; Jihadist. Egoistic – Mostly by individuals. 15/20% leave notes usually for family, 80% male, 60% suffer from depression, have been recently hospitalized, 30% severe physical terminal illness, 25% alcoholics or drug users. Confronts issues alone, usually a private act. Psychological trauma leads to isolation from society. Seen as typical crazies, ordinary case public disapproves. Fatalistic – Doomsday beliefs often have been brainwashed. Members of a strictly controlled group or organization. Suicide pacts, timing often coincides with and imminent threat of intrusion by outsiders. Public misunderstands. Ex; cults, mostly if not all are Christians. Characterized by bizarre and eccentric practices. Marked as members, tattoos or even castration. Vows of silence. Polygamy, public confessions, communal punishment. The structure of Heaven's Gate resembled that of a Medieval Monastic order. Group members gave up their material possessions and lived a highly ascetic life devoid of any indulgences. Everything was shared communally. Six of the male members of the cult voluntarily underwent castration as an extreme means of maintaining the ascetic lifestyle. Heavens gate. Leader Marshall Applewhite and Bonnie Nettles. Located in a house on a ranch in Sante Fe near San Diego. Suicide act on March 26 1997. Deaths #39. Other examples, Jim Jones people’s temple. In Jonestown Guyana. Leader Jim Jones. Group drank cyanide laced Kool-Aid. On Nov. 18 1978 Deaths # 900. Branch Davidians. At Waco Texas. Leader David Koresh. Burned to death, on April 19 1993, Deaths # 76. The order of the solar temple. At locations in Switzerland and Quebec. On Oct. 1994, Dec. 1995, and March? 1997. Death total #74. Movement for the restoration for the ten commandments of god, A Ugandan doomsday cult. Sang hymns, doused themselves with gas, and set themselves on fire. On March 18, 2000. Deaths # 230.

Study by Shin bet the Israeli version of the FBI; male suicide bombers tend to be introverts, the women less so. The women are older and better educated than their male counterparts. Out of 67 women recruited for suicide attacks from 2002 to 2005, 33% were college graduates and an additional 39% had finished high school. Males are usually in their late teens to early twenties with little education. Israeli intelligence believes women receive far less training and preparation for their suicide missions than do men. Why do they do it? Some are motivated by the promise of paradise. Other motives are revenge, and to restore family honor. Many women point to private tragedy or shame. Recruiters, who approach them on campus or through internet chat rooms, well make romantic advances that the women fall for. Some see it as preferable to an arranged marriage. Some because fathers refused to let them marry boyfriends. Sumya first martyr (female or city?)

In some cases, organizations have paid rewards of $11,000 to the Pakistani and Afghan families of suicide bombers, many of whom are cancer patients or heroin addicts, according to U.S. military communications intercepts.

During 2000–2004, there were 472 suicide attacks in 22 countries, killing more than 7,000 and wounding tens of thousands. 80 % of suicide attacks since (1968? 1998?) occurred after the September 11 attacks, with jihadis representing 31 of the 35 responsible groups. More suicide attacks occurred in 2004 than in any previous year, and 2005 has proven even more deadly, with attacks in Iraq alone averaging more than one per day. Suicide attacks annualized by decade; 1981-1991 5 attacks, 1991-2000 15 attacks, 2001-2005 180 attacks. Suicide attacks world wide 2001- 2005; 2001 (81), 2002 (91), 2003 (99), 2004 (163) 2005 (460). Also 301 of the 315 attacks prior to 9/11 shown to be part of campaigns for large organizations. Most important is community support for martyrs. Democracies are more vulnerable. Definition of a Democracy, leader and legislature must be elected, there most be more than one party. With at lease one peaceful transfer of power. Ex: US, France, India, Israel, CIS, Sri Lanka, Turkey. They are seen as weak compared to a dictatorship. The Kurdish PKK fighting with Turkey and Iraq is a good example of only Democracies being targeted. The PKK used suicide attacks with Turkey but not Iraq when it was under Saddam. Nine conflicts where suicide attacks were used. When U.S., France and Israel in Lebanon, Israel in west bank and Gaza too. Tamil Tigers fighting in Sir Lanka. Kurds fighting Turkey, CIS in Chechnya, India in Kashmir and Punjab. Nations US maintains combat troops in, and assures there safety. S.A., Qatar, Oman, UAE, Bahrain, Kuwait, Turkey, Afghanistan, Uzbekistan, Jordan and Yemen. It is not clear if U.S. would defend Pakistan, Turkmenistan, Tajikistan no combat troops.

(Reference, Def. rule # 3, “IEDs share a common set of components” # 4 containers part C) suicide bomers)

Psychological Operations:

With psychological operations the exact out come is always unpredictable. You can manipulate ones mind like a puppet on a day to day bases. However in the end the ultimate reaction is unpredictable. “Ultimately it dose not mater in the lease what one thinks, only what line of action taken that effects the situation”. Therefore, I believe psyops should only be used in a defensive mode. These notes are merely to make one aware of the tactics used by others. A good rule of thumb is: once is happen chance, twice coincidence, three times is enemy activity. It is the nature of war that what is beneficial to you is detrimental to the enemy and what is of service to them hurts you. There for never do or omit doing anything as a consequence to others actions, consult your own interest only. You depart from this interest when ever you imitate such measures as he pursues for his benefit.

Basically psyops are concerned with persuading individuals or a group to act favorable to ones interest. Aikido a Japanese martial art that emphasizes centering and blending. You will learn control fallows awareness of self or others. First understand than be under stood, knowing what is in the back of your enemies mind is not always possible, but leaving them no doubt what’s in the back of your mind is. Be aware of your own preconceptions so that they are not exploited. Deception is created by manipulating perceptions. First I.D. bias or crate one. It’s easier to reinforce a perception than to change one. If you know what’s expected or bitter yet hoped for, your deception will be on firm ground. Best to concentrate on ones capabilities not goals. Note: I interpret this last statement as communicating to opponent that it is futile to resist. And then there’s what Nixon said about goals – “one who reveals his intentions can never accomplish his goals”.

Propaganda any form of communication designed to influence attitudes, behaviors, emotions or opinions. Message is the meaning sender seeks to pass on. Means of communication, consider all forms of printed martial, flyers, business cards, posters, billboards. Target must be literate. Motion pictures, with natives’ photo may not translate well. Modern communications, Radio and TV. have no effect if infrastructure and equipment does not exist.

Joke; best weapon the CIA had against the KGB was the VCR. Use rallies, entertainment centers, stage productions, puppets, drawings in the ground, scaled models. Gifts know present and historical meaning of items. Symbols selection based on target analysis in terms of targets view of reality rather than what propagandist views as reality. The target audience interprets message based on previous experiences and learned responses. Therefore it is necessary to understand these experiences. Literal reception is no guarantee of its effect at terminus i.e. it must compete for attention with other events. Each message created with a distinctive purpose in mind. Dialogue terms always towards objective. Repeats themes play to emotions. Language not only dictionary meaning but maze of emotions which it arouses. Message must be believable have some real bases. White propaganda information disseminated in a way that I.D.s the source. Card stacking storing of true facts in your favor. Gray propaganda public information disseminated in way that dose not specifically I.D. source. Inserting distorted facts in presumably unbiased foreign or 3^rd party publications. Bandwagon fallow and use audiences’ line of reason. Being reasonable, Plain folks; I like you! Were alike! Know it all advisors have little influence with foreign advisors who frequently are senior and in practical terms have more experience. It takes great tack and persuasive skill for example to change the minds of entrenched auto crafts at any echelon when it comes to political, social, economical or military reforms, that might weaken personal positions or careers. Glittering generalities, big words, esoteric language, lots of Acronyms. No examining arguments. Complexity taking others word for facts, self confidence trusting yourself out of pure adrenalin. “My mine is made up don’t confuse me with the facts”. Name calling apply labels to the target tailored to fit audience example- devil/demon if addressing religious group. Mirror image projecting image of what enemy is saying about you on them. Note, can you ever say anything about someone with out saying more about yourself? Bigger the leak, less information believed. Elusion that person has discovered information by his own hard work or by accident. Black propaganda Facilitates plausible denial. It is disinformation deliberately designed to deceive audience and that conceals I.D. of sources, sponsors and participant’s or I.D.s false ones. Transfer association Target is convinced another respected group, organization or individual agrees with action, idea. Also others within group. Bogus accounts frequently gain credibility through repetitive reception. Making announcement that arrest made with help form informant when it was not. Use whispering campaign indirect approach. Person to person grape vine. Also CIS cheaper to bribe judge than university deans. Forbidden means expensive. Most corrupt systems in order, police 40 %, Judicial 15%, ministry and polities’ civil serves 20%, Banking 7%.

Types of personalities;

Note the first six personality characteristic types are listed in order that IMO they might evolve in anyone who is not aware of their own paradigm.

First possible series;

Characteristics of co-dependency; typically from homes where emotional needs where not met. Terrified of abandonment and will do anything to keep relationship. Nothing to expensive time consuming or too much trouble for our partner. Become caretakers confuse pity with love tend to love those they can pity or rescue try to change emotionally unfavorable people into warm caring ones. Live from point of view of a victim and are attracted by that weakness in others. Also are approval seekers, get guilty feelings when you stand up for yourself. Take far more than 50% of the blame when something goes wrong. Judge your self harshly have low self esteem. Believe you must earn the right to enjoy life. (Drama Queen) become addicted to excitement and emotional pain. Excitement of unstable relationship may counter a tendency towards depression. This also shifts attention from you. More aware of the dream of how relationship might be than reality. Lost ability to show emotions and feelings reactors rather than actors. Solution; love yourself accept process of change i.e. growth. Don’t try to change others. Be aware of your attitudes and feelings about each aspect of your life. Learn to be open and trust appropriate people. With relationships ask yourself dose this person enable me to grow. Let go of destructive ones without feeling bad. Rely on friends and strengths value your serenity. Be proactive/actor not reactor.

Rescuers; give help when not asked. Neglect to find out if offer is welcomed, gives more help than ask for or needed. Omit ignore feedback. Don’t check results. Feel good when accepted and very dad when turned down. Do most of talking or work often exceeds goals. Hard for you to take time for yourself. Supplies words for others when they hesitate, interrupts a lot. Makes excuses for other people. Feel others are not grateful enough or can’t get along with out you. Assume you have others consent. To control one most protect or enhance their self-esteem. What’s in it for me! Prefer to talk about their self. What’s important to them. Wait to talk don’t lesson. Solution; become helper, lesson for request then present offer, give only what is needed. Check results periodically to see if functioning i.e. solving problems meeting goals using suggestions successfully.

Placater; words agrees placates example; whatever just here to help you and others, always pleasant actions and words. Apologizes for every thing. You owe everyone something. You take responsibility for everything mostly negative events. Aggress with any criticism with out reasoning. Would not think of asking for something for yourself. Feel you well get things if you deserve them. Problem; I don’t exist. Solution; focus on pleasing yourself. Don’t except criticism readily, don’t feel responsible for everything.

Second possible series;

Computer; problem feeling of being vulnerable and weak wants to think away things. Words ultra reasonable example; if you would only look carefully. Always calm cool collective. Does not show feelings. We hide our feelings, judge those that don’t. A dictionary, words dry (abstract) always try to use largest words even when not sure of exact meanings. Goes into lots of details. Must be in charge and control relationships. Body moves very little. Deceptive masking; stiff upper lip, no showing weakness, you close off help. Solution; be okay with showing emotions, let people get close to you, let others share thoughts and ideas on matters. Be a Team player.

Blamers; words disagrees blames, “you never do anything right, what is wrong with you”. “I am boss around here”. “If it weren’t for you everything would be okay”. Problem lonely unsuccessful, you are a fault finder, dictator, acts superior, starts statements with never or why don’t. Does not entertain answers. More interested in throwing weight around than finding out the real truth. Feel others must obey, if you are to feel good. Solution; putting others down only pumps you up for a minute. Use sincere praise and complements, respect and curtsey. There is a difference between Blame and being accountable as in responsible; to deserve blame, you must of intended actions to equal consequences. Accountable i.e. responsibility simply means you are in control, accountable or responsible doesn’t imply intent or recklessness. It says only that you did or allowed to be done. What led to the out come. Example; ruff housing you break chair this equals recklessness, responsible for damage, can be blamed. Set on and break a chair equals responsible for damage but you can’t be blamed. However you are still responsible. This example according to author dose not apply to children, or rape victims.

Distracters; words irrelevant purpose is to distract your off somewhere else your actions and words are not related and or to others actions and words. Don’t respond to the point. No focus, don’t know where you’re going or have been nor when you get there. Feels lonely there’s no place for you, breakneck speed very important. I’ve made up my mind don’t confuse me with the facts. Not always right but never in doubt. Solution; slow down focus on objective. Face real feelings, build self-esteem. Consider the dangers of denial, you fail to see what is, or as you are resisting you fail to test hypotheses. Subsequently things that are otherwise sound and logical can lead to wrong conclusions. Can lead to paralysis.

More types of personalities;

Masochist; often abused as kids.

Narcissism; i.e. excessive love or admiration of oneself. Usually associated with infantile behavior and regarded as abnormally regressive in adults, it is the literal complement of egoism. Define milquetoasts timid man or boy considered childish or unassertive.

The poser similar to placater, act superficial and act like stupidity were a virtue. Use phony self criticisms to elicit compliments, devoid of intimacy people eater goal to control everyone and thing. Manage your life. Well tell you what you think and feel. Are users, appetite for audience. Ultimately frustrated and loneliness.

The porcupine similar to Blamers, seem to have chip on shoulder, they expect to be offended. Determined to find faults. Quick to personalize statements.

Drama queen similar to distracters, nothing ordinary sicknesses are worst the doctor has seen. Repeat themes, every commit is the sweetest or rudest they ever hard. They can’t be taken seriously. Lots of smiles and nods.

Term histrionics; Intelligent but impractical, bore people, are colorless absence of bonding. Gossiper always looking over there shoulder. Whispering. Anxious urgent, go from one imagined crisis to another.

Guilt monster tactic, use guilt as a weapon. Used to get what they want. To keep others down.

Greetings with strangers are superficial polite exchanges. People mostly fear- rejection. Mostly need acceptance.

Reciprocity get what you give. Treat others as you wish to be treated. However never miss a good chance to shut up.

People from large families may have learned to get along with other people more. Concentrate on motivating and helping others. Find the best in everybody, some times it takes years for individuals to show you there good points. What do they value; ethics, money, beliefs about life, positions, philosophies. Need to hear to think your okay. Wants. Out look relevant.

Are you a Teger/motivated or a Eeyore/down and out. Existing, preservation, no regard for quality. When choosing thoughts physiological reactions occur in unison i.e. determines your energy type and level i.e. negative producing more negative. The internal monologue is the most active and consistent dialogue we have. Most important daily choices are your attitude, personality, style. Choices have results that accumulate two define your experiences. When you choose behavior you chose consequences. Why people do and don’t do things, you do things because at some level it works, at some level the unwonted behavior serves a purpose.

Beliefs must be questioned. Recognize the competing agendas. Try to ID and see blind spots. North star positive monologue. You can’t change what you don’t acknowledge. You can start behaving in positive ways to have what you wont and or stop behaving in ways that interfere. Example; over eating. If you lie to yourself problems can’t be identified, two common ways of repression misrepresent or omission of what we don’t want to face, feel we can’t handle.

Selective amnesia anti trauma, can protect conscious values and beliefs, however this can leave a hole in reality. You did what you knew how to do and when you knew better you did better. Change is scary must adjust to delayed verses immediate pay off. Great payoff verses little. Example jogging or lie in bed.

Pray to god but row for the shore.

Curriculum based on the holistic model, defined as the optimal performance of all human aspects i.e. mind, body, and spirit.

Define calligraphy.

Writing name on leg for ID less likely to get smudged.

Life laws/rules of game.

(Reference; COE rule # 17.)

STEP # 2 Commander’s intent:

Statement about the situation using general information given as a I.S.A.L.U.T.E, R. W. P. report (i.e. format for briefing). Most importantly the commander defines objectives and how far to go to achieve them. Also time limits if any. Leaders should know commander’s intent two levels above his own, to better evaluate his own decisions. Commander’s Objectives are divided into Short term and Long term. Ex. mission may be a precise, detailed order of the day or a continuing command responsibility. Leaders should keep a log. George C. Marshall - any order that can be misunderstood will be. They must be clearly and candidly presented with neither equivocation nor ambiguity. Comprehensive, yet not involved. It must appear clear when read in poor light, in the mud and rain.

Source MCG June 2009, campaign’s goal must be measurable, easy to understand, and achievable within the nation’s or the coalition’s resource constraints. Once the campaign goal is defined, military must devote considerable intellectual rigor defining and understanding the problem, the enemy, his COGs, and their corresponding vulnerabilities. Only then can they develop a campaign plan that achieves the assigned campaign goals.

Prior to patrols give individuals the choice of setting it out.

(Reference, Decision Guidance, part D, below)

MCA Gazette June 2009; Code of a Naval Officer written by John Paul Jones in the late 1700s. However hard it may be for Marines to turn to a naval officer for leadership advice it would be worse to ignore the timeless advice of this great American leader and hero. Midshipmen at the Naval Academy revere him and consider John Paul Jones both a Revolutionary War hero and father of the U.S. Navy. A tenacious and tireless leader, his maxims on leadership are just as relevant to Marine leaders today as they were to sailors during the days of sail-powered wooden ships. An expository study of John Paul Jones’ Code of a Naval Officer can assist greatly in the development of young leaders, serve as a sounding board for experienced leaders, and may just reveal the true essence of leadership for all leaders—from yesterday, today, and to tomorrow.

It is, by no means, enough that an officer of the Navy should be a capable mariner. He must be that, of course, but also a great deal more. He should be, as well, a gentleman of liberal education, refined manner, punctilious courtesy, and the nicest sense of personal honor. . . . He should be the soul of tact, patience, justice, firmness, and charity. The Marine Corps invests significant time training young leaders in the tactics, techniques, and procedures related to their particular specialty. This preparation is critical because leaders must have a full and complete understanding of their duties. (NCO), must act like a leader in all aspects of life. Honor. Courtesy. Tact. Patience. Firmness. These are to be the hallmarks of a leader’s disposition. How many times has the public, much less the Marine Corps, witnessed leaders who display the opposite of these qualities? How often do leaders, unseen by the public eye, fail to display these qualities? The newspapers and 24-hour news channels are replete with stories of NCOs and officers involved in unethical and inappropriate behavior. This conduct is unsatisfactory and has led to the near complete erosion of the “special trust and confidence” once afforded to young leaders.

He should not only be able to express himself clearly and with force in his own language both with tongue and pen, but he should be versed in French and Spanish. It seems strange that the ability to communicate should be so difficult in this age of information. An unfortunate byproduct of e-mail, text chat, and the Internet is the inability of many leaders to effectively communicate with their peers and Marines in their charge. The ability to speak in front of an audience with confidence and to write clear and logical thoughts is essential for a leader.

Today’s leaders require a liberal knowledge of the cultures and nuances of the countries and regions vital to America’s national security. This knowledge can include proficiency in a foreign language, but is not limited to becoming bilingual. Cultural understanding includes language, economics, societal customs, religion, geography and, most of all, history. Only by understanding the many aspects of foreign societies can leaders expect to operate successfully in the current and future battlefields of the long war where the populace is seen more and more as the center of gravity.

No meritorious act of a subordinate should escape his attention or be left to pass without its reward, if even the reward be only one word of approval. In this modern world of entitlements and handouts, military personnel in all of the Services are beginning to feel that they are owed, or “rate,” an end of tour award for successfully completing a tour, regardless of their actual accomplishments or impact on mission success. This current trend causes the relative value of personal awards to plummet lower and lower until one’s medals have no real meaning at all.

“Discipline in private” “Praise publicly” as an incentive to others. Marines desire to be relevant, and public recognition in the presence of their peers meets that need. A leader who spends enough time in the presence of his Marines will be able to identify meritorious acts and duly recognize them swiftly and in proportion to the act performed—not inflated or deflated. According to this guidance no one rates anything, and all recognition is to be earned and rewarded commensurately.

Learn Discernment; Conversely, he should not be blind to a single fault in any subordinate, though at the same time he should be quick and failing to distinguish error from malice, thoughtlessness from incompetence, and well-meant shortcoming from heedless or stupid blunder. Leaders make decisions every day. Some of these decisions are benign while many can have great ramifications on their subordinates’ lives. The key to making wise decisions is discernment. An experienced leader can discern honest mistakes from malice or incompetence. This leader allows subordinates to learn (and make mistakes) in an environment that is conducive to learning and growing while separating and disciplining the malcontents and incompetent members of the command. A good leader learns the art of discernment through study, by learning from past decisions, and by seeking advice from all levels of leadership. No doubt this is an area where an experienced leader has the advantage, but a junior leader should not be left alone to discern by mere trial and error. This is where the true power of mentorship is witnessed as junior leaders learn from the past mistakes and successes of their seniors. There will always be difficult situations. Through mentorship young leaders can learn how to handle the hard cases of discipline and motivation with discernment and discretion following Jones’ more well-known maxim to “discipline in private.” Implicit in Jones’ instruction is for leaders (at all levels) to be visible. It is not enough to command from the corner.

Impartial Justice; As he should be universal and impartial in his rewards and approval of merit, so should he be judicial and unbending in his punishment or reproof of misconduct. All leaders have favorites. It’s a fact. One of the most difficult actions a leader can take is imposing discipline or punishment on a favorite subordinate. Leaders desire to promote and award while accepting the responsibility to punish. Conflict is hard, and many leaders abdicate this role to their subordinate leaders or abandon it all together to the detriment of good order and discipline. This is a travesty. The just and impartial imposition of rewards and punishment within a command is vital if a leader is to serve as the moral arbitrator and judge in the command. Only through consistently treating all subordinates in an equal manner will leaders be able to lead without the stain of favoritism or discrimination. Justice, above all else, should be the goal of any leader in the decision to reward or punish. The charges presented in Jones’ code should sound familiar to Marines. Unfortunately, familiarity does not always equal action, and there are many Marine Corps leaders today who do not live up to these standards. Let this article serve as a wake-up call for action! America’s Marines deserve this standard of leadership. Like the maxims of the classical strategists, the qualities of good leadership are timeless and unchanging. Not only should the Marine Corps indoctrinate young leaders in the tactics of great warriors, it should imbue them with their wisdom too. The Code of a Naval Officer serves as a brief testament to the enduring qualities of those who have gone before us and as an instruction pamphlet for today’s leaders. If continually referenced and followed, this code can provide the necessary “rudder guidance” to ensure that Marine leaders continue to set the example for solid leadership and high performance for many years to come.

Decision guidance A) Type of order. Routine matters coming under previously approved policy are generally covered by SOPs and are handled by the staff without repeated visits to the commander. The fallowing will be brought without delay to the attention of the commander. Disapprovals form higher authority. Errors, deficiencies or irregularities alleged by higher authority. Appeals from subordinate commanders about decisions made at Hqt. Serious accidents involving personnel of unit. B) Time available. Short time between completing preparations and implementation. Note here to the tried and true VC tactical doctrine of four fast one slow; fast advance, fast assault, fast battlefield clearance, and fast withdrawal are based on slow preparation. Have a definite time for completion of objective. Make one individual responsible, request assignee to estimate completion time, date, or set one. Scheduling; promotes coordination and ensures completion in a timely manner.

Especially important when commands or units must work together. Keeps appropriate pressure on subordinates. Allow sufficient time for the capable. Avoid becoming a leader who demands regularly that tasks be completed “yesterday”.

(Reference, also mentioned earlier in the Planning section, Execution phase.)

C) Restated mission. Involves reviewing commander’s intent. Never bring a problem to the commander without at lease a tentative recommendation. Make sure that you know what you’re talking about when you apprise the commander (or Xo) of a problem. Ideally you should present solutions in such form that only approval or disapproval of the plan is required. Note ask yourself would you stake your reputation on plan. Should a failure to agree develop, the divergent (different) view must be presented objectively. The staff officer is not settling a debate but is presenting facts and views and making a recommendation. The commander will make the final decision. D) Current scheme of maneuvers. Reviewing circumstances. It is necessary to know sentiments of your foe, are they confident or apprehensive. Point out foe’s weakness your advantages, and give argument for foe’s case to incite rage. Analyze foe weather strength is in experience or equipment. Stronger in infantry or cavalry. F. M. Erwin Ugen Rommel – “bold decisions give the best promise of success, but one must differentiate between strategical and tactical as well as boldness or a gamble”. A bold decision is one that in the event of failure leaves one with sufficient force to deal with out come. A gamble is a decision that can lead to complete destruction of ones forces. “Situations do arise where a gamble maybe justified, as for instance when in the general course of events defeat is merely a mater of time”. Col. Boyd’s (OODA) loop. The principle of (OODA) is to ultimately ware foe down. Destroy paradigm, (foe’s view of the world), by sending ambiguous or deliberately misleading signals, and also moving and thinking faster than foe can respond. No one, no mater how weak, can be completely ruined by a foe, unless ones fall be facilitated by one’s own actions. Most desirable is to attack the mind, another words, plans and intensions. Next his allies which makes foe’s own world stable, provides the emotional and moral bunds to sustain his effort. Worst his armies. And worst yet, his armies in cities. The (OODA) Loop; O) Observation- perception, heighten awareness. I.S.R. O), Orientation- i.e. (S.A.) to new circumstances, unfolding situation. Includes analyzing or synthesizing. Entropy after initial shock of war or battles, actions settle down to steady grind. Casualties and movement rates become predictable. Events tend to regress towards the means. Don’t let flashy press reports fool you; exceptions tend to get published, not day to day averages. Attitudes differ on the battlefield. It can be difficult to tell whose winning. Especially today when battles are lost, units are quickly repositioned. Troops decide who won or lost. It’s possible for non combat troops to maintain reasonable belief in continuing victory with out knowledge of the big picture. A local defeat can be explained as an exception. Opinions also very with M.O.S. rank and location. NOTE: with advanced technologies and systems like Network centric warfare this naivety would be less likely in the feature. D) Deciding on counters, could be hypothesis - OA operational adaptation; Anticipation of enemies adaptations not only minimizes there effectiveness it increases our ability to achieve intent forewarning i.e. predict their objectives. Maintenance of main objective as situation develops there is a temptation to change objective. This waist time and energy. Consistent pursuit of original objective is preferred. Considering dimensional effects of all decisions. As in how well my decision effect all dimensions in my A.O. and higher up. The grid system suggested by Mr. Lind across the top he listed, Physical, mental, and moral. Mr. Lind’s system listed tactical, operational, and strategically down the side.

(Reference, the beginning of step # 2)

A) Acting- could include testing of hypothesis. Fuller “A battle some times decides everything and some times the most trifle thing decides a battle”. “In war so much is unknown that it frequently happens that the simple to the complex is the rule of war”. “There for the simpler and more direct the beginning the less likely it is that things well get out of hand”. NOTE; Boyd came to the conclusion that all stages of the OODA Loop were not created equal. ‘Orientation is the Schwerpunkt’, he wrote in 1987—the decisive point of the OODA Loop and of human decision-making. Orientation ‘shapes … the way we observe, the way we decide, the way we act. In this sense, Orientation shapes the character of present [OODA] loops—while these present loops shape the character of future orientation. As the warfighter orients himself (and this is the crucial point) he brings to the process not only the imperatives of his immediate situation—whether piloting an F-86 over the Yalu River, leading an armored column through the Ardennes Forest, or planning the invasion of Iraq—but all his past experiences and the values of his society in which he was raised. Indeed, Orientation is nothing less than ‘the interplay of genetic heritage, cultural tradition, previous experiences, and unfolding circumstances’. Only the last of these is normally considered by the warfighter or businessman trying to get an edge on his immediate adversary.

Nor are relations between Observation, Orientation, Decision, and Action limited to ‘feed forward’, as the Loop is usually diagrammed. Rather, there is feedback at every stage of the cycle. Note too that Boyd has now made a plural out of the Observation stage of the cycle:

Note diagram is edited from Tri-F basic.

(Reference, Planning, Step # 1, Gathering info. Prioritizing criteria.)

Qualities of leaderships

Candor- it’s more then openness, it’s saying the things that need to be said without a lot of words, yes sir no sir, or under the table agendas. The battle field is the most honest place in the world. The stakes are to high and time to short to mess around with anything but the essence and truth. The candor of the battle field is why cohesiveness forms there so quickly and permanently and why lies told there are punished not with gossip but with actions. Officers cannot lead well, if subordinates are telling them only what they think they want to here. Scorn sycophancy, servility/bootlicking, close cousins to backstabbing, character assassination and worst of all, pure corruption always fallows. All are enemies of meritocracy. Don’t be seduced by the dark side. Such actions are deliberately designed to thwart those who might otherwise advance based on competence. Officers must differentiate between appropriate respect and sycophantic or obsequious behavior, i.e. those who do there duty to the best of there abilities and those licking boots. Guide lines; those who work hard all the time vs. those working only when Cmdr is around. Those who are avid golfers and who accept invite to play vs. those who suddenly develop interest. Those who express honest opinions vs. those who express opinion coinciding with commander and who often express them publicly. Don’t be fooled by superficialities. Discipline goes deep and is the result of compliance and completion of major and minor orders and objectives. Fairness is a cornerstone of meritocracy. Fairness does not mean identical treatment for all. Rather what is best for the Marine and Corps. Explain your decisions about promotions, punishments, unit policies and so forth to subordinate commanders and staffs. So they can readily and logically explain them to their Marines. This is not to say that they must agree with them, but they do need to comprehend the rationale behind them. The SAS is different from the regular army, its all self discipline. No shouting, no bull, no one pulls rank and everyone is expected to express his opinion. Commitment – The phrase “clean as you go” means that jobs started are finished. It means order and thoroughness as a matter of course. It means policing an area to keep it sat; in contrast to a periodic, hurried cleanup to make it momentarily sat. It means being on the JOB all the time. Commitment, mainly to people rather than ideas. To that old buddy and then squad, some to the larger unit and nation, but no where near as much as to the buddy. F.M. William Slim. “I tell you as officers, if you don’t eat, smoke, or sleep until your subordinates have done so, they well fallow you to the ends of the earth.” Last in the chow line, but first out of the fighting hole. Never say, get going, always say lets go. Thus, living by the same standards and in the same conditions, you will inspire their confidence in you and elicit trust in your judgment. Take care of them and they well take care of you. Subordinates nor enlisted give their trust and confidence to leaders who appear to be remote and unattached. Similarly, they are wary of those who appear to be unfamiliar or insensitive to their needs. You must learn their names quickly, call them by name and learn their specialties, strengths and weaknesses; this creates a personal bond between the individual and the commander. My captain knows me, the Marine will say. They will not mistake a poor commander for a good one. The relationship is one of daily contacts and is too continuous, to allow for any deceptions. If command is the highest responsibility of an officer, the first responsibility is to lead. DO NOTs & TABOOs: Avoid having people guessing your name. Do not use 3^rd person, Ex; dose the Colonel, when addressing a Col. Never lean on a superior’s desk. Avoid profanity and vulgarity. Never volunteer excuses or explain short comings, unless asked to. Never indicate that you had recommended a different course of action. No bruised feelings or silent resolution the old NEXT TIME! Thus the general has five dangerous characteristic traits. One committed to dying can be slain. One committed to living can be captured. One easily angered and hasty to act can be fooled. One obsessed with being scrupulous and untainted can be shamed. One who loves the people can be troubled. One whose troops repeatedly congregate in small groups whispering has lost the masses. If they are leaning on there weapons they are hungry. If those who gather water drink first they are thirsty. When they see potential gain but do not advance they are tired. If the officers are angry troops are exhausted. If the Corps is turbulent the Commandant lacks severity. One who frequently grants rewards is worried. One who frequently imposes punishment is in trouble. Where troops have penetrated deeply troops and officers will be united fight hard, if only shallowly they will tend to scatter. To counter those more afraid drawl up formations often, to accustom them to sights and sounds of battle. When punishment is administered, it is done impersonally, objectively, without rancor. Never resort to scorn or ridicule. The goal is to convince transgressors that they have everything to gain by doing their duty and being good Marines. Never promise a consequence that you cannot personally enact. An empty threat will only earn you scorn. Choose always the lesser punishment until convinced of its ineffectiveness. Get all the facts before taking action. Mutinies; punish ring leaders more than group. Always record counseling’s and get signature (whether one signs or not the counseling record is valid.) Later, such forms can be used to refresh your own memory of the actions as well as trace the development (or lack thereof) of the warfighter’s character or duty performance.

Note; Some repeat.

Desertion. Men desert to save their wives and children, not themselves. The principle advantage of the invaders is that their families are safe. Never pad troop numbers with married men; have them dig bunkers. Recruit only unmarried men and women to be civilian snipers. Women make better snipers than men because they posture less.

I DO SOLEMNLY SWEAR THAT I WILL SUPPORT AND DEFEND THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES AGAINST ALL ENEMIES, FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC; THAT I WILL BEAR TRUE FAITH AND ALLEGIANCE TO THE SAME AND THAT I WILL OBEY THE ORDERS OF THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES AND THE ORDERS OF THE OFFICERS APPOINTED OVER ME, ACCORDING TO THE REGULATIONS AND THE UNIFORM CODE OF MILITARY JUSTICE. SO HELP ME GOD.

(Reference, Leadership guidelines, Platoon commander)

Competence- This is the oldest and most important quality of leadership, you can have candor and commitment but if you’re not competent you won’t last. Competence established the pecking order. Which may or may not correspond to rank and chain of command, depending on the competence of those in the chain. No commander should be aloud to remain long at the helm. By rotation you avoid the cult of personality, leader becomes ordinary member. With second mission failure leader should resign. This can be over turned with confidence vote. But three defeats, ends command. Choose subordinate with most victories. One indicator of good leadership is when officers have higher casualty rate than enlisted. Unless enemy only targets command, like in Iraq.

(Reference, Leadership Guidelines, squad leader/ squad leader group and platoon Commander, below)

All things being equal, if fighting dose not end quickly, you can be fairly sure neither side has a leadership advantage. If one side has force advantage, you can be sure, smaller force has grater leadership. James web management vs. leadership. It is much easier to educate a manager than to develop a leader. Management is the physics of things, it can be approached as an academic discipline, one can be taught to analyze data, weight alternatives and make decisions. Leadership is a subjective chemistry, filled with human variables. One must be able to motivate and reach the emotions, threw command presents, example and force. “When in war men must die” (an in war some must) “they can’t be managed to death, they must be lead there.” Sacrifice has and honored place in leadership but not in management. The military it is socialistic in that the group is more important than the individuals, it is a meritocracy in that the ways of rating are not based on monetary terms but on values of performance that only matter within the unit, and are meaningless otherwise. For management, Leaders and subordinates conducting Maneuver warfare the fallowing can apply. The way of thinking to encourage initiative on the part of subordinates is to be in close touch with them, to be alert for breakthroughs, discoveries, and ideas that occur at the lowest level, to keep subordinates aware of corporate or unit goals and values, always keeping sensitive to speed, so successful operations are never slowed. For subordinates, the way of thinking is using personal initiative and independent thought to serve corporate or unit goals, close cooperation with one another, to take risks when opportune, to act now and never delay when action can reap advantage, act and inform rather than ask permission. In addition, for leaders, management and subordinates alike, the focus is always outward, situational awareness i.e. on the environment: for business, focus on the customer; for war, on the enemy. The sales person cannot ignore issues of dollars and cents, competition, economic changes. They can kill him. But focus on the customer prevails. Loyal customers mean there is a future. For the soldier, it is the same. He cannot ignore logistics, terrain, routes of communication i.e. (LOC), and changes in the weather. They can kill him. But focus on the enemy prevails. A disrupted, confused, demoralized enemy means success. The hill is yours when the enemy quits, whether you've reached the hill yet or not. History shows any unit can be effective with good leadership. Recruits drawn form the more intelligent 20% of population are twice as effective as lower 20%. Twenty one year olds more effective than teenagers. Conscript armies generally consist of only 15- 30% long term professionals. Volunteer army 40-70% pros. Western type military requires highly industrialized well educated pool of recruits. The best uniformed units are generally the least effective. A fresh coat of paint makes any weapon appear capable. Ship crews operate in more of a controlled situation, where drills, technique, and skills are decisive. Experience is perishable; Armed forces tend to retain no more information than their oldest member. SAS developed a seriousness which dealt with each obstacle as an interesting challenge. Nothing was beneath consideration, from the calorific content of your food, the best method of putting on socks or applying band aids to blisters. Or the most energy saving way to climb a slope. On the surface it seemed almost boy Scoutish. They are not truculent (savage) or sadistic (abnormal delight in cruelty) as the Para’s are. The Para’s talk about everyman being an emperor. The SAS live it. SAS is without class, every officer first served in the ranks. They are free thinkers, that will question an order they think is wrong. They show stamina, initiative, independence, patience and self-discipline, a resilience to work without support and to endure loneliness without deteriorating. They believe as did the ancient Greeks who originated the word “aristocracy” that every man with the right attitude and talents, regardless of birth and riches, has a capacity in his own lifetime of reaching that status in its true sense. The Australian SAS in Vietnam, made the US Green Berets, look like amateurs. They had 500 kills and only one loss.

Leadership Guidelines

Leadership is the art of imposing one’s will upon others in such a manner as to command their respect, their confidence, and their whole-hearted cooperation. It’s part official and written but it’s mostly traditional and unwritten. With good leadership and discipline, achievement of the mission with minimum casualties is the rule. The main goal of leadership is discipline and cohesion in units, especially under stress. It’s a product of shared experiences, a confidence between commander and subordinates, who have the enthusiasms and ambitions of youth. There are few responsibilities equal in satisfaction to training, developing and leading young Marines. You are assisted by NCOs the back bone of our Corps and who are Marines you will respect and whose respect you will treasure. Gen. Mc Author, master yourself before you seek to master others, learn to laugh yet never forget how to weep. The open mind of true wisdom the meekness of true strength. Patience under adversity of courage under fire, modesty in victory. We are reaching out to new and boundless frontiers. We speak in strange terms of harnessing the cosmic energy of making winds and tides work for us, of creating unheard of synthetic materials, to supplement or even replace our old standard basics. Purifying sea water, mining ocean floors for new fields of wealth and food. Disease preventatives to expand life into the hundreds of years. Controlling the weather for a more equitable distribution of heat and cold, rain and shine. Space ships to the moon. Of the main target in war no longer limited to the armed forces of an enemy but instead to include his civil population, of the ultimate conflict between a united human race and the sinister forces of some other planetary galaxy. Of such dreams and fantasies as to make life the most exciting of all time. The long gray line. The shadows are lengthening for me. Gray line (graduates program) and Age of iron equals refining /hardening of S.O.P. Officers West point provides 25% of the over all 25k lieutenants for army every year. Mexican war 1846 there were 800 officers in USA corp. Class of 1915, “class the stars fill on”, 1/3 became generals, and one became President Eisenhower. U.S. Army uses parallel rank structure for enlisted troops instead of a lot of NCOs you have troops with the rank of specialist 4, 5, 6. The numbers represented pay grades. For senior more experienced technicians/troops, use was made of four grades of warrant officers. This rank was given all the privilege of officer. Now days less need or use of uniformed techs. Neither fish nor foul. Company grades these are apprentice/junior officers. Lieutenants and captains in the Marines/Army and Air force, Ensigns and lieutenants in the Navy. Command company size unit or small ship. Field grade major or Lt. Col. and Col. in Marines/Army or Air force, Lt. Cmdrs. Commanders and Captains in Navy. Command Battalions, Regiments, Brigades, ships of all size. Flag officers Generals in Marines/Army and Air force Admirals in Navy. Staff officers serve in staffs of unit’s one level higher than they would command. More officers serve in staff positions than in command positions. Each unit of battalion or larger has only one commander, but four or more staff officers. The battalion is the smallest unit that has a staff made up of officers, although even at company level there are officers and NCOs whose duties parallel those of staff officers. A staff officer; is an aid to commander, Assures unity of action throughout the command, by ensuring compliance with orders. Providing basic information and technical advice by which Cmdr may arrive at decisions. Relieves Cmdr of details by translating/drafting the basic decisions into adequate plans or orders. Transmitting them to subordinate leaders. Anticipates future needs. In short a properly functioning staff is an extension of the eyes, ears and will of the commander. The staff assists the commander in the performance of four functional areas. S1, S2, S3, S4.

(Reference, company cmdr 2inC notes below and the last step i.e. # 6 Supervise)

(S) Preface is used at Regiment or below, at Division the prefix (G) is used. Joint task force (J) is used also for Joint Chiefs. And sometimes in combined Commands (C). S1 Adjutant/Legal administration officer. Normally a Capt. duties Hqt. mgt. and myriad administrative tasks. Records, bookkeeper for all secretaries. The adjutant (One who Assist.) is usually also charged with maintaining the commanders official schedule as well as preparing and circulating Cmdr. correspondences. Unit strength management, responsible for officer personnel management. Social events, morale activities, supervises unit PRS ctr. Chaplin, Fire Dept., MPs. (the command Sergeant major is usually charged with enlisted personnel management). S2 Intelligence officer, normally a Major. Tactical Intel. Counter Intel. (Physical security, including safes). Debriefs of patrols or individuals, or the company-level intelligence cell. Collects, correlates, evaluates and interprets information. Clearances, maps, communications, recon MRS. intelligence training. Staff officers are often used as spies. Intelligence cushy job in peacetime, career killer during war. S3 Operations and training officer. Lt/Col. Responsible for planning, the unit readiness. Schools Cmd inspections program. Casualty Medivac. Operations officers often chief of staff. Chief of staff is the principal assistant to the Cmdr. At low levels Executive officer fills the function of the chief of staff. He is often a prior logistics officer. It is the best possible training towards becoming a battalion commander. S4 logistics officer. Usually a Major. Duties include supplies, allocation, inventories, transportation and maintenance. Command of logistics more difficult during wartime too.

In the Newjarheaddean the S1 would remain the same. S2 Department would be broken down into Intel (info gatherers), Counter Intel (preventing enemy from gathering info) and Counter Counter Intel (preventing enemy Counter Intel from preventing ones own Intel gathering in the first place or Countering ones Counter measures). S3 the way it is described above IMO sounds like the responsibilities of the Commander, assistant commander and their general staff i.e. secretaries. So I say make S3 the Science officer, to include medical officers, M.D. and Psychological, and bring the Chaplin (book thumpers) over from S1. Note the Chaplins would only serve as advisors on religious matters. S3 would also take on the responsibilities of civil affairs. S4 remains the same, there would be no S5, 6 7 8 9 or 10, (LOL). Note with Newjarheaddean division IMO Engineers should be combined with recon. There mission parameters could include prepping sites for basing i.e. in a guerrilla warfare situation engineer units could find vacant houses, terminate rats, bugs set up water, electricity etc.

People who own their own motorcycle and rifle will care for them.

Squad leaders;

The US WWII Squad referred to a leader, with scouts (Security), BAR team (Base of Fire) and riflemen (Maneuver). In WWII regardless of national origin, was comprised of three elements; machine gun group, riflemen group and the Squad Leader group, who provided the first link in the long chain of command that stretched all the way back to Divisional HQ and beyond. A Squad Leader was reinforced by his Assistant, either a second NCO or a senior Private. If the Squad Leader fell, he would take over command, nominating another to act as his deputy and potential successor.

(Reference, Qualities of leadership, Competence above and Company Cmdr. 2inC notes below.)

The leader had to direct his men to achieve their goals in a far more hands on manner than any other Cmdr above him. To survive, the squad needed to use terrain and supporting fire to maximum effect. It was vital to maintain its integrity i.e. operate as a single entity even when men were separated. The distance had to be monitored closely by the leader who could only affect control through vocal commands or hand signals, this before ICOMs. In any engagement, there could be a host of targets. The key was to prioritize those targets and engage them in order of precedence. One man i.e. Squad Leader has to orchestrate the fire plan. The philosophy was better lose one man from the fire fight to direct the efforts of the remainder, than have all the Squad engaged in an undisciplined free for all. The temptation for the Squad Leader to join in the gun battle was always there, so he was issued a (shorter range) submachine gun. This diverted him from the lure of the longer range fire fight. Also, it increased the firepower of the Squad in the close quarter battle (CQB), putting the weapon in the hands of the man tasked with leading it. Another responsibility of the Squad Leader was to husband the ammo resources, as in when far forward and supplies may be limited. A typical Rifle Squad carried between 1500 - 1600 rounds of rifle and pistol calibers.

Light Machine Gun group;

Every man in the Squad could operate the gun and carried ammunition. In WWII, it was the sole means by which the Squad could project sustained, accurate, automatic fire. The gun could sweep an area in a way which individual riflemen could not. It could dominate an approach in the defense, or by turn fix enemy defenders to allow the Rifle Group to close for the assault and the riflemen aka Maneuver or Assault Group. Its size varied between six and eight men, dependent upon nation and, of course, casualties. It was the manpower pool of the Squad, providing quite literally its bayonet strength. The Rifle Group provided the Squad with its scouts, grenadiers and marksmen. Since the introduction of the light or general purpose machine gun, there has been a tendency to describe the riflemen as virtual ammunition bearers and escorts for the weapon. The evolution of tactics gives that argument some validity, but ultimately without the presence of the individual riflemen the Squad would prove a one dimensional tool. Its strength lay in the co-operation of the Rifle Group and Gun Group, united under the direction of the Squad Leader. In order to protect the light machine gun, alternative fire positions needed to be used. Once the Squad's weapon opened fire, it naturally made itself a target for retaliatory enemy action. If it stayed in the same spot for too long, return fire could be accurately and effectively zeroed in. Where possible, every advantage was taken of terrain and surroundings to allow the gun group to disengage and move to an agreed second location, without breaking cover. During this time, the riflemen were not idle. If the distance to the enemy line was too great to cross in a single bound, they would seek a defensible position. Once reached, this would enable the gun group to make their switch. Now it became the turn of the riflemen to provide cover fire, ideally directed against the enemy position of the greatest threat to their now vulnerable gun group. Once the light machine gun had reached its secondary position, the crew could recommence fire, this time from a different angle, thus forcing the return fire to be redirected. It may seem a logical compromise, but the idea of splitting the attacking force was to prevent the defender concentrating his fire on one target.

(Reference, COE rule # 3 and COE overall tips; machine gun sections)

Platoon commander;

Usually a Lieutenant was uniquely positioned to share the frustrations of his men at the sometimes absurd orders they received from above, but was duty bound to carry them out to the best of his ability. He was also best placed to see the often-tragic consequences. There was also the question of whether he was the Plt's Leader, or its Cmdr, there is a subtle difference. Some officers lead from the front. While highly commendable they often paid the ultimate price. Armies needed to promote experienced Platoon Commanders to the next level, but they had to live long enough to gain that experience.

(Reference, Qualities of leadership, commitment)

There is a limit to the number of men a Cmdr can exercise personal control over, roughly speaking around ten (as demonstrated on the sports field). That helped determine the size of the Squad. The Inf Plt could vary between as few as thirty or as many as fifty men. With three Sq Leaders and between 30 and 40 men, Lieutenants needed to learn the art of delegation using sq leaders to direct the efforts of their men and deploy support weapons. Without necessarily becoming embroiled in the fire fight. Yet when the unit faltered or found itself pinned down, it was the Plt Cmdr's responsibility to rise up and urge his men onward with the cry of follow me or come on lads! That was when the Commander became a Leader.

At this point leaders need to be keenly aware of tempo and the limits of readiness i.e. alertness of the majority of forces available.

(Reference, Step # 3, Pro-guerrilla/insurgency operations, Organization celluar structure)

Company commander;

The Rifle Company marked the first step on the way to the fully integrated 'all arms' team. Despite the ever increasing layers of fire support which existed to underpin its mission, it always had to be capable of doing the job alone. For the most part though, the Rifle Company acted in concert with the heavy weapons which made up the rest of the fighting strength of its Battalion and above. Some may be located in the Weapons Platoon, but the bulk would be held in the Weapons Company of the Battalion proper. Co HQ was generally split between command functions, administration and supply duties. The 'O' Group or orders group was composed of the, signaler, runners and relevant Section Cmdrs. The latter elements were usually a few cooks and supply personnel. It was headed by the Commander assisted by a senior Sgt., whose role it was to aid in the issue of orders and intelligence to the forward troops. In WWII, the Co C/P today’s COC, was normally a fixed position. In the assault, the Cmdr would often go mobile and take with him his Sgt, runners and signalers, and possibly some men to act as an escort. The burden of command was normally shared between two officers, the Company commander and his 2nC or Executive Officer (XO). The 2inC would establish a reserve fixed post, to which messengers could head in the event they could not find the mobile CP. The 2inC helped alleviate the workload in effect allowing the Company Commander proper to attempt the trick of being in two places at once i.e. one could maintain the company command post while the other went 'topside' to judge the situation for himself.

(Reference, Leadership Guidelines “A Staff Officer” in bold print.)

German practice differed here, with there being only one officer at Co HQ, his deputy actually being the Cmdr of the 1st Plt. The Co Cmdr could have from 100 to 200 men under his command. Leadership required a different approach to that of a Plt leader/Cmdr. With various units attached to support his force. There was no way he could personally lead this number of elements spread across a frontage measured in the hundreds of meters. He had to exercise much more command and control by way of delegation to subordinates not personal leadership. The Co Cmdr needed to brief his subunit leaders including any attached assets on the mission and ensure each understood his role within it. Once his force deployed, his attention needed to focus on the overall progress of the battle, determining where success was being made and where efforts were faltering. He would also be acutely aware of developments on his flanks, where events involving neighboring units could demand others intervene in aid, or might find themselves exposed by a sudden reverse. He had then to decide how to best exploit or reinforce these areas. Simultaneously, he would be in touch with his Battalion superiors, who would be demanding updates and monitoring progress. During maneuvers; the actual separation distance between units would vary greatly, the most important determining factor probably being the nature of the terrain involved. However, it could not be allowed to become so great that it would impair the need for mutual flank protection between the Platoons. In the offense; one major concern was the divisions of forces between the assault echelon the reserve and or support elements. The Company Commander had to think of the battle as a developing struggle, and had to visualize his assets to enable him to in affect stay two or more moves down the line. To that end, he could only commit a portion of his troops to the initial assault, holding a number in reserve. Company Commanders tended to think of their unit as whole Platoons rather than individual Squads. Mathematically speaking, the decision was simple, one Platoon upfront, or two? The Reserves; One of the most vital decisions is when to commit the reserves. The ideal time would already have been identified during planning, usually signified by the capture of a primary objective allowing the exploitation phase to begin. The platoon in a reserve role, would move through one of the forward units, providing fresh legs to exploit the opening. Once the reserve element had been committed, the Company Commander would need to assemble a new one ASAP. In this instance, the unit it relieved could then become the new reserve as it gathered its strength and reorganized.

Yet all too often enemy defenses well withstand the initial assault, forcing the commander to consider their earlier use. The commander who had only committed one of his platoons to lead the assault had the breathing space afforded by having two or more in reserve. The reserve could be used to regain proper intervals between units thus assuring mutual flank protection or to relieve pressure by outflanking i.e. launching its own attack on enemy unit being fixed by the fire of another thus bolster a lead platoon. Likewise, it could filter in to replace the platoon in the fire role, while the original unit attempted the flanking movement.

Ho chi min trails 40 troop or less

At full strength per the Army’s Table of Organization and Equipment (TO&E), a World War II U.S. Army infantry company consisted of three rifle platoons and one heavy weapons platoon. The company commander was a Captain in rank. A platoon consisted of three squads plus a small headquarters team. The platoon leader was a Lieutenant. Rifle squads consisted of 12 men each, lead by buck sergeant.

(Reference, note by far this is the largest collection of reference notes in one area, Step # 3, part D) item # 10 support, reserves and R.O.E. and Defense rule # 4 subsection, ATGM, “anti structure role” and mortars/mobile fire control and Exploitation phase. And Def. Conduct of the defense, “If next attack well succeed”, as well as COE rule # 3 as well as Maneuvers and formations located in the detailed notes of that rule as well as “True V formations as well as COE over all tips, “Reorganiztion and exploitation”)

Infantry battalion;

The Battalion Commander would normally be either a Lieutenant Colonel or Major. Interestingly, the German Battalion had no 2inC at Battalion Headquarters rather the senior Company Commander would take over the role as required. Another option is the Supply Officer i.e. Quartermaster. Note the frontage covered? During maneuvers, In the offense, and Reserves; Basic responsibilities were the familiar questions of how much of the force should be commit to the initial offensive, and secondly how could one best employ support weapons to aid them. One needs only to refer back to company commander’s notes above, substituting platoon with companies thus increase magnitude to appreciate battalion commander’s duties. IMO an increased knowledge in logistics, and communications thru chain of command are the main priorities at this level.

In so called 4^th GW, shifting the tactical focus to company-sized and smaller units will probably mean a major force reorganization in favor of a “flatter” command structure. To flatten a command structure is to have fewer echelons control the same number of troops. For example, a conventional command structure would divide a dozen maneuver companies among three or four battalion headquarters. The battalions, in turn, report to a regimental or brigade headquarters. A flatter version of this might eliminate the battalion headquarters and have the regimental or brigade headquarters control all companies directly. (If one prefers to be less radical this regiment might have only eight companies. Prior to 1914, during an era that often presented similar challenges to what Fourth Generation war currently presents, the standard British battalion had eight rifle companies. This gave the battalion great flexibility in irregular warfare because it enabled it to create numerous detachments while still retaining a tactically viable force under its own control.) Conventional wisdom has it that a given command element cannot tactically control more than four maneuver elements. However, on a Fourth Generation battlefield tactical control above the company level is seldom needed. When it is needed, it is likely to be for only a limited time and to involve limited forces. Instead of worrying about tactical control, a higher headquarters should focus on administration, logistics, operational and strategic objectives, intelligence analysis and dissemination and relations with the local rulers. It should usually leave tactical matters to its platoons and companies.

Note add much more from Marine officer’s guide MCA magazines and place in Appendix.

STEP # 3 Concepts of operations:

Part A)

We start with (I.S.A.L.U.E., R.W. P.) reports. Used to describe Individuals, forces i.e. units, equipment or items and weapons available to all involved. Therefore, one would have foe and fellow reports. There could be a strategic grand report using general total figures, and or one report for each unit down to company level, or important individuals. Also one for each equipment or weapons class. What fallows is an example of listed items and information to be located after the various letters of the acronym (I.S.A.L.U.T.E.R.W.P.). It must be noted that starting with identification (I.D.) under the (I) on a computer it could be presented in bold or highlighted format; one could also use parenthesis or block lettering with a written report. The important thing to keep in mind is the I.D. is emphasized and used as a marker through out the report in all noted categories (i.e. after all letters in the acronym) to specify what figures/data relates to which I.D. i.e. individual, item or weapon. In a Forces available report, it is accepted that the sub categories fallowing the (U) are to numerous to separate each entry i.e. fact, within each sub category with a specific I.D. Therefore a typical entry would start with the I.D. fallowed by a paragraph of information keeping to the general order of sub categories. This rule may apply to (T) (R) and (P) as well. These exceptions are made obvious in the detailed examples in the ISALUTERWP appendix.

Note specific information about the enemy on patrols in your area, such as “call signs” of the enemy you may be aware of, located under (I) in AFAR, would be copied to the corresponding item listed in your “Patrol order” i.e. item # 1 unit information. This “patrol order” is mentioned below.

2/11/11 with all that said, here below, I most admit things are a bit undecided to say the least, but I’m getting there. I would appreciate some help too. And I am ashamed at my having to create new terms and acronyms, however for me it was necessary for aiding in recalling all this system. Not to mention I’m creating a system from stratch. Once I have it completed I well bet it takes an act of congress to change it, I would point to my basic rules going unchanged for 35 years or so, as evidence to that.

FORCES AVAILABLE:

Example of a Forces Available report layout i.e. format, AKA an AFAR. Also note the acronym FEW for forces, equipment and weapons. AFEWR part A forces, eq, wep, report, pronounced ah-fewer.

Zabihullah, a senior Taliban adviser. The movement’s founder, Mullah Mohammed Omar, has been unseen and silent since he fled Afghanistan in late 2001, and his right-hand man, Mullah Abdul Ghani Baradar, has been held for the past year by Pakistani security forces. The two senior commanders who nominally run the war in the south now—Abdul Qayum Zakir and Akhtar Mohammad Mansoor—inspire little confidence in the ranks.

I) this is an I.D. - that is to say the initial main/largest I.D. of subject answered strategically first i.e. Adversaries – Nation, state, province, county. Ex; Russians, Indians, Chinese, or Israelis. Or a major branch of service. Ex; Army, Navy, Air Force, Marines. However this could be Tactical I.D. of an individual i.e. Name, with strategic or tactical I.D. we also include AKA, nicknames, aliases and item # 1 of patrol order i.e. call signs. Example of nicknames, blacks in the corps called dark green Marines or Mexicans muds WWII Japanese, AKA Japs, slopes.

Note; I find it funny how me and my brother begain calling Blacks “Muds” around 1990 or so. IMO the Corp got it wrong but in the corps defence it already had a term for the blacks.

S) Size – this could be demmintions, specifications or a numerical number. With units were talking numbers, individuals were talking measurements i.e. weight. WWII Japanese trooper averaged 130 lbs. U.S. trooper averaged 160 lbs. and height. Japanese trooper averaged 5’/3” U.S. trooper averaged 5’/9”.

A) Activity – This is past i.e. history. Present i.e. Tactical i.e. recent (within a mouth) activities observed, here we well make use of the five Ws and H. Who, I.D. What, appointments/entertainment/deployments/dutes/jobs/mission/routines/schedules/training/tactics. Where, is location of specific actions. Could be grids, GPS, address and or azimuths etc. also item # 2 of patrol order i.e. enemy Unit locations known. As well as items # 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9. When, use 24 hour i.e. military system, include date. Also item # 3 of patrol order i.e. enemy times of departure. Why, note apparent reason, what this action may complement or be in preparation for. How.

Future; Operational/Strategic? items listed under What in Activity, older than a mouth or more. Date and time of oriental recon i.e. the acquisition of the information and the last update. Also an “Activity calendar” i.e. reference times and dates of important events. Combat experience, educational and medical records of Units or individuals, would be located here.

Note up to one mouth equals tactical.

L) Location –This is home ports, bases, or with individuals residence by State, Provinces or City. Grids, GPS, address, references to be used in part B, BMMW, etc.

U) Unit – in depth I.D. more precise than under (I) include Photos, etc. possible categories, Special ops, Infantry, air borne, air Mobile, mechanized, armor, artillery. Division, regiment, battalion, company, platoon, squad, section, or fire team. Including rank for military personal and tittles for civilians, memberships, associations, gang, party, organizations, family, clan, tribe. Also structure of the chain of command next highest, lowest or adjacent units. If specific information is not available one might have to list numbers i.e. 3 companies per battalion. However it would be desired to name them. With individuals, Adult/child male/female.

Note Descriptions for individuals use movie stars and other well known celebrities as a counter part comparisons. Cosmetics, tattoos, scares. Uniforms, clothing, insignia, patches, awards, jewelry, apparel. Example; Iraqi guerrillas tend to be clean cut or have mustaches and well dressed. Where as farmers usually have beards.

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, ISALUTE RWP)

T) Time –

E) Equipment – general over all lists of all equipment and weapons. Note, specifications would be located in Equipment and weapons available reports. Unit’s composition/locations i.e. organizational positions and numbers with in units, i.e. 18 guns per battery. Ammo supplies available or normally carried. Modes of transportation. Might include irregular uses. Carrying or storage habits. Note this info is repeated in e-war under locations. On individual bases this could be items owned.

R) Reinforcements – An analysis of factual or possible assistance from other units or allies and effects on all units by all units movements, support or lack there of. With individuals relationships, family ties. And thus information pertaining to item # 10 of patrol order.

W) Withdrawal – Routes, avenues of any kind being used or present on the battle field.

P) Personalities – attitudes, disposition, evaluation, ratings, religion, motivations, languages, statements, mottos.

Note unit composition located in Equipment might move to Unit? Sycological profiles.

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, I salute R.W.P etc.)

EQUIPMENT AND WEAPONS AVAILABLE:

Example of equipment and weapons available report layout i.e. format; AKA e-war. 1/29/11 these reports are still being developed. I’m working on hard copies and plan on just replacing these with the updated version soon.

I) I.D. designation/ AKA, nicknames. Note classification is detailed under (U).

S) Numbers, manufactured, available. Specifications Dimensions; Weight/loads/density/mass. Width/track. Length. Height/ground clearance/fording.

A) Activity this is recent activities observed, Here again we use the five Ws and a H. Who unit or individual. What specific activities observed i.e. deployments. Where specific locations of activities i.e. deployments. When time and date. How are they manufactured (note information would only be mentioned if it points out any weaknesses or strengths to the system), also disassemble, reassemble, operated, specific details on individual techniques of carrying or deploying. Trouble shooting, I.A.D or field striping.

L) Locations where are they manufactured, stored, users of the weapon i.e. nation unit or individuals. Training ranges or schools. Composition/locations and numbers with in units, i.e. 18 guns per battery. Note this info is repeat form equipment in Forces available report.

U) Units Variants i.e. models, caliber, photos, decals, color schemes. Also Utility uses/function/classification mounted or unmounted direct or indirect fire, crew served or small arms.

T) Date and time when information was acquisitioned and last updated. History of research and development. History of maintenance records and reliability statistics.

E) Equipment tools, machines used for maintenance, Periphery devices/scopes. Transportation and platform vehicles ships or aircraft. Performance and dimensional specifications i.e. details are located under other categories.

R) Reinforcements Crews functions and any other support needed etc.

W) Weapons secondary and defensive, systems for platforms.

P) Performance, operational statistics of platforms and main weapons;

Ranges, Max over all or max effective (could also include effective at what altitude) in meters for weapon rounds or (operational) miles for vehicles and aircraft. Minimum ranges, safety arming ranges for rounds or danger close for explosives in meters. Note repeated in ammo below.

Speeds muzzle velocity for weapons, rates of fire max or sustained for weapons, mph max or acceleration for vehicles or aircraft.

Trajectories/envelopes Trajectories paths for rounds. Elevation and traverse or gimble limits for weapons. Flight envelopes ceilings climb rates or Angles of attack for aircraft.

Ammo/Fuels type’s and characteristics; warheads fuses casualty radiuses for weapons. Note repeated in Ranges above. Fuels and lubricates for vehicles or aircraft. Capacity # of rounds in magazines or storage for weapons or gals/lbs of fuel for Vehicles or aircraft.

Casualty radius armor Breaching and protection abilities;

Note Mortar CEP figures and single or multiple tube patterns. BDA 120 mm mortar vs 105mm or 155 mm howitzer. IMO crater for 155 would be elongated do to flater trajectory and larger.

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, I salute R.W.P and Appendix ISALUTERWP for more detailed examples.)

Part B) MAPS, MODELS AND WEATHER;

AKA, your Bmw acronym could be written BMMW or BM2W.

Here we make use of yet another version of the Salute report.

Size: area of terra in sq. mi. greatest distance north and or south, east and west. Highest and lowest points, mean alt. Infrastructure statistics, numbers of everything. Lighting, location of switch board. Activity: could be land usages. Location: Grids, address, altitude, attitude/position. Unit: surface/vegetation, mountains, water shed, drainage, lakes, rivers. Time: seasonal changes. Climate and general history. Reinforcements:? With drawl: Traffic, secondary routes. Subterranean too. Air.

Over all tips: Construction tips; for terrain models use natural materials in the field to disguise in case enemy finds. Have scale and keep items proportional never use same items to represent two different things. Speed chart, scale charts, grid square. The nature of the terrain is often of more consequence than courage. Terrain sense, study when possible by walking or riding over it. Observe from vantage point of both your view and foes. Know what terrain will allow both sides to do. One who dose not employ local guides cannot gain advantage of terrain. Note overlays and maps. Overlay clear plastic sheet with patrol routes, and any additional information not included in map legend. It is written in grease pencil. It is placed over map. It is orientated by using reference grids, they are aligned to a cross hire printed on overlay. If map and or overlay are captured, with out knowing reference grids they are useless. Note map making is now automated. With weather information for one day prior, actual day of and day after. Dirt trails described as one, one and a half, or two lane.

(Reference, PCP rule # 11 for information on avalanches. COE over all tips, characteristics of military operations in cold climates etc., and Appendix PCP rule # 13 for information on glaciers and Appendix MM&W for more information.)

Part C) ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS:

AKA the call i.e. CAL.

A real working knowledge of maintenance, supplies and movement factors must be the basis of every leader’s plans. Only then can it be known how and when to take risk with these factors. Basically answers three questions. 1) The acquisition or procurement. 2) Storage and Maintenance 3) distribution or transportation of it all.

Principals; they are used to evaluate and monitor concepts and methods. 1) Unity of purpose – key words or phases, cooperative effort, integration of actions and ideas to produce a mutual understanding between R&D and users. Matching capabilities/resources/constraints with aspirations and requirements. With Guerilla warfare bandages, beans and bullets in that order. Combat values in order of importance are reliability, ease of use, mobility and destructive power. It is also important to understand that it is not worth planning on supplying (x amount of tanks with ammo when (x) number of tanks will not be available after (x) amount of time. More supplies dose not equal more fire power. Today extra fuel needed to move heavier equipment and more vehicles many of them, for transportation not combat. More ammo but better armor too. In cold maintenance takes more time. Note BS modern term Unity of effort. LOL.

Principals: 2) viability - able to exits. Staying power. Emphasize cost, economically sustainable. Distribution and protection ratio, always include safety margin. When push comes to shove more effort goes into producing new weapons not spares. 3) Resourcefulness, develop aptitude, innovation, imagination and ingenuity. Be proactive not reactive. Joke, when did Noah build the ark, before the rain. Simper Paratus (always prepared) make do with what you have. Indigenous supplies. Cannibalizing equipment, living off land. Isolation makes logistics very important. Example wilderness, no infrastructure and when operating on islands. Use of local materials to include the selective rubbling of structures in the defensive can reduce supply requirements.

Who, what, where, when, why, and how, might also be utilized here.

Categories, classification is not a fixed order, priorities of logistics must be base on type of unit, order of battle, mission and situation factors.

Part D) PATROL ORDER:

AKA i.e. referred to as the depot.

This is Information pertaining to patrols, you will always have alternates, even a complete alternative sheet.

CALL SIGN, SHACKLE SHEET: this is a list of all information used in communicating i.e. call signs for mission success, failure, abort, medivac, all secure, friendly or foe WIA, KIA, MIA, and or POWs etc. there would be a section called a Shackle sheet for encoding of numbers. Morse code etc...

Here I would note that the radio frequencies should change with the different patrol and or Attack Phases mentioned below. Like your Vietnam fighter bomber pilots did with ingress and egress channels. This may sound silly from a modern stand point, with all the burst transmitting, scrambling scanner communications equipment. So let me suggest this, a unit could switch operators and swop frequencies with another unit in the same general area, that has also switched operators, thus voice signatures, habits, styles i.e. altering the “chop” etc. of the operator if you well, as a counter to patern recognition software. And of course both units would have switched to alternate Call sign Shackle sheet codes for units and commands etc.

SPECIFFIC PATROL INFORMATION;

1) Unit information (UI) – your patrols call sign i.e. name used to refer to your unit. Frequency, channel or phone number.

2) Unit position (UP) – call sign, grid coordinates (Gs), could also be address. Feature of recognition (F.O.R.) some sort of land mark for others to find your location, or for you to use upon return. All F.O.R. need to be described and would need a call sign so to not give enemy listening to radio transitions clues as to the patrols local. Example, you would not want to out right mention the mountains “sattle back” formation or the (T) shaped building, if those were your F.O.R.

3) Time of departure (TOD) – time patrol is set to start. Use 24 hour and synchronize with all Marines within your patrol and all units involved.

4) Point of departure (POD) – call sign, Gs, F.O.R., description and call sign. Estimated time of arrival (ETA) that is when you should be there and prepared to leave.

5) Line of departure (LOD) – call sign, Gs, F.O.R., E.T.A., in this case E.T.A. is when you will arrive at line of departure. At which time contact with foe is not only possible it is likely.

6) Patrol routes (PR) - call signs, cardinal or azimuth direction, distance or time (CAD-T) to remain on course. F.O.R. and suggested formations. There are multiple routes and you need reminding that you are on track. There for you will have call signs and features (plural) of recognition. Usually F.O.R. indicates i.e. is fallowed by a change in formation. So unit is better situated for different terrain.

7) Check points (C points) – call signs, Gs, F.O.R., ETA. Check points are usually in the range of 1km in jungle terrain. They are intersections of patrol routes; normally indicate a change in course. You well check your location and orientation do a roll call, check weapons, equipment, make any adjustments to schedules at these points.

8) Rally points (RP) - call signs, Gs, F.O.R. rally points are locations Marines can regroup with one another if they are separated. There is a final rally point that is used for regrouping after your unit has gone though objective. Because you will often scatter and leave objective in all directions, so witnesses cannot make a guess as to your general direction of travel, and thus your next objective. This also gives each Marine a chance to spot any enemy scouts or reinforcements in or approaching the area. If you are spotted on your way to the final rally point, you should lead foe away. The Final rally point dose have an ETA because you will not won’t to wait around there very long. You also have a password or signal and an avenue or direction of approach, as well as approach time intervals. Example, at hour or half hour marks. A rule of thumb is one or two can brake all the rules, many not any. This keeps you from killing some poor exhausted delirious just trying to get there bastards. One or two troops are not going to take your position. Large units on the other hand have no excuse. You can also post a Reception unit (PPP projected protective party) out in direction of approach (like a door butler). This unit can also serve as a maneuver counter attack unit if Final rally point is attacked. Note in some circumstances (deep in enemy terrain with only one extraction point) it is safer for the entire unit to withdrawal from objective as a fighting column.

(Reference, COE rule # 16)

Types of Rally points Note most likely I well only be using these term or items as examples of what other units may be doing things.

Initial, En Route, and Objective

Initial rally point. An initial rally point is a place inside of friendly lines where a unit may assemble and reorganize if it makes enemy contact ...

En Route, These are points seleted along the patrol’s route to the objective and form the objective back to friendly line/areas. The patrol leader selects them as the patrol passes through likely areas for which rally points are needed.

Objective rally points; this is the rally point nearest the objective at which the patrol reassembeles after the mission is accomplished. It may be located short of, to a flank, or beyond the objective. This may also be used as the final preparation point.

Final preparation position

Release point from which units move into formations and positions for attack,

Can serve as objective rally point advantage is the staging i.e. equipment can be left behind.

9) Objective (the O) – call sign, Gs, F.O.R. for air operations, features that stand out from the ground may not make good landmarks from the air, especially at night. These are the sort of things you should be looking for: Coastline in distinctive stretches, especially with breaking surf or white sands, river mouths over 100 meters wide or sharp promontories or inlets. Bends in rivers more than 100 meters wide, heavily wooded banks will reduce their visibility. Canals, their straight course and consistent width make them easy to spot, except where the surrounding countryside follows a uniform pattern (urban areas). Lakes at least a half square mile in area with a distinctive shape or feature. Woods and forests a square mile or more in size, with clear-cut boundaries or some special identifying feature. Major road and highway intersections. Railways, especially visible when there is snow on the ground.

You well also note here a General plan of attack; who, what, where, when, why, how.

General phases of an attack;

One (1^st ) the approach, Two (2^nd ) contact, Three (3^rd ) the assault and Four (4^th ) consolidation, this is all very much like the aerial combat phases of Detection, Sorting, Targeting, Intercept, Engage and Separation. Note with today’s Satellites, near space assets and UAVs and the like, the Detection, Sorting and Targeting phases could be separate i.e. preplanned phases prior to Approach, with Approach equaling patrols SOP i.e. conduct of maneuvers and Intercept phase equaling Contact, Engage equaling Assault, Separation equaling Consolidate, note if engagement does not end favorably for your unit or if publics attention has been gotten, you could be leaving area, thus phase could be extraction.

Reference, Recall Patrol Order item number # 8.

Phase one The Approach; ideally, at this point you are not under fire i.e. the foe dose not know your maneuvering on their position.

(Reference, Preparations and Conduct of patrols, all the rules and info of that section)

Your plan may include diversionary or decoy measures.

(Reference, Defense, rule # 5, Disguises, Decoys, Diversions)

Inserting into hostile territory: Air options, there are three, Airborne and two Airmobile variants.

Airborne; 1) Low altitude low opening (LALO) WWII, troops dropped form 1k’ they had only four to five seconds to choose between life and death. 2) High Altitude Low Opening (HALO). 3) High Altitude High Opening (HAHO). Breathing pure oxygen for 45 minutes before jumping to prepare for lack of oxygen at altitudes of 28k’-30k’. Then using self contained rigs, at 18k’-15k’ air content is good. Temperature -45 degrees. 20k’-30k’ jump, Note Breathing pure oxygen for preparations for mountain operations? Air mobile operations (AMO). This is actually landing the aircraft on the ground/L.Z.. There are two options. 1) Helicopters, for hot landing zones helicopters would be loaded with fewer Marines for quicker debarking. When Marines planning on repelling or jumping out of helicopters, they could drop Alice packs from altitude onto landing zone first (anti minefield).

The British MERT CH-47 flies faster, but it’s slower to start. And does better in high altitude and hot temp. the doctor with british MERT can do blood transfusions but not PJs.

This rotation of Pedros had done just under 400 missions in three months. Similar crews in Iraq might do half a dozen missions in the same period.

That's why there's probably at least 40 or more Army birds compared to our nine or so.

On very dark nights, they sometimes fire IR (infrared) illumination that helps our NVG.

2) Fixed wing aircraft (powdered or gliders) can also land on LZs. Considerations, a) Do you have a Reception unit, to act as guides and porters, transport people and supplies to safe locations, provide security and 'sterilize' the site. (Commands/voices from below can be heard quite well by paratroopers). Reception units are assets to all insertions. But may not always be available. In some cases you will have to go in blind. b) Do adequate DZs or LZs exist? LZ chosen, with regard to time available, direction of the sun and wind. Aircraft won’t to land and take off into the wind. Release point or beginning of runways marked with arrow pointing in direction of desired approach, coinciding also with the wind and only visible from approach side. Wind speed indicated by additional flares in arrow stem after three, flare intervals 25 meters. One extra = 5-10 mph, 2=10-15 mph, 3= 15-25 mph, higher than 25 mph consider another day.

(Reference, Appendix patrol order part A, for info continuing from “another day”, up to point of “continuation of other considerations” below.

Continuation of other considerations c) Cover and concealment in area. Dimensions of landing zone, azimuths and range of F.O.R. as well as obstacles are recorded and reported as if in center of landing zone and in clockwise manner. Paratroopers do not want to land in cultivated fields. It is difficult to conceal tracks. d) Fire power you can bring to bare and enemy air defenses. e) How good are the foe’s defenses, radars and air traffic control systems? f) Weather to land on or near, than maneuver troops to objective. Surprise can sometimes be achieved landing on site. Advantages of Gliders and helicopters, all Marines land together on objective, more rested for combat.

(Reference, Appendix patrol order part B for details on parachuting.)

Amphibious insertions: Consider many of the factors that affect airborne/airmobile insertions, available and types of coastlines. Best to land between high and low tides where sand is firmest and at night due to wind direction. Do you have kit to make sure sea water can't affect vital pieces of equipment?

Over Land operations: Infiltration overland can be the most secure way of all for insertion, especially if time is not all-important. DZs or LZs and especially amphibious insertions are unlikely to be right next door to objective and will probably end up as overland journeys anyways. Even in time of war, it is usually possible to gain access to the enemy's territory from a neighboring country along long unprotected boards.

Phase two Contact; at this point, your cover has been compromised; you may come under attack from foe’s indirect fires, CAS, and or small arms, thus you may utilize your own. Immediate actions may include smoke for screening and signal flares for other units to begin maneuvers or supportive measures. Note from TDG/MCA: the unit SOP used a white star cluster as a signal for “shift or lift fire” and a red star cluster for “emergency, I need help now.”

Over land operations, could also involve interring through customs, using, false identities and disguises. The success of this method depends on the quality of your cover and documentation. Fabrications and forgeries serve as evidence when real documents are not available. Do not travel to nation your foreign documents are issued from.

Price of documents; those issued from nation with most influence in area are the cheapest priced. The biggest advantage of this approach is that once you have gotten through the identity checks, searches and interrogation, you will be able to live quite openly in enemy territory. Customs questioning; reason for travel, how did you get money, how long will you stay, who well meet you, where are you going to stay, what will you be doing, how did you get passport. Residence; ground floors provide opportunity for digging trenches, tunnels. Always have document, equipment and weapons hides. Emergency exits/routes. Evacuation plans, know who will leave with documents, who will destroy what’s left. You should not chose perimeter apartments especially for meetings. Do not rent in immoral areas or near police fire or government buildings. Rent in newly developed areas, these neighbors do not know each other yet. Older neighborhoods have nosy old people. Rent under false names and appearance. One person should not rent two apts. in same area. Have cover stories for visitors. Entry signals, example a curtain placed a certain way, to indicate all clear. Avoid isolation from public, traffic at odd hours. Do not show up as blue collar worker at doctor’s apt. unless your cover is repairman. Other covers for contact, relatives visiting. Phone answering and or monitoring procedures. Upon arrival in new city head for laundry mat, read billboards.

Meetings debark transportation far from objective and walk to objectives, avoid main bus and transit stations. Traveling, do not arrive at night, fewer people around during day. To uncover a tail, drop something and observe who picks it up. Forcing tails to transit through “Chock points” thus giving you a time and place to closely observe or study them. Joke: mailing yourself a copy of the constitution so they may read it. Get on bus and off at next stop. Driving in then out i.e. threw parking lots. Switch cars in parking lots, long before closing. Then just before closing, call tow truck to hall used car onto street near lot. You should disable interior lights. Do not inter meeting location before person your to meet with dose. You could be target for him sitting there. If person you are meeting with leaves to go to bath room or to get something, wait for his return in another location, for instance you might go stand at bar. Depart meetings separately always know secondary exits, use side streets. No items or evidence to I.D. you should be left behind. Finger prints on drinking glasses, rap it with a napkin. Go to bathroom to write notes.

Phase three The Assault; at this point units are breaching the foes defenses i.e. kicking in the gates, you are inside the wire.

(Reference, Conduct of Engagements, basically all rules and info)

Other points to consider; in defense, a unit doubles or triples its combat power. Three to one ratio applies not just to Infantry but equipment. Ratio varies with size of force, platoon level maybe 10-1, theater 1-1 or 1-2 because only small part of terrain is fought over at a time. Nevertheless, with larger ratio less time is required to win. Information good, terrain/weather good day raid. Information bad, terrain/weather bad night raid. The worst the weather, longer the battle, more fatigue, greater the casualties. Deep operations are actions against enemy forces not yet in contact with friendly. Prevent foe from massing, create opportunities for other offensive actions, disrupt C4IRS and supplies. Slows foe down. Airpower and artillery are main weapons used. Light infantry is particularly suitable in areas of constricted terrain, fighting in MOUT and conducting airborne/mobile operations. Airborne/mobile operations used to seize key objectives before they are destroyed. Medical buildings, malls, stadiums, schools, (take advantage of air conditioning and electrical systems in large buildings). Parks, sports fields, swimming pools, construction sites, lumber and steel mills or yards, maintenance gauges. When a large force is concentrated on a narrow front attempting to break lines, airborne/mobile units may bypass adversaries’ main defenses to destroy artillery, C4I and logistical targets and secure key terrain in foe’s stern.

Phase four Consolidation/ Exploitation phase; the British refer to the fourth phase as “fighting through” it includes mopping up and securing the area i.e. setting up in a defensive position in preparation for a counter attack. Primary rules to consider here are located in the section titled Defense, initially along the lines of Conduct of defense i.e. after enemy has been repelled, pursue foe with a steady stream of fire, (shoot them right in the back) find, attend too and report all causalities, inventory and redistribute ammo etc. see reference note below.

During lulls in the fight, the squad leader checks ammunition and has ammunition collected from the dead and wounded.

Fallowed by setting up the defense i.e. perform defensive rules # 3 onward.

Note with this last phase you can also consider the aerial i.e. dog fight last phase of Separation if you are conducting small i.e. unconventional tactics of hit and run. Or if engagement does not go favorably for your unit.

Note tactics in aerial combat such as making note of your exit routes i.e. friendly lines or direction of friendly units, rally points etc.

(Reference, Defense, all rule especially Conduct of Defense, COE overall tips; Organizing the Assault unit, Reorganization and True V formation)

Debriefs;

In training debriefs are always conducted. This is truly where the learning occurs. This should not change in combat. After every patrol, firefight, guard duty etc, a debrief should follow. This allows you to develop a “truth report” i.e. “after action report” to be file with highers. Debriefs allow us to recognize our mistakes or improve our strengths, were you have presence and what areas have been neglected. You may see that you are using the same routes and crossings, which is setting you up for an IED. All this keeps Marines engaged and does not allow complacency to creep in. As the fighting goes on every Marine gains understanding of the enemy, how they fight and how your actions affect them. You should take minutes i.e. have someone record. Follow the same format to create an organized system that allows for thorough and efficient information flow. Apply my notes on studying, at the beginning of Tri-F. The debriefs should be divided between enemy and friendly topics. IMO first, discuss any firefight in detail, analyzing your actions and the enemy’s actions. IMO; details of any firefight should be discussed before anything else i.e. get the emotional event out of the way. Give updates to the KIA, WIA or MIA if possible, thus ease emotions. This event was not planned i.e. written down before the patrol. The rest of the patrols events were. Thus this gives everyone time to organize and work through their thoughts about the firefight and make and compare notes. You could use the I.SALUTE R.W.P. format to break down all of the details about the enemy and how they fought. Discuss you’re an the enemies phases of combat. Then discuss significant events like atmospherics, locals you interacted with, compounds searched, confirm the census data. Finally discuss the basics of the patrol in detail covering the items on the patrol order, look for ways to improve these based on current events.

(Reference, Study notes at the begaining of the Fragmented Fighting Facts)

10) Support, reserves and R.O.E. (Sup-er) – there would be a list including Units, equipment or weapons available fallowed by grid co ordinances designating, areas (i.e. boxes or squares) where units could provide support. Basically you only need to know, who to contact (call signs and frequencies etc are located on call sign shackle sheet) and how and where unit can help you. NOT THEIR LOCATIONS this is so if any foe gets hold of your units Patrol order, they do not have all other units’ locations. Joke; remember if your foreword of your phase line, artillery will be short on its target.

(Reference, Step # 2 Leadership guidelines, company cmdr)

R.O.E.; Rules of engagements, any specifics. Troops most remember the political and psychological impact of their actions. Local populations may be neutral or have luke warm feelings for the foreign forces. Excessive use of force can cause locals to support foe. In MOUT troops most be concerned with the media due to large number of journalist. Any negative images can be published. Be open to the press play them against each other if one dose a negative story invite competitor to do an investigative report of its own.

Note make future note of other mentions of media example under pro and anti guerrilla/insurgency operations. Note also these points would only apply with a guerrilla group since government and media are “in Bed with each other”.

82d Airborne Division Standing ROE

(Pocket Card) ARMED

ATTACK. Attack only hostile forces declared by your commander. If attacked, return fire with aimed fire. Return force with force necessary to repel hostile acts (from any source).

RISK. Assess risks/anticipate attack. Against other than declared hostile forces, use force first if, but only if, you see clear hostile intent.

MEASURE. Measure the amount of force that you use. Use only the force necessary to protect lives and accomplish the mission. Detain only forces/civilians specified by your commander.

ENGAGEMENT AUTHORITY. Prior authorization may be required to use certain weapons. Use weapons such as artillery, riot control agents, mines, etc., in accordance with your commander’s orders.

DEADLY FORCE. Use deadly force to protect persons/property designated by your commander. Stop short of deadly force when protecting other persons/property.

Maneuver vs. Attrition

Maneuver: Waged against leadership, kills fewer on both sides. Characterized by a clean battle field, smaller foot print, less equipment, weapons and fewer troops used. With fewer troops on front more need for auto entrenching equipment. Economy of force – Example; in the defense taking every third Marine off a wall to move elsewhere. More than mass multiplied by speed, it is getting there first with the best. Valor is superior to numbers. Being more agile and efficient. Smaller more maneuverable forces can win, if things over quickly. “One must adjust to fighting limited engagements by minimal means for specific goals”. The days of single purpose missions are over. Another words, while on your mission, you most have multiple objectives and capabilities to assist others with information etc. Requires skill and daring by offices and willingness form superiors to tolerate an occasional mistake or loss.

The "zero defects mentality" must be exchanged for an environment in which all Marines are afforded the "freedom to fail" and with it, the opportunity to succeed. Leaders will only seize the initiative Marines say if they’ve been delegated true operational authority. The battle field leader senses the trust and responsibility. On whole it will inspire leaders to do better. There will be some incompetence and even some Lieutenant Caleys, (The My Lai massacre.) But the forces will move faster then those lead by leaders taught to do only what there told. Success is gauged by POWs, it suggest foe has not been able to adapt to changing situation that friction has over whelmed, C4i has broken down.

(Reference, 3^rd generation warfare notes below.)

Attrition: Gives the illusion of predictable and reliable results. It’s a toe-toe slug match in which each side assumes that the other will abide by predictable rules and that sheer weight of numbers and materiel well determine the winner. Its equivalents in sports are tug of war and demolition derbies, in nature sea wearing down the stones. Foe viewed as unchanging mass. It is war in the administration. In which the important decisions are in fact logistical. Foe treated as inventory of targets and warfare is a mater of mustering support and resources. Drawn out war can cause foe to be dishearten if expecting a quick end and return home. Success gauged by KIAs. “You can win a war with bombs and blockades, but only the infantry can end the war”. IMO basis for US strategy with indigenous personal being recruited for the later i.e. end game. Brezhnev joked that, “Quantity has a quality of its own”.

Generations of War

Many argue that the evolution of war is shaped by a many-sided battle of ideas (with technology in a supporting role). They assert our adversaries are learning to counter the conventional attrition doctrine of the technology and firepower intensive forces of industrial based armies. They call this new form of warfare 4^th Generation Warfare to contrast it to warfare of the 1st Generation (tactics of line and column, e.g., Napoleon), the 2nd Generation (the industrial logistics/firepower intensive attrition tactics from Civil War through WWI), and the 3rd Generation (maneuver warfare as evolved out of the German's 1918 infiltration tactics to blitzkrieg to the mission tactics adopted by the Marine Corps in the 1980s).

The 4^th Generationists assert that the end of the Cold War neutralized the organizing dynamics of the bi-polar cold war rivalry and thereby unleashed a welter of nationalist, ethnic, religious, tribal, and criminal conflicts among state and non-state actors. They say these players fight differently and we better learn to exploit their very different weaknesses while avoiding their strengths.

On our Wilderness Road expedition, my friend and I visited the site of Drapers Meadows (now part of the Virginia Tech campus, Blacksburg), where Shawnee Indians captured a few whites and slaughtered the rest of that settlement's inhabitants in 1755. That made me interested in the French and Indian War. I looked it up in an old set of "The New Book of Knowledge" and found this passage:

In 1755 General Braddock arrived from England to take charge of the British troops … (He) had never fought in North America, where the enemy hid behind trees, melted away in the darkness, and never stood still to be fired at. Braddock had learned his fighting tactics in Europe, where armies fought in regular formations. Though Washington and the Indians [friendly scouts] told him otherwise, Braddock simply could not believe that tactics used by the best armies of Europe would not work against a ragged French-Indian force. The result was a French massacre of the British forces at Fort Duquesne. Two thirds of the approximately 1,500 British who fought were killed or wounded. Braddock himself was killed.

SP 12/14/08 The MIC always lean towards preparing for a large, conventional type war. Even though most of American military history consists of irregular warfare. Conventional wars were few, and brief. During the 18th and 19th centuries, most American military activity, at least in terms of years, was all about irregular warfare. Fighting Indians and frontier disorder defined the careers of generations of American troops. Even the American Revolution was largely irregular warfare, and often decisive irregular operations at that. The first four decades of the 20th century was largely irregular warfare and peacekeeping for U.S. forces. After WWII, there was more still, including the decade long war in Vietnam. But through all this, the MIC leadership focused on conventional warfare, and deliberately ignored the valuable lessons learned in generations of irregular warfare. It was as if irregular warfare was considered an exception, and conventional warfare the only thing that mattered. Another problem with irregular warfare is that, when these conflicts come along, the military establishment, and their political counterparts, proceed as if it's still peacetime. The military, especially those closest to the fighting, adopt a wartime mentality of urgency and immediacy. This causes friction with the military bureaucracy, who don't like to be hustled unless there is a national emergency they can identify with.

To counter such threats, these thinkers argue, that we will need fast-transient, expeditionary forces skilled in littoral operations, SOPs, political military operations, counter-drug, counter-terrorist, and nuclear operations, police work, all taking place more often in high density urban/suburban areas.

Without changing our patterns of thought, we will not be able to solve the problems we created with our current patterns of thought.

Albert Einstein

While military development is generally a continuous evolutionary process, the modern era has witnessed three watersheds in which change has been dialectically qualitative. Consequently, modern military development comprises three distinct generations. Modern war began with the Peace of Westphalia in 1648 which ended the Thirty Years War. Why? Because with that treaty, the state, which was itself relatively new, established a monopoly on war. After 1648, first in Europe and then world wide, war became something waged by states against other states, using state armies and navies (and later air forces).

1^st GW lasted from the Peace of Westphalia until around the time of the American Civil War. Most of the things that define the difference between “military” and “civilian”; such as saluting, uniforms, ranks i.e. military culture of order. Battles were fought with smoothbore muskets using lines and column tactics. These tactics were developed partially in response to technological factors — the line maximized firepower, rigid drill generated a high rate of fire, etc. — and partially in response to social conditions and ideas, e.g., the columns of the French revolutionary armies reflected both the élan of the revolution and the low training levels of conscripted troops. Although rendered obsolete with the replacement of the smoothbore by the rifled musket, vestiges of first generation tactics survive today, especially in a frequently encountered desire for linearity on the battlefield. Operational art in 1^st GW did not exist as a concept although it was practiced by individual commanders, most prominently Napoleon. Just as most state militaries are still designed to fight other state militaries, so they also continue to embody the 1^st GW culture of order. The problem is that, starting around the middle of the 19th century, the order of the battlefield began to break down the old line and column tactics became suicidal i.e. increasingly contradictory to order.

2^nd GW developed by the French in WWI to re-establish order on the battlefield. 2^nd GW preserved the military culture of order it focused inward on orders, rules, processes/tactics and procedures/regulations. There is a "school solution" for every problem. Battles are fought methodically, so prescribed methods drive training and education, where the goal is perfection of detail in execution. 2^nd GW like the First, values obedience over initiative (initiative is feared because it disrupts synchronization) and relies on imposed self discipline. 2^nd GW saw the formal recognition and adoption of the operational art, initially by the Prussian army. Again, both ideas and technology drove the change. The ideas sprang largely from Prussian studies of Napoleon's campaigns. Technological factors included Von Moltke's realization that modern tactical firepower mandated battles of encirclement and the desire to exploit the capabilities of the railway and the telegraph. While ideas played a role (particularly the idea of lateral dispersion), technology was the principal driver of change. Technology manifested itself both qualitatively, in such things as (barbed wire, rifled musket, breechloaders, the machineguns, heavier indirect fire artillery and bombing aircraft) and quantitatively, in the ability of an industrialized economy to fight a battle of materiel (Materialschlacht). 2^nd GW aka firepower/attrition warfare tactics relied on centrally-controlled indirect artillery fire synchronized with infantry, cavalry and aviation. However tactics remained essentially linear. The defense still attempts to prevent all penetrations, and in the attack a laterally dispersed line advanced by rushes in small groups. 2^nd GW tactics were summed up in the French maxim, "the artillery conquers, the infantry occupies." Massed firepower replaced massed manpower. The US Army and the U.S.M.C. both learned 2^nd GW from the French during the WWI, 2^nd GW tactics remained the basis of U.S. doctrine until the 1980s, and it largely remains the "American way of war" today.

3^rd GW aka Maneuver Warfare, has its roots in the German Army in WWI i.e. spring offensive of 1918. The German Army's new tactics were the first non linear tactics, they also broke with the 1^st and 2^nd GW culture of order. Instead of trying to restore order the German’s used chaos by relying less on firepower than on speed and tempo. It sought to present the enemy with unexpected and dangerous situations faster than he could cope with them mentally or physically. 3^rd GW militaries focus outward on the situation i.e. the enemy, and the result the situation requires. Leaders at every level are expected to get that result, regardless of orders. Decentralization and focusing on the enemy rather than terrain and valuing initiative higher than obedience are central characteristics of maneuver warfare. The driving force was primarily ideas. Mistakes are tolerated and self discipline, rather than imposed discipline, is encouraged. A well trained officer corps, educated in the spirit of the commander is another central requirement for maneuver warfare. The defense was in depth and instead of trying to hold a line it often invited penetration, which set the enemy up for a counterattack. The object was to draw the enemy in, then cut him off. On the offensive, with the German "storm-troop tactics" of 1918 the attack relied on infiltration to bypass i.e. flow like water around enemy strong points, reaching deep into the enemy's stern area and rolling his forward units up from the flanks and stern thus collapsed the enemy rather than seeking to close with and destroy them. These WWI infantry tactics, when used by armored and mechanized formations in WWII, became known as “Blitzkrieg.” When 2^nd and 3rd GW met in the German campaign against France in 1940, the 2^nd GW French Army was defeated completely and quickly; the campaign was over in six weeks. Both armies had similar technology, and the French actually had more (and better) tanks. Ideas, not weapons, dictated the outcome. The addition of tanks caused a major shift at the operational level in World War II. That shift was blitzkrieg. In the blitzkrieg, the basis of the operational art shifted from place (as in Liddell-Hart's indirect approach) to time. This shift was explicitly recognized only recently in the work of retired Air Force Col John Boyd and his " OODA (observation- orientation - decision - action ) theory.

(Reference, Manuver Vs Attrition above.)

4^th GW is not, like its predecessors, a new method of war. Rather the state monopoly on violence is being lost.

The root of the problem is a political, social i.e. moral revolution: a crisis of legitimacy of the state. All over the world, citizens of states are transferring their primary allegiance away from the state to other things: tribes, ethnic groups, religions, Corporations, gangs, ideologies. Many people who will no longer fight for their state will fight for their new primary loyalty. In Iraqi state armed forces showed little fight, but Iraqi guerrillas whose loyalties are to non state elements, fight. The decline of the state means there can be no purely military solution. This is especially the case when the military force is foreign; usually, its mere presence will further undermine the legitimacy of the state it is attempting to support.

We sometimes (misleadingly) call war against non state opponents "Operations Other Than War" (OOTW) or “Stability and Support Operations” (SASO).

Much of 4GW is simply war as it was fought before the rise of the state and the Peace of Westphalia. Societies knew little internal order or peace; Mercenaries were hired, bands of men with weapons, when not hired out for wars, simply took whatever they wanted. In fact, before Westphalia, business enterprises, clans, Ethnic groups, Families, gangs, tribes, races and Religions, waged wars. These wars were often many sided, and alliances shifted constantly. The lines between “civilian” and “military”, and between crime and war, were non existent. Tactics included, assassination, bribery, betrayal, treachery, even dynastic marriage.

4^th GW will have no definable battlefields or fronts. Terms Front-stern will be replaced with targeted-untargeted. Lines between responsibility and mission well blur. The tactical and strategic levels will blend as the opponent's political infrastructure and civilian society become battlefield targets. In fact targets may be more in the civilian than the military sectors. It seems likely to be widely dispersed. Actions will occur concurrently throughout all participants' depth, including their society as a cultural, not just a physical, entity but including knowledge. Major military and civilian Centers of gravity i.e. COG facilities, such as airfields, fixed communications sites, large headquarters, seats of government, power plants, and manufacturing and other industrial sites will become rarities.

Technology; computer viruses, including latent viruses, well be used. Research in superconductivity suggests the possibility of storing and using large quantities of energy in very small packages. Directed Energy Weapons (DEW) may bring electromagnetic pulse (EMP) effects without a nuclear blast. Permitting small teams to destroy targets they could not with conventional weapons i.e. it is possible that a fire team could have the same battlefield effect as a current brigade. Car bombs may contain a product of genetic engineering rather than high explosives?

Psychological operations may become the dominant operational and strategic weapon in the form of (Logic bombs) and media/information intervention i.e. manipulating the media to alter opinion. A major target will be the enemy population's support of its leadership. However its effectiveness could rapidly eliminate the ability of a nuclear-armed opponent to wage war conventionally. Destruction or disruption of vital industrial capacities, political infrastructure, and social fabric, coupled with sudden shifts in the balance of power and concomitant emotions, could easily lead to escalation to nuclear weapons. This risk may deter 4^th GW among nuclear armed powers just as it deters major conventional warfare among them today. IMO only delay i.e. just like MAD has not kept us out of a shooting war, neither will the most sophisticated syops.

4^th GW will merely accentuate and combined all this. 3^rd (not to speak of 2^ndGW) militaries seem to have little capability against such synthesis. This could be a signpost of a typical generational shift.

Thus we see two major catalysts for change in previous generational shifts: technology and ideas. Technology was the primary driver of 2^nd GW; ideas were the primary driver of the 3^rd. An idea-based 4^th GW is also conceivable.

For about the last 500 years, the West has defined warfare. For a military to be effective it generally had to follow Western models. Because the West's strength is technology, it may tend to conceive of 4^th GW in technological terms. However 4^th GW may emerge from non-Western cultures, such as Arab or Asiatic. Thus trailing in technology may lead them to develop 4^th GW through ideas rather than technology.

The genesis of an idea-based 4^th GW may be visible in terrorism. This is not to say that terrorism is 4^th GW, but rather that elements of it may be signposts of 4^th GW. Terrorism is not a new phenomenon, and so far it has proven largely ineffective.

Terrorists resolve the order vs chaos by eliminating the culture of order. Terrorists do not have uniforms, drill, saluting or, for the most part, ranks. Being of broader culture and non-Western may facilitate this development.

Even in equipment, terrorism may point toward signs of a change in generations. Typically, an older generation requires much greater resources to achieve a given end than does its successor. Today, the US is spending $500 million apiece for stealth bombers. A terrorist stealth bomber is a car with a bomb in the trunk a car that looks like every other car.

Some "carryovers" from 3^rd GW. The more successful terrorists appear to operate on broad mission orders that carry down to the level of the individuals. The 'battlefield" is highly dispersed and includes the whole of the enemy's society. The terrorist lives almost completely off the land and the enemy. Two additional carryovers may be useful "signposts" of 4^th GW. The first is a component of collapsing the enemy from within. It is a shift in focus from the enemy's front to his stern. 1^st GW focused tactically and operationally (when operational art was practiced) on the enemy's front and combat forces. 2GW remained frontal tactically, but at least in Prussian practice it focused operationally on the enemy's stern through the emphasis on encirclement. The 3GW shifted the tactical as well as the operational focus to the enemy's stern. Terrorism takes this one step further. It attempts to bypass the enemy's military entirely and strike directly at his homeland at civilian targets. The second signpost is the way terrorism seeks to use the enemy's strength against him, this "judo" concept begin in 2GW, with encirclement. The enemy's fortresses became fatal traps. It was pushed further in 3GW where, on the defensive, one side often let the other infiltrate so his own momentum makes him less able to turn and deal with a counterattack. Terrorists use a free society's freedom and openness, its greatest strengths, against it. They can move freely within the society while actively working to subvert it. They use democratic rights not only to infiltrate but also to defend themselves. If we are forced to set aside our legal system to deal with terrorists, the terrorists win.

Attacking the enemy's culture works from within as well as from without. It can bypass not only the enemy's military but the state itself. The US is already suffering heavily from such a cultural attack in the form of the drug traffic. Drugs directly attack our culture. They have the support of a powerful "fifth column," the drug buyers. They bypass the entire state apparatus despite our best efforts. Some ideological elements in South America see drugs as a weapon; they call them the "poor man's ICBM”. They prize the drug traffic not only for the money it brings in through which we finance the war against ourselves but also for the damage it does to the hated North Americans.

Our national security capabilities are designed to operate within a nation-state framework. Outside that framework, they have great difficulties. The drug war provides an example. Because the drug traffic has no nation-state base, it is very difficult to attack. The nation-state shields the drug lords but cannot control them. We cannot attack them without violating the sovereignty of a friendly nation. A 4GW attacker could well operate in a similar manner, as some terrorists already do. A non-national or transnational base, such as an ideology or religion. SP Syria hosted terrorists for two reasons. Most importantly, this provided the dictator with considerable immunity to terrorist attacks. Second, this close relationship with terrorists made it easy to hire the terrorists for some freelance murder. Dictators have a lot of enemies, and having some grateful (for the sanctuary) terrorists on call, is a good way to deal with people out to do you harm. IMO note the same basic reasons for the ISIs support for the Taliban in Pakistan.

Note however then there’s the theory that Saddam did not let so called Al queda in out of fear they would take over.

5^th GW note Maj Mark W. Elfers Gazette June 2009,

The author states, “[O]ur next conflict could well be small, morally confusing, and idea centered, combining the worst ends of Saigon, Mogadishu, 11 September 2001, and Baghdad.” LtCol Coerr’s first point is that America’s (5GW) opponent may not have a center of gravity (COG). Secondly that the state will lose its position as the prime mover and redresser of grievance. Thirdly that success in 5GW is inversely proportional to the amount of military force used. The following are counterpoints to LtCol Coerr’s thesis.

When current irregular warfare opponents are broken down to their basic components, one finds highly organized international criminal organizations. They conspire to kill people and to destroy property in order to develop or to secure their own positions of power. They use religion because it polarizes the issues.

4^th GW is guerilla warfare more than “terrorism.” Terrorism is a single enemy tactical action designed to have direct operational or strategic effect. Because targets that have such operational or strategic effect are few and are usually well-protected, terrorism normally plays a minor role in 4^th GW conflicts.

Terrorism also appears to represent a solution to a problem that has been generated by previous generational changes but not really addressed by any of them.

Colonel David Hackworth in Vietnam, called this “out-guerilla’ing the guerilla,” or “out-g’ing the G.” In his memoirs, About Face, he wrote, we would no longer be the counterinsurgents who, like actors on a well-lit stage, gave all their secrets away to an unseen, silent and ever-watchful (insurgent) audience in a darkened theater. Instead we would approach the battlefield and the war as our enemy approached it, and in so doing begin to outguerilla the guerilla – “out-G the G”. The basic concepts, men, not helicopters or mechanical gimmicks, won battles, and that the only way to defeat the present enemy in the present war at a low cost in friendly casualties was through adopting the enemy’s own tactics, i.e., cunning, deception, surprise, mobility . . . imagination, and familiarity with the terrain . . . In training Field training should be freeplay exercises against guerilla opponents who are allowed to make full use of such typical guerilla tools as mines, booby traps and infiltration of their enemy’s stern areas.

SP In order to minimize civilian casualties, the air force relied more on over a thousand guided missiles (Hellfires and TOWs) fired from helicopters.

Israel only has 46 AH-64s, but several hundred F-16s that can drop smart bombs. So any operations in southern Lebanon would involve lots more smart bombs. Moreover, Gaza is much more densely populated than southern Lebanon, making it safer to use smart bombs.

4^th GW Irregulars do enjoy some important advantages over conventional forces. They can avoid stronger but more heavily equipped opponents by using concealment and dispersal (often within the civil population). They can solicit popular support or, if unsuccessful, compel popular submission. They can be difficult to target, especially with air power and artillery. They can fight an endless war of mines and ambushes.

Light (or Jaeger) infantry is the best counter to irregulars because it offers three critical capabilities. First, a “man to man” fight avoids the “Goliath” image. If the light infantry does not pack to heavily with arms and equipment, it can enjoy the same mobility as the irregulars (enhanced, as necessary by helicopters or motor vehicles). Second, LI can be far more discriminating than other combat arms and avoid collateral damage. Third, LI can show the local population a “human face.” They can be courteous and even apologize for their mistakes. They can protect the local people from retaliation and train defense force.

Current Marine infantry is “light” only in the sense that it does not have its own medium or heavy armored vehicles. However, it has a superabundance of everything else. In the field, our “light” infantrymen routinely carry more than 50 kilograms of body armor, weapons, ammunition, radios, field equipment, etc. They must depend heavily on motor vehicles. These vehicles, in turn, tie them to roads and open terrain, expose them to mines and ambush and diminish their ability to operate in urban terrain. Reducing our motor vehicle dependence requires hard choices, including a reduction in the number and size of crew-served weapons. Although modest

firepower levels are enough to defeat most 4GW foes, we still arm our “light” infantry as if for conventional combat against heavily armed opponents who fight as we do. Light infantry tactics are above all hunting or stalking tactics. They must rely heavily on stealth, invisibility and trickery. To real light infantry, ambush is a mentality, not merely a technique.

A good LI defensive position is one that surprises the enemy from a short distance but, at the same time, enables the defender to move fast and under cover to a new position, unknown to the enemy.

In 4^th GW most light infantry combat will occur at the company level or below.

Cash (buying goods) avoids illegitimate actions, but also creates a dependency of locals on friendly forces that will encourage the support from the population that LI requires for its operations to be successful.

Light infantry should be able to "live off the land" for prolonged periods and in almost any part of the world. It should be trained and equipped to use cash to draw on the local infrastructure for most of its needs. This type of true light infantry, or Jaegers, is very different from what Marines now know as light infantry.

Three levels

The three classical levels of war strategic, operational and tactical still exist in 4^th GW.

Colonel John Boyd' s definition of grand strategy, the highest level of war; as the art of connecting yourself to as many other independent power centers (i.e. COG) as possible while isolating your enemies from theirs. A 4^th GW conflict will usually have many different COG not only at strategic levels but tactical levels too. The game of connection and isolation will be central to tactics and operational art as well as to strategy and grand strategy. It will be important to ensure that what you are doing at the tactical level does not alienate independent COG you need to connect with at the operational or strategic levels present or future.

One important change is that while in the first three generations, strategy was the province of generals, 4^th GW gives us the "strategic corporal." Especially when video cameras are rolling, a single enlisted Marine may take an action that has strategic effect. Another change is that all three levels may be local. A unit must harmonize its AOR i.e. local tactical actions with strategic goals i.e. both must be pursued consistently. (When assigning AOR it is important that its boundaries reflect real local boundaries, such as those between tribes and clans, and not be arbitrary lines drawn on a map at some higher headquarters.)

Because operational art is the art of focusing tactical actions on enemy strategic COG, operational art becomes difficult or even impossible in 4^th GW were opponents' strategic COG are intangible. This was the essence of the Soviet failure in Afghanistan. The Soviets focused on operational art, they could not operationalize a conflict where the enemy's strategic COG was God. The Soviets were reduced to fighting at the tactical level only. IMO this operational art is all filibuster crap. I have noted it just to be aware of the definition when others start talking about it. As far as operationalizing God as a COG it’s “separation of Church and State”.

Colonel Boyd also identified three levels of any conflict; they were the physical, mental and the moral.

Boyd argued the physical is the least powerful, the moral level is the most powerful and the mental level lies between the other two. IMO the physical would include killing people, breaking things, kinetics etc. Moreover, I agree it would be the weakest of all. However with me the mental would include morals i.e. values and motivations, as well as I.Q. over all technological aspects etc. Further more even Lawrence of Arabia’s strategy on guerrilla warfare with its three elements 1) Algebraically 2) Biological 3) Psychological, could also be considered as a sub brake down of the Mental level, even the biological seeing how genetics plays such a row in our thinking. Psychological could drift off into the spiritual if you have the time or care.

Physical examples;

Mental examples;

Moral examples; the contradiction between the physical and moral levels is similar to the contradiction between the tactical and strategic levels, but the two are not identical. The physical and moral levels play at the tactical and strategic levels. Any disharmony among levels creates openings which opponents can exploit. Of course, we can also exploit our opponents' disharmonies. For example, lets say one opponent is a religious group. In a town where we have a presence, a local feud results in the killing of a clergyman by members of the same group. In itself, this is a minor tactical event. But if we use information warfare to focus the public's attention on it, pointing out how the tenets of the religion are not being observed by those who claim to speak for it, we might create a “moral bomb.” A physical action would play on the moral level, just as a tactical action would play on a strategic level.

A central dilemma of 4^th GW: what works for you on the physical (and sometimes mental) level often works against you at the moral level. It is therefore very easy in 4^th GW to win all tactical engagements yet lose the war. The basic problem remains the same: all actions, even the smallest, must be considered with great care and from a variety of perspectives lest they have unintended consequences on other (and possibly higher) levels. Note IMO this could bring about a paralyzing quick sand dead end attitude i.e. all the enlisted need to be taught is to “not do on to others as you would not wont done to you”. Using all the above winded theory as an example etc. otherwise your asking for the professional Warfighter to be a psychiatrist with a gun on nothing but a crash course.

Note keep in mind my preferred brake down however the fallowing notes continue more or less down the lines of Colonel Boyd’s views i.e. system.

Also, phase order of effects i.e. first, second or third. IMO first meaning direct effect on those concerned. Second, order a side effects. Third might be historical or traditional.

4^th GW forces are free of the 1^st GW culture of order; they focus outward, prize initiative and they are highly decentralized, rely on self discipline. 4^th GW fighters are very good at making themselves untargetable.

Unlike state armed forces, most 4^th GW entities cannot simply order their men to fight. Most 4^th GW forces are, in effect, militias and throughout history, motivating them to fight has been a major challenge. We must ensure that we do not solve that problem for opponents. We emphasize the strategic level here in part because errors at the strategic level cannot be undone by successes at the tactical level (that is the primary lesson from Germany's defeats in both World Wars), and states often violate this rule in 4^th GW.

In 4^th GW less is more. First objective keep "footprint" as small as possible. Important to minimize the contradiction between the physical and moral levels.

The smaller foot print, the fewer negative effects our presence will have at the moral level. This is true not only for us but for the state we are attempting to buttress.

If the situation is such that Marines' presence must be obvious, that is, we cannot limit it in extent i.e. in situations where Marines do invade.

Another way to minimize our footprint is to limit its duration i.e. conducting expeditions, or raids.

An easy victory on the battle field brings with it a serious danger. Our victory can easily destroy the enemy state itself, not merely bring about "regime change.” If this happens, it may prove impossible to re create a state. As it is easy to loss by winning. Therefore, we must learn how to preserve enemy states at the same time that we defeat them. The key to preserve its armed forces. Here, the revival of an 18th century practice may be helpful: rendering the opposing armed forces the "honors of war." Instead of humiliating them, destroying them physically or, after our victory, disbanding them, we should do them no more damage than the situation requires. Prisoners should be treated with respect. If they are senior officers, they should be treated as "honored guests," invited to dine with our generals, given the best available quarters etc. we should praise how well they fought, give them respect in public. Throughout the conflict, all our actions should be guided by the goal of enabling and encouraging the armed forces we are fighting to work with us. The same is true for civil servants of the enemy state. It is critical that the state bureaucracy continue to function. We must be careful not to leave any segments of the enemy's society unrepresented in a new government. And, that government should be headed by local figures, not by someone from another country.

If all else fails, occupations should be by joint forces.

This is the least desirable option, because as foreign occupiers, we are at a severe disadvantage at the moral/legitimacy level.

“Joint” no longer means Army-Navy-Air Force and Marine Corp cooperation. Joint full spectrum goals for a region, area and community and they have sub goals by region and time leading to the overall goal. Marines must work hand-in-hand with organizations such as State Department, Aid organizations, NGOs etc. At the most powerful level of war, the moral level, the key to victory is to convince the local people to identify with us, or at least to acquiesce to us, rather than identifying with our enemies. Because we are foreign invaders representing a different culture (and sometimes a different religion), this is a difficult challenge.

Meeting this challenge will depend to a significant degree not on what we do, but on what we do not do. We cannot insult and brutalize the local population and simultaneously convince them to identify with us. We cannot represent a threat to their historic culture, religion or way of life. We cannot come across as Goliath, because no one identifies with Goliath. Nor do people identify with Paris, the Trojan champion in the Iliad, who fought from a distance (he was an archer) and was therefore a coward. This does not mean we should be weak, or project an image of weakness. That is also fatal, because in most other cultures, men do not identify with the weak. History is seldom determined by majorities. It is determined by minorities who are willing to fight.

In most 4^th GW situations, the critical “constituency” we must convince to identify with or acquiesce to us is young men and women of fighting age. To them, we must appear to be strong without offering a challenge to fight that honor requires them to accept. They may identify with an outsider who is strong. They will fight any outsider who humiliates them. In terms of ordinary, day-to-day actions, there is a Golden Rule for winning at the moral level, and it is this: Don’t do on to others as you would not won’t done to you. This Golden Rule has a corollary: when you make a mistake and hurt or kill someone you shouldn’t or damage or destroy something you shouldn’t – and you will – apologize and pay up, fast. Repair and rebuild, quickly, if you can, but never promise to repair or rebuild and then not follow through. This brings us to the bottom line for winning at the moral level: your words and your actions must be consistent.

Another dilemma of 4^th GW: What succeeds on the tactical level can easily be counter productive at the strategic level. Example, using overwhelming firepower at the tactical level, Marines may intimidate the local population into fearing and leaving them alone. But fear and hate are closely related, and hating us works toward our strategic defeat.

In 4^th GW, the weak often have more power than the strong. One of the first to employ the power of weakness was Mahatma Gandhi. His insistence on non-violent tactics. Once the British responded to Indian independence gatherings and rallies with violence, they immediately lost the moral war. In most situations, our best hope of winning lies not in escalation but in de-escalation. Marines are taught to escalate. Cops don’t do that, because it enrages the community. With the David and Goliath story, most root for David. "One of our first rules is proportionality. A disproportionate response makes us look like cowards."

We must understand that, despite/in spite of, our vast tactical and technical superiority, at the strategic level we are weaker. The reason is simple: at some point we will go home, while our opponents will remain. That fact overwhelms all others, every local ask himself, “What will my situation be when the Marines leave?” If we fracture the local society to the point where order is unlikely after we depart, anyone who has worked with us will then be in danger.

Our strategic objectives must be realistic. Seldom if ever will we be able to re make other societies and cultures. Nor can we make ourselves loved by countries we invade; keeping them from hating us so much that they want to fight us will often be the best we can do. In insurgencies, "51% solutions" are acceptable. Remember, 4^th GW is easy to lose and very challenging to win. In most 4^th GW, state armed forces end up defeating themselves.

Accuracy of the Observation and Orientation is more important than speed. As in 3^rd GW the tactical level in 4^th GW conflicts is reconnaissance driven, not intelligence driven; the information Marines need will almost always come from below, not from higher headquarters.

No Fort Apaches. We'll live in the towns. We will billet with the people, paying them well for the quarters we occupy. We'll shop in the local markets, drink coffee in the local cafes. We protect the shopkeepers, but they also protect us. They don't want their shops blown up. Let captains, lieutenants and sergeants work their areas the way they see fit, blending in as much as possible.

“With that kind of dispersion, requires trust in command, not control. I give my subordinates mission orders. They know the result I want. Works like German operational philosophy based upon a common outlook and freedom-of-action, and realized through their concepts of mission and schwerpunkt, emphasized implicit over explicit communication.

Which suggests
The secret of the German Command and Control System lies in what’s unstated or not communicated to one another in order to exploit lower-level initiative yet realize higher-level intent, thereby diminish friction and reduce time, hence gain both quickness and security.
Result
The Germans were able to repeatedly operate inside their adversary’s observation-orientation-decision-action loops.

Least we forget; in general, techniques have no place in a doctrinal manual because techniques should never be doctrine. Defining techniques as doctrine is a mark of a Second Generation military. In the Third and Fourth Generations, techniques are entirely at the discretion of whoever, regardless of rank, has to get a result. He is responsible only for getting the result, never for employing a set method. That is doctrine! 3^rd GW militaries also recognize that any technique usually has a short "shelf life" in combat. As soon as the enemy comes to expect it, he turns it against you. This, in turn, means that the ability to invent new techniques is highly important. Units that develop a successful new technique should communicate their discovery laterally to other Marine units. 4^th GW makes this all the more important, because 4^th GW opponents will often use techniques very different from our own. Their "way of war" will reflect their culture, not ours.

"chivalric code" that sets rules both sides will follow. Some (not all) entities have self images that make honor, generosity, and lineage tracing to "knightly" forebears important to them. Just as chivalry was important before the state, it may again become important after the state. Where these attributes are present, it may be to our advantage (especially on the moral level) to propose a "chivalric code." The specifics of such a code would vary place to place. Regardless of the specifics, such codes will generally work to our advantage. They will diminish our "Goliath" image, demonstrate that we respect the local people and their culture, and generally help de-escalate the conflict. They will also assist in improving public order, which in turn helps in preserving or re creating a local state. IMO one problem with allowing people to be who they are is Religion is easy and people travel the path of least resistance, so the “Book Thumpers” will take over.

Disadvantages such codes may bring to us at the physical level will generally be more than compensated by advantages at the mental and moral levels.

"From day one, our message to the people was, 'We're not here to take over. You are in charge. You tell us what to do that will help you.' We helped them bring in NGOs to set up clinics and distribute food. We put our troops to work with local engineers and technicians to improve the infrastructure. “What we needed weren’t grunts. We need plumbers, carpenters, electricians, masons and construction material. Engineers, doctors, city planners, lawyers or professionals. The skills of each Marine should be identified at the battalion level.

Reservists and National Guardsmen may be better suited to 4^th GW situations than many regulars. They are, on average, older and better educated than Active Units. Most are skilled in trades other than warfighting. Police officers and prison guards are often found in Reserve and National Guard units. The police officer who has walked a beat in any major American city has dealt with gang warfare, illicit drug dealing, gun running and other criminal enterprises. 4^th GW war does not look much different than the streets of an American ghetto. The level of violence may be more extreme, but many police who serve on SWAT teams in major cities have dealt with more violence in a month than most Marines do in a year.

On security, we let the mayor and the local police set policy. We captured over 1000 insurgents. We released all locals; we did keep them with us for a while to show them that we treat people with respect and are trying to help. They get to know the Marines, who treat POW as guests. Only if we capture someone a second time or if they are not locals do we forward them to division.

They like us want order too, only they know a lot better than we do how to get it in their society." "We understand that real psyops are not what we say but what we do, and God help us if the two are different. The people well understand that we are not there to change the way they live, or to make them live by our rules. Put up signs in all our buildings, in Arabic and in English that say, 'When in Afghanistan, do as the Afghans do.' We go out of our way to make it clear that we do not see our way of life as superior to theirs. We are not somehow 'better' than they are. In cultures like this one, honor and pride are very important. If we seem to lord it over them, they have to fight us because their honor demands it."

American-style “Force Protection” is highly disadvantageous, because it seeks security by isolating marines from the surrounding population. Effectiveness demands the opposite: integration with the local populace. The reason is that just as Marines protect the local people, so the local people will protect them. Perhaps the best example of this symbiotic protection is the traditional British “bobby.” The bobby was, until recently, unarmed. The reason he did not need a weapon was that just as he protected the neighborhood, the neighborhood protected him. The bobby had a regular beat, which he patrolled on foot. He came to know every house and its inhabitants, and they came to know him. Just as his familiarity with his beat enabled him to see very quickly if anything was out of the ordinary, so the fact that the local people knew him as an individual meant they told him what he needed to know. Marines will not be able to go about unarmed in most situations. By buying bread, fruit or construction materials locally, Marines’ presence also contributes to the local economy. To be effective, they must reside in the same neighborhood or village for some time. Results usually come slowly. In Vietnam Marines had the CAP program i.e. integration with the local population. Highly effective By all accounts. Again, Marine commanders should attempt to learn from such past successes as the CAP program and not have to “reinvent the wheel” in each new conflict.

Develop a mental "switch." When the switch is set for combat with state armed forces, Marines must want to fight. When instead it is set for 4^th GW situations, Marines must be equally keen not to fight. The second involves risks, as does the first. But the second is just as important as the first, because not wanting to fight is as important to victory in 4^th GW as wanting to fight is in the 3^rd. The key, as elsewhere, is the Marines' well known self discipline.

One part of "not wanting to fight" may require taking more casualties than you inflict. It is more important not to kill the wrong people than it is to kill armed opponents. Anytime an innocent person is wounded or killed, his family and clan members are likely to be required by the local culture to take revenge. This means when Marines are under fire, they must discipline themselves to return fire only when they are certain they are firing on armed enemies. If Marines are fired on in a situation where it is not clear who is firing and the Marines are intermixed with the civilian population, the best solution may be to withdraw. We need not “win” every firefight by leaving behind a pile of dead local people. Finally, despite a policy of de-escalation, there will be some situations where Marines do need to escalate. When that happens, we again stress that it must be over fast. Once the escalation terminates, Marines must make every effort to demonstrate that de-escalation remains Marine Corps policy.

Graffiti in Iraq "Now the real war starts." American tanks had ripped up some roads, crushed sewers and water pipes and even knocked down a few buildings.

Don’t go in with M-1s and Bradleys. Just HMMWVs and trucks. Ditch the helmets, armor and sunglasses. They make you look like Robocop. US troops in their helmets, armor and sunglasses, they looked like jinn, not men.

We treat their wounded just like our own. We sent them on helos to US run hospitals, not the crummy local ones. We transported their families to the hospitals to see them, and when they were well enough we took them back to their homes. We also gave money to the families that had lost wage earners." "Moslems bury their dead immediately, and I and my men went to all the funerals. Then I had memorial services for my two KIA and invited the townspeople. Many came, including three imams who offered prayers. That had a huge impact locally. I then asked the imams if they and their colleagues would give classes on Islam to me and my troops. "Sir, my other two wounded happened like this”. A couple kids with AK 47s jumped a patrols. They couldn’t really shoot, it was just pray and spray. Despite two men down, my guys did not shoot the kids. My patrol leader charged them and they dropped their weapons and ran. When he caught them, he brought them back to the ambush site, pulled their pants down and spanked them. The crowd loved it, and the kids were humiliated in front of their buddies instead of being heroes. Both of my guys have since returned to duty and the kids' parents have apologized to us.

If we have to take out an evil doer, the preferred option is to take out a contract on them. Locals do the dirty work, (American fingerprints.) There may be situations where escalation on the tactical level is necessary to obtain de-escalation on the operational and strategic levels i.e. if there is an insurgent cell that is too tough for locals to handle, we send in our Nighthunters, our equivalent to Delta Force. They specialize in being invisible. Local citizens never see them or deal with them. That enables us to keep the locals from seeing the average American as a threat. We try not to kill, make use of CS gas etc. if we do kill someone we pay blood money to his tribe.

"Of course, there are situations where we do want bloodshed. We constantly try to identify factional divisions among the insurgents. When we find one, we try to escalate it, to ramp up friction within the other side. We use (whispering campaigns) i.e. lies and deceptions to sway one faction to whack another, then we find discreet ways to help them do that. We do it in such a way that they all start blaming each other. Often, the insurgents do our most difficult jobs for us, killing their own leaders out of fear of being stabbed in the back. Also known as the "Mafia Model." How would the mafia do an occupation? One key to a mafia’s success is the concealed use of force as well as money as weapons. If an individual needs to be “whacked,” then it is usually done with little fanfare and in the shadows. The rule is, “No fingerprints.” Unless there is a specific message to be sent out to a larger audience, people who are killed by the Mafia are almost never found. This usually requires patience. It often takes a long time for the right situation to present itself. If there is a message to be made to a larger audience, then a public display of violence is used. But this is usually avoided, as it can backfire against the aims and goals of the organization due to public opinion. The mafia also operates on the principle that “everybody gets his cut.” If you are willing to work with the mafia, you get part of the profits. The rewards should grow as the “business” expands, that is, as Marines get closer to achieving their objectives. This is also important for leaving a stable situation behind.

What artillery and air power are in 3^rd GW, cash is in the 4^th GW: you’re most useful supporting arm. Local Marine commanders must have a bottomless “slush fund” of cash to use at their discretion. Obviously, this cash cannot be subject to normal accounting procedures; most will, necessarily and properly, be used for bribes. Just as a commander needs to have a plan for how to use artillery and air power, he will now need a plan for employing his cash. If our most important supporting arm is cash, we cannot just throw it around.

That is why in Northern Ireland, British troops are not allowed to return fire unless they are actually taking casualties. The Israeli military historian Martin van Creveld argues that one reason the British have not lost in Northern Ireland is that they have taken more casualties than they have inflicted.

Clausewitz, writing on war between states, said that "War is the extension of politics by other means." In 4^th GW, the opposite is more likely to be true: politics can be a useful extension of war, one that gives us power but also is consistent with de-escalation. Nowhere more than in a post-state situations is the old saying "All politics is local" truer. When the state vanishes, everything becomes local. By understanding and leveraging local political balances, we may be able to attain many objectives without fighting.

A useful model here is the old British Northwest Frontier Agent. The Northwest Frontier was the lawless tribal area between British India and Afghanistan. In this area, the British government was represented by Frontier Agents. These were Englishmen, but they were also men who had lived in the area for a long time and knew the local players and politics well. Their actual power was small some cash and usually a company of Sepoys, Indian troops. But that small power was often enough to tilt the local political and military balance for or against a local chieftain. The local leaders were aware of this, and they usually found it worth their while to maintain good relations with the British so as to keep them on their side, or at least not actively intervening against them. Here again, the key is good local intelligence, especially political intelligence. By integrating with the local population, Marines can learn what the local political divisions and alignments are so that they can play on them. Just as with the Northwest Frontier Agents, Marines can leverage relationships to achieve their ends while avoiding fighting.

(Reference, Def. Rule # 7, 4^th Generation warfare)

Pro guerrilla / insurgency operations

Trans-national guerillas referred to as the great equalizer. Guerrilla warfare is for the morally strong and materially weak.

It is far more intellectual than a bayonet charge. Expansion phase volunteers trained as agitators (to stir up) and propagandists are sent out to enlist popular support. A process that is clandestine, methodical and progressive. May last for years.

(Reference, Planning summery Execution at the beginning of Fragment fighting facts)

Disassociates the population with government. They outline shared goals for guerrillas and population. The nation’s character/population must be favorable to the measures, motivations and cause. In early phases struggle must be purely defensive the guerrilla/volunteer most concentrate on his district. The threats of war most embrace a considerable extent of the nation. The war must first be carried out in the heart of the nation’s cities. The nation most be of broken and difficult nature, mountains, forest, marsh or dessert. Not easy for regulars to cut off support. Large areas of land between guerrillas and regulars laid waste by flood or fire (marsh or desert) so regulars will have to cross it. If regulars persist on staying there he will suffer in waist land. Ex; Anbar province in Iraq. Guerrillas should be concerned with the entire area that separates regulars from there bases. The war can not be decided by a single catastrophe. Vanity, the guerrilla who suffers from this is blinded by successes he winds up organizing action that he considers decisive and commits all resources. Stretching forces and influences to thin. Precipitous actions, leader loses patients suffers an attack of nerves. Dose not wait for everything to come together i.e. tries to solve problems by forcing actions. Prolonged operations are to be avoided hence preferred tactics to strategies. This means on a cell level not fighting to long for one thing. Be opportunist, attack everything and defend nothing. To gain terrain is no cause for joy, to lose it no cause for sorrow. Using death and destruction to spread panic far beyond points of physical impact. Targets are carefully picked to transmit psychological messages that shape public opinions and behavior. Design attack to take place where it will not bring with it an obvious or clear cut choice of response (Guerrillas often drive into town fire rockets thin leave). Targeting variety of victims at random times and places reduces the value of early warning. Novelty and surprises throw an enemy into consternation (dismay and confusion), but common incidents have a diminishing effect. The aim is to make security appear impotent and concessions seem preferable to chaos.

(Reference, Step # 2, leadership guidelines, Platoon cmdr, “there is a limit”)

Organization; cellular structure is used at village and district level. Province or regional structure might be more like traditional government. Run companies for arms and equipment manufacturing. Stirring committee cells similar to Apache war parties, assume many sizes they generally start with a multi purpose nucleus, leadership or Command element/cell, Combat or Assault element/cell and Support or Logistics element/cell. Cells seldom exceed 10 members. Some stagnate others under the supervision of highly skilled handlers mature as multi faceted syndicates with numerous off shoots. Movement grows by adding cells instead of expanding elements. Keeping cells small helps to simplify internal control and prevent compromise (compromise is exposure of covert operations, plans or members). Intermediaries aka cutouts normally separate chiefs from Indians and cells from each other. So that captured members furnish few leads. During any interactions/contact i.e. meetings, ideally all cutouts conceal there true I.D. At worst the cutout knows his or her one contact. Blind drop covert delivery of message with out contact between cutouts i.e. hiding messages under rocks etc. Compartmentalization/cell system based on need to know bases. Cells subdivide support tasks and perform them step by step in series. One element/cell might make purchases, than a second manufactures components, third completes assembly and fourth distributes. Fifth uses product. Publish papers in same way.

The shadow governors appointed by the Taliban in every province were reshuffled to break up emerging bureaucratic fiefdoms and re-energize the movement.

Size of Counterinsurgency Units Do not form large units it diminishes one of the principle strengths of an insurgency; namely, dispersal into small and more mobile targets.

Know the enemy’s tactics and routines; strict adherence to doctrine or even repetition of innovative tactics is a common characteristic of conventional forces. Insurgent forces can exploit this weakness. Such knowledge can provide advance warning of COIN forces intentions.

Open resistance flared so quickly that only two months after the Soviet invasion, (on the night of 23 February 1980) almost the entire population of Kabul climbed on their rooftops and chanted with one voice "God is Great".

In CIS young men, from well off families, in major cities are drafted much less often (less than 20 percent as often) as those from rural areas. The urban kids either have the money (several thousand dollars will get you listed as unfit for service) or the connections (to get it done for a favor). It's easier to just "disappear" in the city, while in rural areas, everybody knows your name. Moreover, the rural guys have higher unemployment to deal with, so a year or so in the military is seen as a rational economic choice. Moreover, more of the rural population is more patriotic, and see military service as, well, service. But it's no secret that the urban kids are avoiding their service, and contributing to the corruption everyone complains about.

Anti guerrilla / insurgence operations

Regulars in small wars must frequently adopt retrograde movements but these must be very deliberate as they always encourage the guerrilla. Squares and other defensive works are far more important then in regular warfare. Professional police work helps but informants are scares. Attempts to penetrate small hyperaware cells is a time consuming perilous occupation. Pay offs are limited unless plants are in C4I. Intimate relationships with local populations are to be avoided due to spies. Must not show favoritism to anyone either. Lawrence of Arabia’s strategy had three elements 1) Algebraically 2) Biological 3) Psychological. Over all goals, persuades population to cooperate with government. Militarily anti guerilla operations seldom succeed, unless a direct offensive roots out the infrastructure, separates local underground i.e. black market and the like from guerrillas and stops outside assistance. Kill the head, hearts and minds fallow, the separation of fish (Guerrillas) from the supporting sea (the people). As Mao once put it, mass deprivation of the agrarian infrastructure. Because the ability to furnish or deny food provides a useful lever.

Regimes which permit freedom of oral and written expression keep finger on the pulse of public. By allowing disgruntled citizens to air grievances, try to manage rather than resist change. Rally loyal factions leaving malcontents/Guerrillas with out support.

Two approaches to the press; defensive or offensive. In defensive, the objective is to minimize bad press by controlling the flow of news. This was typical of how militaries approached the press in 2^nd and 3^rd GW. The offensive approach seeks to use the press more than to control it, though some control measures may still be in place. Media is important at the mental i.e. moral level. In turn, the key to an offensive press strategy is openness. Few members of the press or media such as the internet will allow themselves to be so controlled as to present only the good news about Marines’ activities. Unless Marines are open about mistakes and failures, the press will devote most of their effort to ferreting them out. Worse, Marines will lack credibility when they have real good news to present. Paradoxically, openness is the key to controlling negative information when necessary. Sometimes, openness builds such a cooperative relationship with the media that they become part of your team and don’t want to report something that will really hurt you. At other times, you can expend the credibility you have built through a general policy of openness to deceive when deception is absolutely necessary. Just remember that when you do so, you may be using your only silver bullet. IMO the US mastered these techniques long ago i.e. the so called news is propaganda. And let’s not forget the Governments use of spokes/spooks persons. No freedom of speech in the ranks.

Promote understanding and contacts between artist, clergy, elites, journalists, labor leaders, military, political, teachers and students, with academic and cultural exchanges. Such as lectures, seminars, symposia, student exchange programs. The best way to deal with guerrillas is to preempt them through economical development and social reform. EX; Iraqi local tribes paid to protect pipelines. Clans providing security for convoys going through FATA.

Deterrence that eliminates causes instead of symptoms is particularly illusive. Political economic and social reforms which deflate genuine grievances help eradicate guerrillas by convincing a populist majority that government programs are preferred to the guerrilla’s promises. Reforms that reapportion influence and provide equal opportunity for all may alleviate or eliminate guerrilla causes. If policy makers take appropriate steps early enough and avoid replacing one set of problems with others. Those techniques AKA winning hearts and minds however are less beneficial as a counter insurgency tool i.e. meaning Guerrillas are a foreign movement. Or if guerrillas are opposing a long time despised government. Negotiated compromise in such cases is possible but improbable. Rhetoric by officials increases guerrilla prestige government must match words with will and means. Negotiated compromise that offers some satisfaction to guerrillas customarily is an ultimatum, although guerrillas may approve of the process since it publicizes there purpose and divest them with status equal to beleaguered government. They will then share blame if blood shed continues. Consequently to not invite them relinquishes privilege and shared blame. Guerrilla motivations normally are to prevent open promises. Normally accept few rewards short of total success and publicized victory.

U.S. foreign policy equals Christian beliefs “we not only have the right but the obligation to spread our ways. Foreigners don’t know the benefits we have been blest with.” U.S. government’s cover i.e. message or revealed truth, to the public “we're going to help rescue these people”. IMO when politics is spun too much, population turns to religion so government must too. U.S. also anti communist vs. economical interest. Even if the opposition leader is not communist, what if leader is over thrown by someone who is. Not like U.K. or France, flat out up front explanation that it’s in our nation’s economic or security interest.

Example from Navy Times 3/21/11, “but the Western allies have sent mixed signals over their vision for the end game of their intervention in Libya. France has taken the most aggressive tone, with its U.N. ambassador saying the ultimate goal was to get rid of Gadhafi. But the top U.S. military officer took a more cautious stance, reflecting American worries about getting dragged deeper into the conflict”. Newjarheaddean and this with President Obama saying a week or so before the U.N. resolution 1973 that Gadhafi must go. But now his administration says that was just a suggestion i.e. as in, just in case Gadhafi had not thought about it etc.

Lessens learned by other nations witnessing U.S. supported coups. The CIA will use all means available to wreak target government. Universities, science, media, industry, trade, religion. Allies are reluctant to work with U.S. agents do to tight restrictions, also legal limitations and U.S. leaks that compromise their sources magnify difficulties. Tactical deterrence dilemmas. Israel’s swift and sure punishment vs. British approach which has kept better faith with humane principles and tactics. Threats can be constituted by phone call, visit to nation by guerrilla members or drop in/walk in informant.

"Hama model." Refers to what Syrian did when the Moslem Brotherhood, rebelled in 1982. On February 2, 1982, the Syrian Army was deployed into the area surrounding Hama. Within three weeks, the Syrian Army had completely devastated the city of Hama, resulting in the deaths of between 10,000 and 25,000 people. The use of heavy artillery, armored forces and possibly poison gas resulted in large-scale destruction and an end to the Moslem Brotherhood’s desires to overthrow the Baath Party. After the operation was finished, one surviving citizen of Hama stated, “We don’t do politics here anymore, we just do religion.” The results of the destruction of Hama were clear to the survivors. As the June 20, 2000 Christian Science Monitor wrote, “Syria has been vilified in the West for the atrocities at Hama. But many Syrians, including a Sunni merchant class that has thrived under Alawite rule, also note that the result has been years of stability.” What distinguishes the Hama model is overwhelming firepower and force, deliberately used to create massive casualties and destruction, in an action that is over fast. Speed is of the essence to the Hama model. The objective is to get it over with so fast that the effect desired locally is achieved before anyone else has time to react or, ideally, even to notice what is going on. If a Hama type operation is allowed to drag out, it will turn into a disaster on the moral level. It might become an option if a WMD were used against us on our own soil. The main reason we need to identify the Hama model is to note a serious danger i.e. it is easy, but fatal, to choose a course that lies between the Hama model and the de-escalation model. Such a course inevitably results in defeat, because of the power of weakness. Historian Martin van Creveld compares a state military that, with its vast superiority in lethality, continually turns its firepower on poorly equipped opponents to an adult who administers a prolonged, violent beating to a child in a public place. Regardless of how bad the child has been, every observer sympathizes with the child. That is why the rule for the Hama model is that the violence must be over fast. Any attempt at a compromise between the two models results in prolonged violence that is fatal.

MCA June 2009; Accept counterinsurgency as a political activity. An insurgency has political goals. Violence is but one element of power an insurgent movement asserts to achieve its objectives. As conditions change and counterinsurgents gain and maintain security, one can expect that political goals of insurgent movements will remain, though the strategies and tactics to achieve those goals will change. Oftentimes enemy efforts to achieve objectives will take place in the legitimate realm of local, provincial, and national politics. Thus, it is critical that companies learn and track the political situation in their battlespace as best as possible. Learn the political environment and attempt to understand agendas and alliances. How do changes in local political power influence the local security environment, and how will various insurgents take advantage of new opportunities? Some answers will come from the multiple engagements companies will have with the population and local leaders. Each conversation can be a piece to the political puzzle leading to indications and warnings of violence due to political change. The CLIC will need to assist the commander in compiling engagement reports and help put the pieces of the political puzzle together for the company’s battlespace.

Weighting the main effort. Each company assigned battlespace within the battalion’s area of operations will be confronted with unique human terrain that may or may not interrelate with adjacent villages and tribal areas. Assuming the battalion assigns battlespace to all four of its maneuver companies, an intelligence section without CLICs would be faced with collecting and analyzing information for four distinct and disparate areas. This is a tall order even for a regimental S–2 section, let alone that of a battalion. Consequently, the battalion commander must identify a main effort to ensure that the battalion intelligence section is focusing its limited resources on those areas that require the most attention to achieve the battalion commander’s objectives. For the companies that are not the main effort, the necessity for a top quality CLIC will become critical. With the bulk of the battalion intelligence resources focused elsewhere, CLICs will need to provide their company commander with the information management of collection efforts and limited analysis to maintain an understanding of the battlespace.

The CLIC team and the commander. The experiences of most infantry battalions reveal one well-known truism: the effort the company commander places on company-level intelligence is correlated/connected to the amount of actionable intelligence the company produces i.e. little attention to intelligence collection; the company will have little effect on the battlespace. Ultimately, the CLIC the commander builds is a direct reflection of the value he places on understanding and influencing his battlespace.

If a battalion is operating in a distributed environment, the companies will never be satisfied with the level of battalion level intelligence support. Only the company commander and his CLIC will focus their full efforts within the area of operations that is most critical to the company’s success. One of the most influential decisions a company commander makes is the selection of the CLIC Marines. As the CLIC is sourced “out of hide,” some commanders may want to shortchange the quality of personnel. This choice may be “pennywise but pound foolish” and result in a “what did these guys do for me” reflection later. Commanders must be willing to cut into muscle a stronger and more competent CLIC will result in a greater gain for the company than the cumulative loss felt by the squads. The counterinsurgent theorist, David Kilcullen, articulated this best, “Put the smartest soldiers in the [CLIC]. You will have one less rifle squad: but the [CLIC] will pay for itself in lives and effort saved. Who, then, are the right Marines? Successful CLICs possess attributes that include analytical ability, prior operational deployment, language training, and computer skills. Curiosity, “street smarts,” and effective written and oral communication.

A guerrilla war is not a war of technology versus peasantry. Rather, it is a contest of endurance and national will. The side with the greatest moral commitment (ideological, religious or patriotic) will hold the ground at the end of the conflict. Battlefield victory can be almost irrelevant, since victory is often determined by morale, obstinacy and survival. Lessons learned from this conflict were gathered by both sides. Whatever else these lessons may show, the most fundamental of them is that no army, however sophisticated, well trained, materially rich, numerically overwhelming and ruthless, can succeed on the battlefield if it is not psychologically fit and motivated for the fight. The force, however destitute in material advantages and numbers, which can rely on the moral qualities of a strong faith, stubborn determination, individualism and unending patience will always be the winner. These may not be the optimum qualities always found in the armies of western democracies.

The Soviet concept for military occupation of Afghanistan was based on the following:

Stabilizing the country by garrisoning the main routes, major cities, airbases and logistics

Sites; relieving the Afghan government forces of garrison duties and pushing them into the

Countryside to battle the resistance; providing logistic, air, artillery and intelligence support to the Afghan forces; providing minimum interface between the Soviet occupation forces and the local Populace; Accepting minimal Soviet casualties; and, Strengthening the Afghan forces, so once the resistance was defeated, the Soviet Army could be withdrawn.

It proved a bloody experience in which the Soviet Union reportedly killed 1.3 million people and forced five and a half million Afghans (a third of the prewar population) to leave the country as refugees. Another two million Afghans were forced to migrate within the country. The countryside is ravaged and littered with mines.

Battalion and regimental‐level combat was fought primarily in the mountains against separate detachments of mujahideen [insurgents]. The war was fought under conditions where the enemy lacked any aviation capabilities, but had modern air defense systems and modern mines. A lack of front lines and advances along varied axes (which were not mutually supporting) characterized the decisive actions of the opposing sides as they attempted to seize the initiative and gain control over certain territories.

The Soviet forces encountered several unique combat characteristics which necessitated that they adopt more effective methods for combating guerrilla forces of mujahideen. The principal types of combat included: raids; blocking off areas where the enemy was located prior to searching out and destroying guerrilla forces; and the simultaneous attack on several groups of the enemy located at various depths and locations. The specific combat conditions influenced the way in which the advance through mountains and inhabited areas was conducted; led to a change in air assault tactics; changed the methods of conducting marches and providing convoy security; and caused a change in the tactics of organizing and conducting ambushes. One of the fundamental methods for fulfilling combat missions was to block off a region in which guerrilla forces were located and then to thoroughly comb the region to find and destroy the mujahideen. Coordination between the blocking and combing forces, their bronegruppa, artillery and aviation; the application of military cunning and the application of reasoned initiatives; However, firepower is not an absolute substitute for maneuver and close combat. The Soviets chose to expend massive firepower in order to save Soviet lives and to compensate for their lack of infantry. It was an expensive, indiscriminate and, probably, ineffective practice. The Soviet Army does not push on despite heavy casualties. They transition to the defense after moderate casualties and call for fire support.

The Soviets adopted bounding overwatch in this vignette and apparently throughout the Afghanistan War. Bounding overwatch was not in the European battle book since it slowed down movement tempo. However, bounding overwatch is essential when moving over rough terrain or when your enemy is not totally occupied with your artillery and air strikes.

The decentralized nature of the resistance, factionalism and lack of unified command were both a Mujahideen strength and weakness.

First of all Mujahideen groups generally operated on their home turf. Acting outside their home turf could have unfavorable political and support ramifications. Secondly, the Mujahideen wanted to harass their enemy as close to the capital as possible for political and propaganda reasons. Attacks at the gates of Kabul were more significant than attacks further out.

Mujahideen and their weapons. The DRA had traveling propaganda/civil affairs teams which provided entertainment, medical treatment and pro‐regime propaganda throughout Afghanistan.

The Mujahideen conducted ambushes for harassment or for spoils. Often, harassing ambushes were small‐scale ambushes which would only fire a few rounds into the convoy to destroy or damage some vehicles. Then the ambushers would withdraw without attempting to loot the column before the convoy commander could react. Ambushes conducted for spoils (weapons, ammunition, food, clothing and other military supplies) were normally conducted by larger forces who could maintain their positions for up to an hour.

The Mujahideen understood that guerrilla war is a contest of endurance and national will. Battlefield victory is almost irrelevant, provided that the guerrilla survives to fight the next of a thousand battles before passing the torch to his children. The Mujahideen did not necessarily expect to win this war but fought because it was the right thing to do – it was a religious and national obligation. They accepted an asymmetry of casualties which eventually,

but unexpectedly, led to the Soviet withdrawal. In many respects, the tactics of the Anglo‐afghan Wars (1839, 1852, 1878‐1880, 1919) still applied. Technology has added range and accuracy, but the terrain still dictates tactics and

the Mujahideen were quite comfortable applying their time‐honored tactics against a modern foe.

Tactical innovation occurs only where tactical innovation is required and the Mujahideen eventually found ways to work around the problem technology. Where innovation was not required, the Mujahideen stayed with the tried and true. Thus the basic Mujahideen ambush and pursuit were little changed from last century whereas their actions against an air assault or a fortified security post were quickly developed out of necessity.

Technology can provide advantages but it is not decisive in this type of war. Soviet smart bombs had a decided impact when an appropriate target set could be identified. U.S. supplied, shoulder fired Stinger air defense missiles, in the hands of the Mujahideen, created a great deal of consternation and led to a dramatic change in Soviet air tactics. Neither system, however, was a war winner. The Soviet equipment was designed for a different war on different terrain. It failed to function optimally in the mountains and deserts of Afghanistan. The Kalashnikov

assault rifle was not always better than the World War I designed British bolt action Enfield rifle. The Enfield shot further accurately and would penetrate flak jackets designed to stop Kalashnikov bullets.

Mujahedeen Strengths:

Familiarity with the terrain

Tactical mobility

Ability to achieve surprise i.e. blind in with locals.

Ability to operate at night

Rugged and highly motivated fighters

Sanctuaries in Pakistan and Iran.

No mention of all the patches giving info to guerrillas with access to the wild wild west LOL internet that could be used in syops. Has that not been a problem with this well equipped organized al-queda types.

Statement Information more from the bottom up i.e. squad leader is going to know area better than battalion cmdr. IMO this has been mentioned on all kinds of sites but only whispered if at all on CNN.

Stopped on page 19

Note from TDG/MCA

As soon as the Marines leave the area the enemy will go door to door spreading his propaganda

The enemy will also use local imams to spread the word from minarets and Friday prayer.

Propaganda on the Internet or posters/graffiti on walls.

Conduct sensitive site exploitation,

The key is to deny the enemy access to terrain until, at a minimum, after you have put out your message.

Also see Terms under (s) for SALTA

End of TDG/MCA

False flag operations are covert operations designed to deceive the public in such a way that the operations appear as though they are being carried out by other entities. The name is derived from the military concept of flying false colors; that is, flying the flag of a country other than one's own. False flag operations are not limited to war and counter-insurgency operations, and can be used in peace-time.

You also ask him to let the EPWs go home after their wounds are sufficiently healed. They will carry your request for a meeting to arrange a cease-fire, and their release itself will send a peaceful message to whatever clan they come from.

Battle of Khafji

At one point in the battle, the Saudis saw Iraqi soldiers on top of a water tower. Not wishing to blow up the tower, the Saudis fired a TOW, blew the ladder off the tower and left the Iraqis stranded until the end of the battle."

In Lebanon Marines firing at rock out croppings above Hezbollah rocket firing positions. Due to the fact they did not have permission to fire on the enemy.

STEP # 4

Rehearsal: Term ROC drills, Rehearsal of concept. This is going over mission. Walk through, talk through, and then go through everything silently. Leader should ask if anyone has questions, comments or complaints. Remember the groups combined years of experience is greater then yours. If you decide to reject a member’s idea, explain why. This builds trust when time is not available to explain. Your purpose is to analyze alternatives. Assets are evaluated modifications and options are considered. Thus critically analyze foe to know the estimates for gain and loss. Stimulate them to know the patterns of their movements and stoppages. Determine their dispositions of force, probe them to know where they have excess or insufficiency. If it is formless then even the deepest spy cannot discern or the wise make plans against it. EX; Cellular system. Analyses of results (to be completed after action has been taken on decisions). Also review of after action reports from similar operations.

STEP# 5

Implement: Carry out the mission.

From MCA magizine; The Execution (phase “E” of the PDEA cycle) of LI operations follows a sub-cycle that can be divided into four steps: dispersion, orientation, concentration, and action (DOCA). Dispersion provides LI with its main tool, survivability. Orientation comprises the execution of shaping actions to enable the later concentration of the main effort in order to hit the enemy’s center of gravity (COG). This step requires an aggressive use of reconnaissance in order to hit the COG by pulling the main effort through them. The Concentration step allows LI to transform the small combat power of multiple, isolated elements, into one or more powerful thrusts. The Action is led by reconnaissance elements, which drags the main effort and available supporting fires towards the COG. Finally, a new and rapid dispersion ends the sub-cycle, facilitating the breaking of contact and rendering enemy counteraction ineffective.

Note there is a PDCA cycle too i.e. problem faced problem solved.

STEP# 6

Supervise: Ensure that you are available for discussion as work progresses. Adequate guidance eliminates wasted effort and time. During inspections and with reports to the commander the staff officer is not a talebearer. Staff officers inform subordinate commanders of their findings, discuss it with them and inform them of the exact nature of the report to be made to the Cmdr. A staff visit has the essential purpose of coordination, teamwork, and mutual understanding between the Cmdr. and his staff also between the staff and subordinate commanders. Such visits may uncover misunderstandings and provide corrections before becoming serious and requiring more time and effort. Just as the oral word maybe misunderstood, the written word is not always clear, however carefully it is prepared.

(Reference, Leadership guidelines, A staff officer, in bold print and Company cmdr 2inC)

NO ONE WINS, THIS IS FORGOTTEN. WARS ARE EASY TO START EXPENSIVE TO CONTINUE, DIFFICULT TO STOP. OFTEN BEGIN WHEN SOMEONE FEELS VICTORY IS ASSURED. THE FIGHT CONTINUES LARGELY BECAUSE OF NATIONAL AND PERSONAL PRIDE. WARS END WHEN ONE OR BOTH SIDES ARE DEVASTATED, DEMORALIZED OR RARELY SUDDENLY ENLIGHTEN BY THE ABSURDITY OF IT ALL.

It is the nature of war that what is beneficial to you is detrimental to the enemy and what is of service to them hurts you. Therefore, never do or omit doing anything as a consequence of Foe’s actions. Consult your own interest only, you depart from this interest whenever you imitate such measures as Foe pursues for their benefit.

DEFENSE

Note these rules have been written from the perspective of a unit being on patrol and arriving at an objective that might be a new FOB site.

1) Pass by circle back,

That is as you arrive at objective you fly, drive, walk etc right by. So you can check the situation out, anyone or thing there, entries, exits you plan on using. Gives you chance to spot anyone circling back with you that might have been fallowing. Enemy will wonder any time you pass them if you’re going to circle back. This causes them to hunker down waist time, waiting for your return.

2) Pause before interring,

This is right at entrances. You’re waiting, watching, lessoning for sights and sounds of enemy activity. Also makes foe waiting in ambush think you’re suspicious about something, may make them move to soon. With large area or multi story building 10-15 minutes. Small room 20- 30 seconds. History has shown that if any activity is ongoing, you should hear or see something within the time periods suggested. Just inside subterranean entries 10-15 minutes to check air. With returning to bases i.e. FOBs there may have been a coup while your unit was on patrol. Lastly this gives you time to perform next rule.

Note, check go TWA U and Me. Note i.e. whenever I’m going or gone this is your instructions i.e. take what action, you and me

3) Bobby trap entries,

This could be a trail, path, road, river used to inter an area or hole, window, door for rooms or buildings. This is in case your being fallowed or planning on staying in area for a while. Or you can post guard, this covers your back and insures safe exit, if you choose to brake the don’t back track rule (i.e. #10 in PCP). With roads etc. use two deferent colors of flares for trip wires, to indicate direction of foe who set them off. Ex; approach from east would trip yellow flare. Do not divide duties with demolitions: This is to avoid the “I thought you did it” problem. IEDs designed to defeat a specific target, create an attitude of uncertainty and suspicion, in effect lowering morale and inducing a degree of caution that restricts and slows movement. They are unique because the builder has improvised with materials at hand. They generally become more difficult to detect and defuse as builders become more sophisticated. Builder will usually mark area in some way. To keep Comrades (tungzai) from being injured. You can search areas after finding IEDs to learn signs. Direction that wire is twisted can indicate if builder is left or right handed. IEDs share a common set of components 1) An initiation system. Or fuse; use surgical tubing with many tiny holes like yard soaker to limit smoke. Fast fuse Vs slow fuse burning time, 90 Vs 1cm. per second respectively. Always check fuse with test section. Ropes can be used for fuses. (Note most IEDs are victim-initiated/activated). EOD it requires a truly Machiavellian frame of mind. You insert mercury tremblers on door frames and contact switches under toilet seats. Acid time pencils and or plastic straws filled with acid and some sort of stopper/blug that acid would eventually eat though. Time-delay, Rubber strap rapping i.e. banding/binding Grenade spoons, placed in can of petrol bands dissolve. Or rapping cloth around grenade so to hold spoon until it falls to ground and rolls a few times. With vehicles heat activated bombs. Voice activated recorders as detonation device. Delay action fuses give you time to leave area. (Remote or command architectures), cordless phone, radio control device similar to the type used to fly model planes. Mobile platform hinders tracing or triangulation. Note blimp or balloon drifting with wind, signal would initiate IED upon and or timed with arrival. It could be a communication transmission (I-COM) in local area that sets off the IED. Note while the previous random ignition methods are possible these techniques IMO are for the armatures the pros make every IED count i.e. not only hitting the vehicle they target but the most venerable point. Trigger devices designed to work as close as 75’. Motion detector mechanism shown being used with IED. Close pen shown on leg of couch IMO with wires to touch when stick pulled from between close pen peaces i.e. out of that round whole. Or maybe it was like one of those bank teller panic buttons.

Note on Iraqi Guerrilla; he had a black briefcase with Japanese markings, he flicks a switch on its side. He claims that the device is similar to those used by U.S. troops to block cellular signals around IEDs and disable bombs wired to detonate with a cell phone call. He invites people in the room to try to use their cell phones. None of us can get a signal. I’ve jammed them he says. But his own phone a cheap Nokia shows a full strength signal. “I made a few small changes inside. It took me just one day to figure it out”. He said. Most mid size mines equipment with MAD sensors. Sensitizing antitank (AT) mines. On some nonmetallic AT mines, the pressure plate spring is replaced to reduce the pressure required to initiate the mine. Average Infantry Marine’s weight produces 2-10 lbs per square inch. In snow mines must be more sensitive to pressure since weight is distributed more evenly over snowshoes, skies and sleds. Tripwires placed higher than would normally be the case, Ex; at 46 cm height in case of heavy snow. IFV antenna stud up very high tripwires where placed between tree tops, so antenna would hit and trigger IED. Self positioning pole / trip wire at entrance anti prep fire explosion i.e. the prep explosion causes deployment of the pole attached to the trip wire. Static electricity Can detonate devices. It is prevalent in desert due to atmospheric dryness and especially under windy conditions. Discovery channel, dust storms of the 1930s caused electrical charges from metal objects. Static electricity continues to build as wind and sand make contact with objects. Some charges high enough to knock a man down and out. With helicopters and any time slings or tethers are being used. Magnified by different electrical potential between similar or dissimilar materials. Discharge when objects are brought near each other or contact is made. Tape all sharp edges tip of antennas this reduces wind caused static electricity. Also if flammable gases are present. In winter with snow and ice covering ground i.e. lack of grounding. Marines should always ground themselves. Conduit contact between Marines and soil established or metal circuit or ground cable picket or crow bar between fuel tank/pump and vehicle before and during fueling. Turn off all switches. Disconnect all electrical connections.

Use securing stakes for det cord/blasting caps; this is securing them by rapping cord around stake in ground numerous times to provide excess play. So, if anyone stumbles over it, less chance of being disconnected. In snow mines must be supported, snow can be tamped, frozen by pouring water on it or mine placed on planks, some sort of boards placed under. Cardboard/plastic placed over mine, to protect it from moisture, freezing moving parts. Paint cardboard and or mine white, just in case snow is blown away or melts. Do not use vegetation form immediate area of mine or traps to camouflage them. Use snow mud or grease to cover tip or ends of freshly cut or broken branches. 2) Detonator aka booster. Term train, ignition det and explosion, power supply for detonator. Ex. motor cycle battery. 3) Explosives A typical suicide bomber uses 25 lb (11 kg). (UXO unexploded ordnance) PE4 explosives, artillery rounds, in Iraq most common munitions are 122 mm. A hole is drilled in shipping cap with an electric blasting cap inserted. Tamped or covered explosives increases effectiveness and reduces debris. All explosives may be combined with biological or chemical toxins or radiological material. Corrosive chemicals mentioned as being used in IEDs. Also rust mixed with explosive to increase oxygen thus combustion. An explosive placed in water greatly magnifies shock waves. Note maybe secret behind FAE technology. Glass containers for setting fuel air explosion. Burst/blast slower burning charge makes for larger shock wave in caves. Anti personal mines, some butterfly designed to glide or spiral to ground small as palm, green and tan in color others use parachutes to reduce damage i.e. malfunctions, alt sensor to minimize exposure. Antitank CBU 7 grams of explosives. Self destruction devices 10% failure rate. Robotic IMS mines with own sensors and computer able to sense, track and attack. Track buster 2-5 lbs, Eagles fire ball, old IED. TNT ¼, ½ and 1 LBS blocks. C4 many different size blocks. Shape charges two sizes US army 15lbs M2A3 and 40lbs M3A3, M3A3 most likely used in MOUT, penetrates 5’ reinforced concrete, hole tapers 5ft-2ft. Satchel un-tamped 3 ft concrete wall. Satchel charges two standard types M183 and M37 both come in carry bag. With detonation device and blasting cords each weigh 20 lbs. m183 16 individual 1 ¼ lbs. blocks. Can be used separately too. Charges standard type is a 43lbs cylinder of ammonium nitrate. Do not have shattering effect of block TNT or C4 which is used in deliberate demolition.

4) Container. Three categories of employment techniques: A) Package Pole can be used to place charges when you are under fire or tided to rope and pulled into place. IED hidden in animal corps, or human cadavers. Dumped on the streets and detonated when patrol stops for an inspection. “They know that we want just leave a body to rot in the street. They are counting on us to do the right thing, and then hitting us when we do”. With area check apparent road repairs, near construction material, instances of what appeared to be generators. Newly constructed room, buildings, conduit, poles/pipes any moveable or useable object even near litter. Buildings are excellent sites for booby trap warfare. Likely locations are restrictive areas like doorways, windows, hallways, staircases, and avenues of approach that are typically used. Any remaining furniture or household objects will have to be checked. Snipers used to force Marines towards IEDs, hidden in places where the Marines might take cover. B) Vehicles vehicle-borne (VBIEDs), donkey drawn carts, and ambulances. Using multiple vehicles. In such instances, the lead vehicle is used as a decoy or barrier buster. In Vietnam motorcycles were rigged with explosives and abandoned.

C) Suicide bombers. Pros: Martyrs deliberately orchestrate the circumstances around death to further increase expectations of future attacks, suggest no threat can deter. Can also make last minute adjustments, Ex. Martyr allowing himself to be run over, in order to place bomb beneath target person. No escape plan or rescue necessary. Secondary task Ex; information gathering immediately before attack. (Could be recorded by webcam on martyr) Suicide vests with explosives and ball bearing sewn into the interior.

(Reference, Planning step # 1, types of campaigns, Destructive, suicide mission vs suicide attack)

Coupling / Daisy chaining linking one mine or explosive device to another, with trip wire or detonating cord. When the first device is detonated, it also detonates the linked explosives. Often used to defeat countermeasures, such as mine rollers. The roller will pass over the initial, non-fused or deeper device and set off the second fused or shallow device. This in turn detonates the passed over device underneath the clearing vehicle or located at road side. When the linked devices are shaped charged, they can have narrow but long, kill zone. Hoax / fake IED linked to real. Boosting. Buried explosives are stacked on top of one another. The one buried deepest from the surface is fused. Fusing or wiring w/metallic material only the deepest ordnance helps reduce detection by metal detectors. A pressure fused AP mine can be placed on the top of an AT mine. Mines 1 ton of mines to cover 100 m of front 3-4 man hrs. Per ton to emplace. 10 man hrs per ton to remove. Invisible destruction this is destroying enemy’s equipment or kit without operator’s knowledge until operator intends to use it. This foils your foe’s immediate plans and delays re-supply. Directed at what enemy lacks the most or must bring from a far. Also used to complement other actions, example destroying extinguishers before fire. This is also molding look alike items, all the weathering none of the functions. You might wish to take actual items etc. another example; we do not interrupt weapons smuggling operations. We don't try to capture or destroy those weapons. Instead, one of our Guardsmen knew of some stuff we could spray on their ammunition that they would not readily notice but would cause it to jam in the weapon. We sneak in and spray their ammo stocks, then during firing their weapons don't work. That really undercuts their morale. Arson incendiary devices easy to disguise or hide. Fires are used to draw crowds. Remember smoke warns for miles. Smoke from burning vegetation lighter, structure darker, and vehicle smoke is black. Leaks vs. burning or blowing up fuel tanks. Boats sank, bridges, disassembled or key parts of structure removed to weaken. Best to destroy bridges close to banks. Wire over high tension cables to short out grids. Taping glass before braking reduces debris and noise. Visine gets the red out and knocks your ass out i.e. when mixed in food drinks etc. 70 mg of pure nicotine the equivalent to three cigarettes will kill with in 24 hours if eaten. Tips for individuals: Avoid souvenir taking. Keep low profile, avoid publicity. Vary the way you dress, ensure dress, conduct and mannerisms do not attract attention. Blend in with crowds, local environment. Travel where local inhabitants go, the old when in Rome. Stay away from civil disturbances or demonstrations. Bombers making scene as if sick or fighting to draw crowds. Avoid deserted streets. Crossing Street can mean difference between walking by men sipping tea and playing dominos or an attack. Do not go out in big groups, never travel alone. Send only number of Marines needed, not 3 or 4 if 1 or 2 can do task. If walking go to ground feet in direction of blast. When walking up steps, place first foot on second step and then every 3^rd step. Let friends know where you are going. Head set used as a counter to cell phone bomb. Avoid giving out personal information over phone. Also lines in stores, schedules, arriving with timed appointments. (Iraqi recruits holding camps, maze walls for lines as interviewed). Blending in with locals in Middle East not shaving at least have a mustache. Other signs of foreigners in the Middle East wrong accent, wearing a seatbelt, reading a book while traveling in car. Residents in neighborhood pointing out strangers.

Vehicle check points.

VCPs are of little use after 20 minutes. Enemy makes use of point men in vehicles equipped with cell phone. Blind stops stopping traffic with concealed, ride along Marines. Helicopter in Marines, finish troops conduct search of fallowing and passing vehicles. Block or search those trying to turn around. Motorcycles watch passengers for attack or assisting driver with duties. Marines should be equipped with pistols. US using green dazzler lasers to blind occupants of vehicles. VCP phases, first exterior, snipers or spotters with optical aids to scan vehicles while they wait in lines. Second approach to vehicle look underneath, engine most likely location of devises, interior, strong smells of deodorants might be concealing odors of explosives. Signs of V/C in Vietnam at check points; a man with a shipping license from a local to far away. A women with to heavy of a load for her single sampan or distance she is traveling. All passengers are made to exit. Keep driver with you. Question driver, about location of the spare tire, if driver dose not know answer, this may indicate it’s not his car. Occupants of vehicle questioned about friends, relatives, and business in area of stop. All doors, hood, trunk, opened. All packages removed opened and searched. Driving around with AK- 47 is illegal in Iraq.

(Reference, COE, Over all tips, “Plum card”)

Note: with Airport security. Do not lock you checked luggage, use cable or zip ties. Do not pack film in checked luggage it can be damaged. No food or drinks in checked luggage. Wrap gifts at destination. Put personal items tooth brushes etc. in clear plastic so screeners won’t have to touch. Place foot wear at top of contents of checked. With unchecked Do not stack books spread them out. Put scissors, pocket knifes, sharp items in unchecked. Note: Some of the fallowing rules apply to rooms too. Began at engine, checking near power sources, become familiar with vehicle parts especially engine and under side, to make it easier to spot irregularities. Watch for disturbed dust, grease smudges or recently cleaned areas. Check for scratches tool marks on or near windows door jams, trunks or hood release. Watch for extra wires running from lights, horns. Check cut or broken wires before reconnecting or restoring power and flipping switches. Do not cut wires do to tension release sit ups. (This is when spring has been used to pull pens etc. in opposite direction when wire is cut). View inside from outside before interring or opening. Ex; with vehicles tail lights removed to view inside of trunk. Also holes can be drilled. Work from lowest level up. Bombs are often placed on floor so shrapnel rips through vital arteries in legs, and organs in lower abdominal area. Test doors or items for heat or high temperatures using the back of your hand, use a zig-zag pattern. Check front and back seats. Check glove compartments feel setbacks, door panels, headliners spare tire compartment. Watch for false partitions in gas tanks and other reservoirs. Probe with wire, push rods through grain cargo. Tail pipes, fuel doors on same side. License plate numbers in some nations indicate the cars make, model, color. If you are aware might tip you off to a stolen vehicle. With approaches to your own vehicle. Check for items under tires in path you will take. Make sure all still locked secure. Do not adjust seats or mirrors without checking to see if they have been moved. Note positions marked. Car finders that honk horns, flash lights also remote starters, foil initiation mechanisms, by producing electrical current before ignition switch turned. Windows rolled down; hatches cracked with the latch pin in place, reduces air pressure i.e. permits dispersion of the percussion effects minimizing damage. Other precautions to take, sandbagging vehicle floors using fine grain materials, large particles become missiles. Riding on top of armored vehicles when the tactical situation permits. Keep arms and legs inside vehicle. Time of attacks in Iraq, 2100-0300 hrs. Center and stern of patrols attack most. Vehicles traveling in pairs a must. Avoid stop lights. Avoiding frequent traffic jams, you never know who’s next to you. Flashing your IR signals than red lights, as clearance for others to approach. Carpooling reduces single occupant car bombs. Iraqi markets no vehicle traffic during day time. Barricades removed at night so deliveries can be made. Direction of traffic changed daily. Attacks from over passes, Marines blocking off traffic as vehicles pass under bridge. Ambushes also located under bridges and in tunnels, just after bend in the road, or over hill or at low point. Where the shoulder of road is none negotiable, do to steepness of slope, thickness of vegetation or water. If shoulder is negotiable place mines on road sides where vehicles may go around or pull over. When placing cable to snag vehicle it is placed at 30 degrees angle, to direct vehicle off road and to location you are ready to capture. If cable is placed strait across road it may snap, at best the vehicle is stopped in middle of the road, out in the open where fallow on vehicles can see something is wrong up a head. Use cutting aid for your vehicle as anti decapitation. This is a bar welded to front of vehicle. Preparing tree to block road, bark removed placed back after 2/3 cut on trunk. Vehicles having to wait until town buildings burned out before traveling through. Night movements well require more coordination and stain drivers more. More than 50 cm of snow affects vehicle performance and they well use more fuel. Mountains more mines in narrow gaps between positions in more of an irregular pattern than in regular warfare. Ex; Korea due to terrain restrictions, 80 mines were used per tank lost.

Immediate action drills (IAD) term High Profile Convoy (HPC). Lights, speed, guns showing. LPC (low etc.) in cognitoe L or H patrols to? Curfews 9:00 PM -8:00 AM. With IADs emphasize simplicity aggressiveness and speed. Put out smoke ASAP. Steering wheels of disabled vehicles should be turned and tied in place to direct vehicle off road. Gear shift put in neutral. Crew covers passengers exit, then passengers cover crew exit. Try to exit any way you can, if possible avoid normal exits, like tailgate, ramp doors etc. Note vehicle cab designed so seats removable for shields. Marines in kill zones should hitch ride on any passing vehicle. Attack enemy from flank or stern after base of fire establish. Marines fallowing tank tracks and equipment usually are a magnet for fire must keep distance. Hummers levels of armor 1, 2, & 3. Level 1) Factory manufactured, 360 degrees of protection top /bottom etc. Lower center of gravity. 450 manufactured per mouth. Level 2) Equipped with only projectile resistant glass. Add on commercially manufactured armor. Less top bottom. Level 3) Not manufactured armor just add on steel plating. Driving without proper training, operators of level 1 and other heavy vehicles are causing and having more traffic accidents. Need to be retrained. Heavier vehicles means brakes over heating quicker especially in mountain terrain with lots of slopes. Observation dead space for drivers in cars 15-30 feet, RV 30-40, truck 45 shorter drivers 55. Dead space T-62 observation for driver’s 50 stern 40 flanks weapons dead space 70 for 360 degrees.

Note on car bomb tactic of unit steeling car right around corner from objective all members converging on alley each with a piece of the bomb and a part to play, putting it all together while driver says prayer then drives car right around corner to objective i.e. there is no time to react to counter this.

MRE bomb this is using heat tab or tobacco sauce mixed with water inside some kind of container like water bottle or canteen. Note with canteen the pressure will split a crack or hole in canteen not covering any area with contents. You can google it up on video, it may be okay as a diversionary tactic. It can take up to one minute in canteen.

Doorway threshold rigged to go off only with the weight of two on plate at once.

Inspect entrance ways like hatches, portholes, gates etc. to make sure you will not be trapped inside area once you inter. Like door not having a door knob on inside or something falling or sliding over to block the entrance. You may want to block a door open with something.

(Reference, appendix DEF. rule # 3.)

4) Position main weapons:

This is most effective weapon located in most advantageous point or centrally located to allow access to multiple points, to cover points of interest, avenues and passages. (NOTE on a personal basis this could be placing weapon in a central hallway of a house, so someone could get to it and make their way to any area or room). If more than one weapon available do not bunch them up. Concentrate fire power not weapons. Crew serve weapons covered/concealed to prevent detection i.e. keep enemy form locating them or damage during preparation fires.

(Reference, mortars/secondary observation post below.)

The primary consideration impacting on the employment of machineguns within built-up areas is the limited availability of long-range fields of fire. Although machineguns should be emplaced at the lowest level possible, grazing fire at ground level is frequently obstructed by rubble. When mounted on a tripod, the .50 caliber machinegun can be used as an accurate, long-range sniper weapon. BGM – 71 TOWs and DRAGONs; within built-up areas, they are best employed from the upper stories of buildings in order to attain long-range fields of fire. Elevated firing positions also increase the first-round hit probability. Firing down at a tank from an angle of 20 degrees increases the chance of a hit by 2/3 at 200 meters. A 45-degree angle doubles the first-round probability of a hit when compared to a ground level shot. Their minimum firing ranges of 65 meters (214 ft) may limit firing opportunities in dense built-up areas (max range is 2 1/3 miles, with muzzle velocity of 278m/s or 917 ft/s). The maximum depression and elevation limits of the TOW mount well result in dead space and hinder close engagements. When deciding whether to dismount TOWs, the commander must weigh the advantage of more flexible firing envelopes against the disadvantage of losing mobility. The portable TOW requires considerable time and effort to move launcher and missiles from position to position. The best technique may be to detach TOWs to units detailed to operate on the periphery of the built-up area, rather than to those within it. Note rocket burn and maneuverability at close range. The DRAGON is lightweight and easily moved. Dragons and LAWs; because of their light weight and mobility, can attain effective short-range shots and catch the tank in a situation where it cannot counter fire. Since the LAW warhead is less lethal than those of the other antitank weapons, multiple hits are necessary. LAWs should be used in volleys, pairs, or sequences. Back blast is an important limiting factor when employing antitank weapons in MOUT. Curtains and overstuffed furniture in the back blast area should be left in place to help absorb sound. Combustible material must be removed from the back blast area. All small loose objects and window/door glass must be removed. In all cases there must be 20 square feet (2 square meters) of ventilation to the stern of the weapons. An open door will normally provide adequate ventilation. For ATGMs, the following vertical clearances between the bottom of the launch tube and the firing aperture are required. The enclosure must be of sturdy construction with a ceiling at least 7 feet (2.1 meters) high. Everyone in the room must be forward of the exhaust pipe of the weapon and must wear helmets and earplugs. Anti structure Role While they are designed and employed primarily to defeat enemy armor, they may also be used when required to attack structures or fortified targets. WWII Anti-tank guns posed something of a problem. Their main role in an offensive action was to be ready to respond to an enemy counterattack including armor. They were too vulnerable and unwieldy in the towed version to accompany the assault troops, largely necessitating their being held back along with the reserve. They would be pushed forward following a successful action to help consolidate the objective, but if they were used in the initial firefight they risked exposing their position to enemy observers.

(Reference, Step # 2, Company Cmdr, Reserves)

The following table summarizes the penetration capability of antitank weapons.

Depth of penetration for armor;

Figure in feet then meters.

WEAPON EARTH REINFORCED STEEL

CONCRETE

TOW 8/2.6 4/1.3 1.33/.4

Note TOW 24 inches or two feet to 40 inches or 3.3 feet of armor.

DRAGON 9/2.6 4/1.3 1/.3

LAW 6/1.9 2/.6 .67/.2

90mm HEAT 3.5/1.1 2.5/.8 .83/.3

NOTE: Penetration does not necessarily mean destruction of the structure.

Against sandbagged emplacements, antitank weapons should be aimed at the center of the porthole i.e. aperture. Even if the round does not go through the aperture, the bunker's walls are easier to penetrate at the apertures.

Against structures, AT weapons should be aimed about 6 inches below or to the side of an aperture. This will increase the fragmentation effect and enhance the probability of killing soldiers behind the wall.

Mortars;

Mortars; Terrain masking by buildings in MOUT is an important consideration. Mortars are the least affected because of their high-angle trajectory. Mortars can also be fired from between tall buildings. Not wanting to give away their location the mujahedeen staggered there rockets. During Mountain or MOUT operations mortars are placed on a layer of branches not directly on frozen ground, ice or concrete. Because of radar mortars must be fired from bunkers. Position mortars under the streets to fire through a manhole, muzzle close to opening. Test fire the mortar, with dummy round. Can be dug in to depth of 10 feet for cover and concealment with the right surface. In MOUT, on hard surfaces mortar aiming stakes can be placed in cans filled with dirt or use knifes etc. Mortars are the main indirect-fire support for forward units in MOUT. Fixed winged CAS and Artillery is often precluded because of blast radius. Due to cover afforded defending forces in MOUT and after enemy has broken though lines accurate indirect fire is of greater importance. Target priorities are given to streets especially intersections and other open areas. WP rounds should impact on or behind building so enemy cannot escape in smoke. Proximity fuses used against roof top targets. With MT. mortar rounds will penetrate snow blanket if proximity fuses are not used. Spongy ground of north in summer has a smoothing effect on all fire from all types of weapons hard frozen bare ground or ice when not covered by snow frozen clogs of dirt increases fragmentation effects. MT due to supplies of ammo targets and allotments are important one exception would be units detailed to cover narrow passages. Other target examples, large snow mass or rocks above enemy location.

WWII Fire support; at the start of the war the light 51 mm type mortar was a popular support weapon, versions equipping British, German and Russian Platoons. By 1942/43 only the British retained their 2 inch model in the role. Such weapons were intended to deliver explosive rounds, but these proved of minimal tactical benefit, and the British increasingly used theirs to provide a smokescreen.

In WWII the Mortar Platoon was invariably the single most powerful element of the Infantry Battalion. Dependent upon the particular model and ammunition, it could project fire anywhere between 2400 and 3000 meters, close to a maximum of two miles. (Note modern US M252 81mm, min 83m or 273ft. max 5935m or 3.7 miles).

Fire control could be exercised in one of two ways, through a fixed observation post or a mobile fire controller, but ideally a combination of the two was used (note today add UAV and other aerial sensors). Danger close for most Artillery is 50 meters. And 600 feet for 500 lbers. Bracketing targets in your own city is stupid?

The WWII mobile fire controller (MFC) took the principle one stage further. Again drawn from the Platoon, he would accompany the Headquarters of a Rifle Company operating further forward of the established OP. He would be linked by radio to the mortar position and undertook largely the same role as the observer, correcting fall of shot. However, his presence with the Rifle Company allowed him to call in fire missions to engage targets of opportunity or help overcome stubborn points of resistance out of sight of the OP. Without Ops the only solution to such shortcomings was either to push the weapons forward so the crews could see their targets, ignoring a major strength of the mortar i.e. shooting from defiles, or restrict support to rigid fire plans on pre-determined positions, severely limiting the potential for engaging targets of opportunity. Exploitation phase; where an attack succeeded it would open the gap between the mortar positions and the leading riflemen. To continue effective support fire, the mortars had to close that gap by moving forward. This could not be done by the whole Platoon at once, less the Battalion be entirely deprived of its fire for the duration of the movement. Rather, the Platoon would relocate by Sections, perhaps regrouping around the base of fire provided by an already detached forward Section operating with a Rifle Company. In the withdrawal, the Platoon would again relocate by stages. The advantage was of course that the route and new positions would have been well prepared beforehand. Supplies of ammunition could be located at both the current and secondary sites, allowing the mortars to move quickly into action on arrival at their new home.

Secondary observation posts would likewise be prepared. In static situations, the Mortar Platoon would be loathed to fire from its main position prior to a major assault, as this would inevitably reveal its location to enemy observers. Detachments and Sections could however launch harassing strikes from temporary sites before removing themselves quickly to avoid the inevitable retribution. Such ‘shoot and scoot’ missions would have to be performed well away from the dug in riflemen to spare them the retaliatory bombardment. These tactics could also be used to support fighting patrols gathering information on enemy dispositions, as well as outposts subjected to probing attacks. (Note all the above would be the Taliban methods today).

The M224 can fire 120 rounds in four minutes - a three-man crew can have 15 to 20 rounds in the air before the first round impacts. Minimum range with zero charges 70 meters. Maximum range four charges 2400 meters. Minimum elevation 1200 mils i.e. 67%. 2011“The new system is made out of what’s called an inconel alloy metal on the cannon which is lighter weight and has better properties at high heat,” the old system weighted about 40-45 lbs. the new alloy has reduced that by about 9 lbs.

A field-expedient means of measuring the river's width is with a compass. While standing at the waterline, fix your sight on a point on the opposite side and note the magnetic azimuth. Move upstream or downstream until the azimuth reading to the fixed point on the opposite bank is 45 degrees different than the original reading. The distance from the original point to the final point of observation is equal to the river's width (see Figure 7-6). Note IMO this would also be useful for determining distance to targets. Using a back azimuth to the original point would provide best accuracy over all.

Not only are crew served weapons heavy, each requires several times its own weight in ammunition.

(Reference, Step # 2 Leadership guidelines, Squad leader, and especially Co. cmdr. “The Reserves”, And COE rule # 3, including maneuvers and formations.)

5) Set up observation and lessoning post:

O/Ps & L/Ps, Post centuries in pairs. Relieve them frequently to avoid fatigue. Every four hours is common. Extreme cold centuries relieved very two hrs. One century for observing one for recording/making notes. Switch duties every 20 minutes. Post should check in on regular basis, if they fail to do so, go see why. Don't call post. Check in times should precede approach time intervals. Centuries should challenge in low clear voice not loudly, this is the rule weather behind enemy or friendly lines. They should wait till last minute. Don’t shoot unless stepped on. If you most take foe out do so silently. You can shoot in eye socket for silencer. If enemy sneaks near, but dose not discover your post all the better. With group have leader approach first then rest of group, one at a time. Each member is okayed and I.D. by leader. Counter sign tactics- there are two parts challenge word for century and pass word /patrol word. Principals #1) Remain oriented to objective; you should not be deterred by minor distractions obstacles or scanty resistance. O/P & L/P are trip wires for attack. Intel is useless unless organized and delivered in timely manner. When in the desert or at sea timely information is more important, negative sightings as important as positive. Number messages so missing or added or false ones will be noted. Separate facts from opinions with a line. If there is a good chance a message will be intercepted, have messenger memorize real massage and carry a false written note. Note messenger could be made aware of contents to use during interrogation, i.e. to counter the testing of captures honesty. Send more then one by different routes. Casualties or bad news delivered by messengers to maintain morale. Messenger can serve as recon too. The fallowing is an acronym used by troops to record information of interest. I Salute R.W.P. In this case it is a tactical recognizance report. Here we keep it simpler compared to Concept of operation reports. As an individual one would not be observing more than a company size unit at once. One would simply go right down the line noting observations as observed. Note there are some important differences on infuses, mainly R. and W. (I) I.D. who or what. (S) Size, how many. (A) Activity, what was going on. Dust rising high up into sharply defined columns chariots/vehicles are coming. Low and broad Infantry. Dispersed in thin shafts they are gathering fire wood or searching. Spars coming and going they are encamping. If their pennants and flags move about they are in chaos. (L) Location, also give your location and distance form activity. (U) Unit, again the details may or may not be available or noted. Clothing, uniforms, patches. (T) Time, date and time of acquisition and for each activity. (E) Equipment, again simply what is observed. Vehicles, communication, weapons. (R) Reinforcements, allies or signs of working with others, like talking on phones, preparing sites, leaving things behind. (W) With drawl, direction last seen or if you leave area first, witch way might they have gone. (P)? Undecided, could be personalities etc. Seldom up this is yet another acronym to gathering information. This one is used by Marines monitoring communication equipment. Size, Equipment, Location, Disposition, Organization, Movement/morale, Units, Personalities. Five (Ws) and an (H) this is a strategic report. Who, What, Where, When, Why, and How. In this case the acronym is used to answer questions in general over all (on a long term strategic basis).

Mnemonic-style Tactical reporting formats;

Terms worth noting, BOLO (be on the lookout) list?” For HVIs (High-value individuals) in order to trigger a QRF) for HVI rollups.

A to H Report (Individual/HVI Report)

Age: How old does the individual look? Give a range, for example 16 to 20 years old. Build: How is the individual built? For example, bulky, fat, skinny, etc. Clothing: What is the individual wearing? For example, a white dishdasha, a red headscarf, and black sunglasses. Distinguishing marks: Are there any unusual or identifying marks that make the individual stand out? For example, missing half of an index finger on the left hand. Elevation (read: height): How tall is the individual? For example, appears to be between 70 inches and 72 inches tall. Facial features: Are there any unusual or identifying marks on the face? For example, scars, an odd nose, eye color, a beard, a pierced ear, etc. Gait: What is the manner of the individual’s walk? For example, a limp or anything peculiar about how the individual walks or his stride. Hair: What is the color and style of the individual’s hair? For example, bald or jet-black hair that comes to a widow’s peak.

SCRIM Report (Vehicle Report)

Shape/Size: Is it a sedan, sports utility vehicle, truck, bus, or motorcycle? For example, a pickup truck with an extended cab. This detail is especially important if make/model cannot be determined. Color and condition: Go beyond just a primary or secondary color; answer what the hue/shade is. Is it missing paint? For example, cherry red with a primer gray passenger door. Registration: Does it have plates or some other unique identification tag issued by a government? For example, Virginia State tags, 123–ABC. Identifying marks: Are there any unusual or identifying marks on the vehicle, either for what it has or what it is missing? For example, has a roof rack and is missing the passenger side view mirror. Make/Model: Who makes it and when? For example, a Ford F–150, appears to be between a 1996 and 2000 year model.

(Reference, Step # 3, concepts of Operations, part A) forces available and Equipment and Weapons available reports.)

Principals #2) Retain freedom of maneuver; keep the big picture in mind. You should position yourself for surviving and observing. Position chosen for view, clear communications and defensive properties. Roof tops, pros: good view of area, less traffic, cooler and long range communications possible. Cons: must be camouflaged from air observation. Could prove difficult to withdrawal if surrounded. In general you should not move around a lot, pick a spot and stay there, chances are you will see and hear just as much from one location as another. Protection against surprise. Passive measures are camouflage, dispersion, noise and light discipline, hide or defile positions. Active measures conduct patrols set up O/P and L/P. Classifying of post, primary, alternate and supplementary. Day or Night as well as morning/evening, so view not obscured by sun. Extreme north long hours of summer provide long time for viewing, especially from air visa versa (Vv.) in winter. Visibility and observation analyzed independently. Visibility changes with weather, observation with terrain.

Four factors of target exposure; Terrain, Position of observer, Light and atmosphere.

Methods of searching Focus scan This method maximizes peripheral vision. Procedure, focus on object 3 ft out in front of you. You well notice a moment of focus in the peripherals, if you try to concentrate on anyone thing besides point in front, you loose your peripheral vision. Looking for something in the brush, focus on something on the opposite side, though brush.

AKA jungle eye look through it not at it. Stoop occasionally and look along jungle floor.

Quick scan search with eyes first, before moving head. Method used to gather quick understanding of large area. It’s an over lapping sweeping pattern from right to left. Start at nearest point and work out from your position. Adjustments made at 50’ or 50 meters depending on scale of area to be covered. Your eyes well notice more on the right to left sweep. This fact is what makes it easier for someone to locate next line on page they are reading. Search sector 90 degree. Left and right limits 45 degrees each. Eyes tend to relax during search and distant objects blur, to counter this you should focus on clouds or distant land features often. Squinting can help; it changes the focal length of the eye. Searching for aircraft a narrow search sector produces best results. Often inexperienced searchers look to close to horizon for a/c or far too high. Proper angle is 20 degree above horizon. Same distance from tip of little finger to tip of thumb with fingers fully extended at arms distance from face. Once you spot aircraft keep an eye on it. If you most look away note location, direction and speed using clouds or note land features directly below. Detail scan used to check an object or area closer, especially at night. It is a Diamond pattern. Eyes will not focus in motion. Move your eyes in short abrupt irregular movements’ halting your eyes at a fixed point, i.e. Diamond corners, every 4 to 10 seconds around the object or area. The purpose is to concentrate on out line of object. When you look directly at object the image is formed on the cone region located in the stern of eye. Which is not sensitive to night time light. Looking slightly to one side or top of object the image is formed on retina containing rod cells, witch are sensitive to visual purple night light. Most sensitive area varies with individuals 6-10 degrees. Rod cells bleach out in 4-10 seconds. To demonstrate this, place dark object on table in a very dim lighted room, look right at it, then just off to one side. AKA Off-Center Vision. During the daytime when an individual looks at an object, he looks directly at it. However, if he did this at night he would only see the object for a few seconds. In order to see this object for any length of time, he must look off center 6 to 10 degrees. Normal Blind Spots. Present, day and night. It is caused by the lack of light receptors where the optic nerve inserts into the back of the eye. Occurs or observed when you use just one eye. When you close one eye, objects about 12 to 15 degrees away from where you are looking will disappear. When you uncover your eye, the objects will reappear. Consequently, larger and larger objects are missed as the distances increase. Examples "night blind spots," A hand grenade 2 meters away, soldier at 50 meters, tank at 300 meters.

When light enters the eye, it first passes through the cornea, then the aqueous humor, lens and vitreous humor. Ultimately it reaches the retina, which is the light-sensing structure of the eye. The retina contains two types of cells, called rods and cones. Rods handle vision in low light, and cones handle color vision and detail. When light contacts these two types of cells, a series of complex chemical reactions occurs. The chemical that is formed (activated rhodopsin) creates electrical impulses in the optic nerve. Generally, the outer segment of rods are long and thin, whereas the outer segment of cones are more, well, cone shaped. Below is an example of a rod and a cone:

Image edited;

Features of recognition

(S) Size, should be reduced as much as possible then care taken to limit exposure. Objects look closer; when the object is higher than observer (as in mid air) viewed peak to peak when all of valley is not visible. Object is below you, the distance is long and slopes down ward towards object, sun behind you. Or on a bright clear day. When in bright light, spot light etc. The object is of bright color. Object is larger then surroundings, large in size, most of object visible, of regular outline like buildings. When object is framed, EX; viewed through window. In the dessert or at sea by a magnitude of 3. Objects look farther away; when observer is in prone position, looking down narrow long alley/corridor, viewing from above or peak to peak with the entire valley visible. Object above you (distance long, slopes up to wards object) sun is in your eyes or shining from behind object. Object is smaller than surroundings, camouflaged or of dark color, of irregular outline like trees. On hazy, foggy, rainy days. Object in dim light, after sunset or during twilight. Note to clarify the one comparison that may be confusing; objects at bottom of long sloping surface look closer, if surface slopes upward object looks farther away. This seems in contrast to statement; when object higher than observer it looks closer. This is due to the long sloping surface Vs an unseen (as in mid air) or irregular one.

(Reference, COE rule # 9/10 eye focus)

(S) Shape, you should break up nature look of things. Change out line. Eliminate strait lines. Avoid skintight clothing.

Shape and Outline

Make sure the added camouflage does not hinder the equipment's operation.

Shape: Patterns:

Rows of vehicles and stacks of materiel create patterns that are easier to detect than random patterns of dispersed equipment

Equipment paint patterns. The critical relationships that determine the contrast between a piece of equipment and its background are the distance between the observer and the equipment and the distance between the equipment and its background. Since these distances usually vary, it is difficult to paint equipment with a pattern that always allows it to blend with its background. As such, no single pattern is prescribed for all situations. Field observations provide the best match between equipment and background.

Besides ordinary non-glossy paint, liquid vesicant chemical agent detector, M5, can be applied to the helmet in a mottled pattern to give two kinds of protection at once.

(S) Shadows, more pronounced in desert or arctic. Will move with sun. Move quickly with wind at night when being produced by flares. This makes the ground at your feet appear to be moving too, makes it difficult to maintain balance when running. Illumination rounds are placed behind your position in defense, right over enemy when in the offense. This produces shadows out in front of your position and eliminates shadows as much as possible around enemy, like high noon time. Do not cast shadows on windows, outdoor ways around corners, off roof tops or from objects of cover and concealment. When you are in a tree they must be disguised or concealed. You should park vehicles with maximum vertical area facing sun, dug in too, so you lower the profile, reducing length of shadows. White painted cardboard or burlap placed in shadows. Shadow area illuminated with mirrors. Direction of travel noted by sharp corners. Shadows are the same length as objects casting them at noon. This varies with your latitude and seasons of the year.

Shadow can be divided into two types:

A cast shadow is a silhouette of an object projected against its background. In desert or snow environments, a shadow cast by a target can be more conspicuous than the target itself.

A contained shadow is the dark pool that forms in a permanently shaded area. Examples are the shadows under the track guards of an armored fighting vehicle (AFV), inside a slit trench, inside an open cupola, or under a vehicle. Contained shadows show up much darker than their surroundings.

Also, if you are in a dark shadow and there is a light source to one side, an enemy on the other side can see your silhouette against the light.

Newjarheaddean’s “Shadow caster gizmo”.

(Reference, COE, Charactteristics of Military oprs in Desert Warfare, “Because there is little vegetation”)

(C) Color, pay close attention to changes in back ground, especially in deserts. Change vegetation as terrain changes, and often i.e. every few hours to counter welting. Vegetation is struck into belts, straps, button holes, laces. Three colors gives maximum verity and coverage. Anymore colors not enough coverage any fewer colors and less chance of matching back ground.

(T) Texture, Reflections give you away for miles. In desert you can stop on vegetation, in shadows or on broken terrain. Nets can reduce glare or flat paints and rubber surfaces too. Shine caused by wet surfaces. Exposed skin of the face or hands reflects light during the day or night. Even dark skin. Face painting stripe pattern best for morning and evening, blotch pattern for mid day. For specific terrain, blotch is best for temperate deciduous forest and arctic, broad strips for carnivorous forest, and jungles, thinner strips for deserts and grassy or open areas. Highlight low lying areas like eye sockets, neck, and side of face. Darken prominent features nose, lips, chin, cheeks, forehead, and ears. Use two colors on each surface. A little trick was to paint nose like small face. Up close if you were stationary enemy could think he sees you off in the distance. SP the Army is trying to find a face paint that would block the thermal signature of human skin but has yet to find a workable solution. Note IMO they don’t want this tech getting into the hands of the enemy. Using blood red color trauma design i.e. painted up like injuries. Blood red scarf when wet would look like wound, dirt added for guts.

Texture:

A rough surface appears darker than a smooth surface, even if both surfaces are the same color. For example, vehicle tracks change the texture of the ground.

Shine

Whenever possible, wash oily skin and reapply camouflage. If you must wear glasses, camouflage them by applying a thin layer of dust to the outside of the lenses. Cover shiny spots on equipment by painting, covering with mud, or wrapping with cloth or tape. Pay particular attention to boot eyelets, buckles, watches, jewelry, zippers, and insignia. Carry a signal mirror in its designed pouch or in a pocket with the mirror portion facing your body.

Shine from optical instruments (which should be kept shaded),

Running gear on tracks that has been polished by wear.

Local materials can also be used. The color and texture of the local terrain is best represented by placing dirt on vehicles and using a little water to make it stick.

Skin:

Avoid using oils or insect repellent to soften the paint stick because doing so makes skin shiny and defeats the purpose of the paint. What about heating? Don’t forget to get behind the ears, back of neck and arms.

When paint sticks are unavailable, use field expedients such as burnt cork, bark, charcoal, lampblack, or mud. Mud contains bacteria, some of which is harmful and may cause disease or infection, so consider mud as the last resource.

Reflectance; is the amount of energy returned from a target's surface as compared to the energy striking the surface. Reflectance is generally described in terms of the part of the EM spectrum in which the reflection occurs: Visual reflectance is characterized by the color of a target. Color contrast can be important, particularly at close ranges and in homogeneous background environments such as snow or desert terrain. Also, the human eye cannot discriminate color in poor light. Temperature reflectance is the thermal energy reflected by a target (except when the thermal energy of a target is self-generated, as in the case of a hot engine). IR imaging sensors measure and detect differences in temperature-reflectance levels (known as thermal contrast). Radar-signal reflectance is the part of the incoming radio waves that is reflected by a target. Radar sensors detect differences in a target's reflected radar return and that of the background. Since metal is an efficient radio-wave reflector and metals are still an integral part of military equipment, radar return is an important reflectance factor.

(M) Movement, number one reason you will be spotted. Beautifully colored birds are often not seen in the jungle until they move. You should move in slow and flowing movements. Nature is always on the move, this way you blend into back ground. Moving when wind blows is a good idea. Local noises, aircraft, vehicles, may distract foe. Remain in shadows even if it means going out of your way. If you’re not moving at the time airburst or search light hits you, stay still. If it’s a ground flare (meaning someone tripped it) or spot light hall ass. Move immediately after illumination goes out. Watch animal’s sheep when frightened huddle and look in the direction of what frightened them. Geese and horses look and move away. Rodents run, do not fallow in their paths. Someone hearing them might spot you. Crickets stop chirping up close because of you, at a distance because of enemy. Birds where they congregate it is usually empty. If they get quite or suddenly all take to flight, something or some one has spooked them. Animals are generally better indicators of enemy presents than sight or sound, smells can be the best indicator.

(Reference, PCP rule # 8, Tracking, “Wild Life”)

You should stay down wind of objective to reduce detection. Stay up wind of fires to avoid smoke smell on you. Do not wear bug fuck/repellant, deodorants or colons. Smells in general and of animals/horses especially strong at dawn and at evening. Non smokers should be kept up front.

Movement: When moving past obstacles, avoid going over them. When you are moving, you will have difficulty detecting the movement of others. Stop frequently, listen, and look around slowly. When hiding or traveling, stay in the deepest part of the shadows. Forcing an enemy to look through many layers of masking vegetation will fatigue his eyes very quickly. If capture appears imminent in your present location and you must move, move away slowly, making as little noise as possible. Moving slowly conserves energy. Use background noises to cover the noise of your movement. Sounds of aircraft, trucks, generators, strong winds, and people talking will cover some or all the sounds produced by your movement. Rain will mask a lot of movement noise, but it also reduces your ability to detect potential enemy noise.

The LCSS lightweight camouflage screen system, is a modular system consisting of a hexagon screen, a diamond-shaped screen, a support system, and a repair kit. You can join any number of screens to cover a designated target or area.

The LCSS protects targets in four different ways. It—

Casts patterned shadows that break up the characteristic outlines of a target.

Scatters radar returns (except when radar-transparent nets are used).

Traps target heat and allows it to disperse.

Simulates color and shadow patterns that are commonly found in a particular region.

Erecting Procedures:

Maintain the net a minimum of 2 feet from the camouflaged target's surface. This prevents the net from assuming the same shape and thermal signature as the target it is meant to conceal.

Sloping the net over the target also minimizes sharp edges, which are more easily detectable to the human eye.

Extend the net completely to the ground to prevent creating unnatural shadows that are easily detected. This ensures that the net effectively disrupts the target's shape and actually absorbs and scatters radar energy.

The preferred net is the lightweight camouflage screen system (LCSS), desert version, which provides concealment against visual, near IR, and radar target acquisition/surveillance sensor devices. Additionally, the transparent version of the LCSS allows US units to camouflage radars (less CW type radars) without degrading operations. A desert camouflage net should be a complete cover, as it depends on its limitation of the ground surface, and both color and texture, for its effect. The alternatives to the LCSS in order of priority include the following:

The specially produced desert-pattern net of the lightweight screen system.

An open-weave cloth and close-weave cloth.

A standard net garnished solid, threaded in long straight strips that have been colored to harmonize with the terrain. The garnishing must be maintained.

The number of nets issued depends on the size of the equipment to be covered, but should be sufficient to allow a gradual slope of not more than 15 degrees from the top of the equipment to the earth. Each company-size unit should be equipped with a spray gun and various tints of paint to provide for temporary variations in net color to match the terrain.

When using nets for stationary equipment--

Camo must be easily removable to maintain reaction times.

Hook and hold a camouflage net to the ground away from the vehicle by using wooden pegs or long steel pins, depending on soil consistency.

After dismounting local security, camouflage is the first priority when a vehicle halts. Actions to be taken are--

Shadow areas covered with burlap screens. chicken wire to lighten up area too.

Upon stopping vehicles blot out tracks at lest as far as you can.

The shadow can be broken up, which is normally achieved by sitting equipment next to scrub or broken surfaces, such as rocks. Equipment should not be sited broadside to the sun, and it is usually necessary to move as the sun moves. Vehicles passing over pebbles or heavy ground surfaces press the pebbles or gravel into the soil, causing track marks to be prominent. Avoid such areas if possible. Use existing trails and blend new trails into old ones whenever possible.

Soil texture suitable for digging must be a consideration when reconnoitering for battle positions.

In forward areas, operations centers Vehicles should not be allowed to approach closer than 300-400 meters. Generators dug-in allow adequate air space for cooling. Equipment in area limited, Radios and antenna systems must be remote and in different directions.

Drivers must avoid harsh use of accelerators, the main cause of diesel plumes.

Vehicle silhouettes can be reduced in the forward areas by removing cabs and tops.

Follow the ground pattern, if possible.

All vehicles of a given type should look alike. This will make it difficult for an enemy to pick out critical vehicles, such as water and fuel trucks, in a column. Canopies over fuel trucks disguise them and prevent radiant heat from striking the fuel containers.

Vehicles should follow the tracks of the preceding vehicle if it is possible to do so without breaking through the crust, as this reduces the possibility of an enemy intelligence analyst to calculate how many vehicles have passed.

Disguises, Decoys, Diversions and counter measures:

Camouflage Discipline; always remember concealment of your unit is a cooperative responsibility shared by you and every individual in the unit. The unit will suffer for the mistake of one member. You won't always have time to do all the things that are mentioned, but you must find time to do the most important ones for the job at hand. Order of importance, from top of the head down; that is, from the most frequently exposed parts to the least exposed.

Marine wearing ladies blue and white head bonnet in cultivated field of high vegetation, so first thing enemy may see well look like a women working in field. Members of irregular unit switching items associated with their personal identification (like a wrist band) as anti I.D. tactic. You should always suspect that what you’re observing could be a D.D.D. and you should all ways be prepared with counters. Deception is one of the arts of war. In theory it should favor offense, in practice it favors defense. Because attacker is up and about searching for defense. It is one of the primary means to achieve surprise. It conceals ones intentions and capabilities. It causes adversary to react less rapidly and to employ forces in less then optimum manner. When committed to employing troops feign inactivity, thus although your capable display incapability to them. When objective is near, act as if it is far Vs., be differential (showing difference respectfully) to foster there arrogance. Display profit to entice them. Create disorder in there forces and take them. If they are rested force them to exert themselves. If they are united cause them to separate. One who has emissaries come forth wants to rest for a while. One who seeks peace with out setting any prior conditions is executing a stratagem /ruse i.e. move to gain. One who’s troop’s half advance and half retreat is enticing you. Psychologically, soldiers are weakest immediately after a win. Victorious soldiers are focused only on raping, looting and sleeping. Let invaders pass by, then attack them from behind after the battle.

Presents of a flag may make attacker think there up against larger unit. Marine signaling as if he is communicating with other Marines to advance, makes foe believe there’s more Marines advancing. Foe well make effort to see advancing Marines, compromising his concealment. In the northern landscape the back ground is not always all white, rocks shrubs brush and shadows make sharp contrast with snow. After freshly fallen snow has melted a little the dead tones of brown and grey start to re-appear. In woods (some times snow on ground but not in trees) green field jackets maybe warn with white pants Vs. Also with mixed clothing or all whites’ enemy and friendly troops look alike. Hiding behind small object in the shadow of larger one is often over looked. Decoy positions must be placed to fallow tactical plan but far enough away from actual to avoid damage. When withdrawing form base leave detail behind to maintain campfires etc. With radios and equipment retain original operators until withdrawal/replacement complete. The enemy could notice changes in voices and operators habits. And realize unit is moving out.

Tracks once made stick to them. Bring in supplies on one well concealed route. It may be advantageous to make more tracks to show signs of greater strength than available. Tracks leading to dummy position must be made. Tracks should lead though real position to lead enemy past base. Obvious tracks can be made in retreat direction. Avoid turn around loops. Tracks should end on hard ground or at water. Tracks filled with ashes/coals etc. to make them appear fresh to IR. Vehicle tracks molds/cast made so they can be moved. Gaps made in actual tracks will make them look like molds/casts i.e. dash patterns of decoy tracks.

Vehicles Zig Zagging well distorts tracks in sand. With wet sand extreme inside tread maybe still visible. Vehicles could also tow trailer with wheels rotated to reverse tread of tracks. With water jets on EFV could there not be some sort of attachment to turn jets into blower to erase tracks.

In the summer tracks across open surface are quit clear to aerial observer and may become quite firm during low night temperatures and will remain indefinitely, as indications of movement. Nature may assist by covering tracks with newly fallen snow or storm concealing all movement. Trees being dragged behind vehicle to cover tracks. Mujahideen traveling with sheep herds. Germans during WWII drove cattle ahead of them as cover for an attack. Concealment from air is of greatest concern.

(Reference, Preperations and conduct of patrols, rule # 9)

Over head tarpaulins or netting, vegetation etc. should be used to cover any extensive digging in snow or earth. Nets used for cover should not be pulled to tight this reveals each supporting pole. Use poles to lift cover off of vehicles or equipment etc. Increases circulation and surface space permits use of top surfaces. Parachute material is good for camouflage and is water resistance. In dessert cover not available concealment more important. Decoy trenches need only be 1 foot deep if floors are lined with vegetation cut to scale. Snow used to make decoy vehicles can be quickly shaped with shovels. Details added by placing ashes, branches, dirt, logs, poles etc. can be frozen into place by pouring water on them. White paper, when wet, can be applied and allowed to freeze on all kinds of surfaces. Snow and vegetation can be placed on actual vehicles to make them look like decoys. Supplies stored in shape of vehicles. Limit activity around actual vehicles equipment and post. Vehicle exhaust or firing of large caliber weapons, as well as Marines breathing may cause local vapor fogs in extreme cold. Maybe necessary to shut off engines or leave vehicles in stern areas. Move weapons frequently. Marines can place ice/snow in mouth although for only short periods of time due to body heat loss. If you need fires to stay alive or keep weapons operational, have many more than necessary for positions and move around frequently.

(Reference, PCP rule # 7)

Wood fires should not be aloud in day light hours. If drift wood available remember it well not smoke (DO NOT USE FOR RESCUE FIRES). Long chimneys of blocks of ice to cool smoke before exhausted. In open areas smoke from fires hangs immediately above position if there’s no wind. Under certain conditions like night fall. If position is on high point smoke may flow down hill/down wind. Deception or concealment might be gained by deliberately causing local vapor fogs and allowing it to settle in low lying areas depressions etc. Forest fires, when smoke begins to flow over your position it means a lot of the heat and energy etc. has been lost by the fire. Marines can attack or retreat with fogs on mountain sloops. Fog will shift with changes in temperature and sun. In dessert dragging chains or hovering helicopters can make small units look larger. Maneuver units can leap frog ahead of one another and mask each other with dust. Bleeding diesel fuel into exhaust/onto manifold will make smoke for screening. Traveling during early morning or late evening hours, the sand is damp thus there is less dust. Smoke screens may last longer in MOUT; dust more of a problem with no wind. In snow environment using white smoke for concealment. Smoke screens can be effective when placed behind approaching weapon, between it and crew operating it, to block shooters view of weapon. Smoke used to mask the lack of movement. Pneumatic devices hampered in temperatures below zero or at high altitudes. Blankets or sheets being used as screens should be wet down to resist wind. Smoke pots or fires placed or positioned to hamper I.R. Lt. Amplification or lasers. Burning tires, placed on vehicles near engine, will look like engine already hit. Fumes form rubber puts petrol chemicals in air like oil from engines. Roofing tiles, felt paper and asphalt have very similar signatures. Can be placed on vehicles located on roads or in parking lots to hide them. Chlorophyll from the crushed or cut grass shows on infra-red line scan (IRLS), note mowed lawn grass or mulch? Also to hamper IR keeping one side of vehicle (human body altered every 20 minutes?) facing sun all day, the other side covered with tarps, boards or sand. At night with the covered side uncovered it will show up a lot less on I.R. You park vehicles side by side, sandwich style. Vehicles look like one. Movement at precise time can foil aim of incoming weapons. Also fast moving vehicles traveling down roads with lots of irregularities like dips, can cause just enough vertical displacement for a miss. Drape targets with pictures or paintings of damage. Scarecrow drawl fire props. Placing many items in windows and doorways. Wind and fans used to simulate motion/movement. Hope is snipers will shoot at them and give away their positions. “Trojan Horse” missions utilized on occasion in Iraq. Marines were given relaxed grooming standards, local dress and a civilian vehicle (modified with armor and radios) and conducted patrols in areas with insurgent activity. A QRF was on call and positioned nearby. Such operations have the ability of disrupting insurgent activities. Any insurgent operating in areas of Trojan Horse missions are occurring must wonder: “Is that a cab driver sitting in that taxi over there, or is it..?”

To make few look like many at good range, say 600 yards. Use small number of troops. Exposed at varying points though brush, wearing different equipment in various positions on them etc. Facing and moving in same direction. Deference between 2-6 second exposure can mean life or death. Also multi scaled scarecrow props largest to smallest, set up at increasing ranges according to scale in order to have realistic appearance i.e. give the illusion of depth. To slow or harass enemy patrol, you first shoot off flare at close enough range they will stop and investigate. As soon as patrol regroups and begins to move on there way. Shoot off second flare. Third time you attack. Assaulting a position at night, attack started first with a few mortars, then burst of machine gun fire, troops shouting battle cries, then at once nothing. 30-40 minutes later all repeated. Battle cry much louder, they had crawled forward and where much closer. You could also have reserve troops repeat battle cry the second time from same distance as the first, while attacking troops assault silently. Chem.-lights placed on top of houses to mark for air raid, passed out to locals in Iraq who placed them on the family rival’s roofs. Humvees IR strobe light invisible to naked eye, seen with NVG aids drivers in locating other vehicles. Can look like weapon muzzle flashes. Note shooter using as concealment screening of their muzzle flashes within buildings.

Mimic sounds from a distance up close volume gradually increased /decreased. Using high energy lasers to cook off ammo of crew served weapons, endangering crews and causing weapons malfunctions.

With persons suspected of wearing synthetic facial prosstitics for disguises one could use a laser beam, by adjusting the heat level and observing the individuals reactions or lack there of i.e. if the nose is false there would be no reaction. This for field expatiate measure. Without having access to IR imaging equipment sensitive enough to distinguish the different signatures.

Peace meal tactics, a little of everything being done at once, with no certain activities obvious to observer i.e. pre-positioning equipment.

Troops riding high up in lattice structures far above normal truck bed level as an anti mine tactic.

Guerrillas placing flares into the air to cause many shadows and light fluctuations to hamper aerial sensors.

Flares or illumination rounds used by ground forces esp. around water standing or running, to hamper aerial sensors. Note standard illumination rounds designed to show light only down, right?

Taliban gathering for meetings in gardens, note they look like average workers. Also earlier mention of gardens being were weapons well be buried.

Producing shadows that look like weapons.

Shadow caster i.e. flash light adapter that would be able to produce silhouettes like shadows to mimic troops running by etc.

Instinctively applying Napoleon's dictum of preparing a circumspect defense before unleashing an audacious attack.

Machine i.e. computer knowing the gamers so well i.e. habits chop of keyboard. Could this not be used against those war gamers in real war.

Aircraft spaying fuel mixture from tanks i.e. dumping fuel than ignited by flares.

Off repellant clip on i.e. fan unit that distributes insect repellent around individual. Note could there not be an anti I.R. arousal agent used in same way.

Trawler fishing nets to stir up silt from bottom as concealment for subs.

Box of cigars TNT sticks.

Light sensors set to turn on outside lights time set to turn off out side lights and in side light

Methyl laded tablets stove

Always keep decoy weapon /unloaded etc. in the open loaded hidden remember as long as enemy believes decoy is real/loaded just as effective for offensive/bluff. Blank magazine in case enemy brings his own ammo.

Wig makers i.e. tailors provide disguises.

Ransom money sprayed with chemical. disintegrates in 72 hours.

Funerals used to smuggle supplies, equipment, or weapons. In side coffins or corps.

Your own restaurant open to the public makes food supplies safe for your consumption.

Peer to peer renting

Helicopter making dry runs at attacking surface troops. Meaning gunship out of ammo, but enemy would not know and would still take cover.

Slice of bread as an air filter.

See also chem. warfare Greek fire, napalm

The weapons would be hidden in trees orchards and flower nurseries. The IRA would used women drivers with kids in rented cars.

Red filters on vehicle dome lights and flashlights, while designed to protect a soldier's night vision, are extremely sensitive to detection by NVDs. A tank's red dome light, reflecting off the walls and out through the sight and vision blocks, can be seen with a starlight scope from 4 kilometers. Red-lensed flashlights and lit cigarettes and pipes are equally observable. To reduce the chances of detection, replace red filters with blue-green filters. Shine at night moonlight and starlight can be reflected as easily as sunlight.

NVG difficult to tell difference btw. Plastic bottles and ordinance. Shells etc.

Source SP Rosecroix,

Aoccdrnig to a rsceearh at an Elingsh uinervtisy, it deosn't mttaer in waht oredr the ltteers in a wrod are, the olny iprmoatnt tihng is taht the frist and lsat ltteers are in the rghit pclae. The rset can be a toatl mses and you can sitll raed it...

Hehe, AND it adds a whole new layer of denyability. Whats not to like?

Camouflage, concealment and decoys discipline CCD

DDD

CCD discipline depends largely on individuals it involves regulating light, heat, noise, spoil, trash, and movement. Vehicle tracks are the most common signs of military activity. One poorly concealed vehicle can compromise an entire task force. Use natural and artificial materials for CCD. Natural CCD includes defilade, grass, bushes, trees, and shadows. Artificial CCD includes BDUs, camouflage nets, skin paint, and natural materials.

Iraqi vote registration. combined with food drive discourages attack and provides cover.

Uniforms: starching counters the IR properties of the dyes. Replace excessively faded and worn BDUs because they lose their CCD effectiveness as they wear.

Shine starched uniforms). Plastic map cases, and clear plastic garbage bags also reflect light. Vehicle headlights, taillights, and safety reflectors not only reflect light but also reflect laser energy used in weapon systems.

Dispersal:

Dispersal is the deliberate deployment of soldiers and equipment over a wide area.

Equipment: The following guidelines should be used to conceal engineer activity:

Employ the minimum number of equipment and personnel.

Keep equipment well away from the site.

Complete all possible preparations well away from the site.

Soldiers assigned equipment, such as vehicles or generators, should be knowledgeable of their appropriate camouflage techniques.

Individual Fighting Positions:

Remember that too much CCD material applied to a position can actually have a reverse effect and disclose the position to the enemy. Obtain CCD materials from a dispersed area to avoid drawing attention to the position by the stripped area around it.

Desert Concealment and Camouflage

FM 90-3 Appendix E Desert Operations

In the desert, you encounter an increased range of vision. Total concealment is rarely achieved.

Cover from enemy direct fire may be afforded by dunes, hills, and other irregularities in the desert terrain.

Light and heat:

Light and heat discipline, though important at all times, is crucial at night. Lights at night can be observed at great distances. For example, the human eye can detect camp fires from 8 kilometers and vehicle lights from 20 kilometers. Threat surveillance can also detect heat from engines, stoves, and heaters from great distances.

Noise:

For example, muffle generators by using shields or terrain masking or place them in defilade positions. Communications personnel should operate their equipment at the lowest possible level that allows them to be heard and understood.

Spoil:

The prompt and complete policing of debris and spoil removes a key signature of a unit's current or past presence in an area.

Track:

Use existing roads and tracks as much as possible. When using new paths, ensure that they fit into the existing terrain's pattern. Minimize, plan, and coordinate all movement;

METT-TC

The following sets forth a METT-TC methodology to help determine CCD priorities:

Mission.

Enemy. An enemy's RSTA capabilities often influence the camouflage materials and CCD techniques needed to support a unit's mission. Before beginning a mission, conduct an intelligence analysis to identify the enemy's RSTA capabilities.

Terrain and weather.

Troops. A change in the environment or the mission often requires additional training on effective techniques. Leaders must also consider the alertness of troops. Careless CCD efforts are ineffective and may disclose a unit's location.

Time. The time available to employ CCD countermeasures, and the time necessary to remove and reemploy camouflage during unit relocation.

Five general techniques of employing CCD explained:

Hiding:

Hiding is screening a target from an enemy's sensors. using conditions of limited visibility for movement and terrain masking. Examples of hiding include:

Burying.

Placing vehicles beneath tree canopies.

Placing equipment in defilade positions.

Covering vehicles and equipment with nets.

Hiding roads and obstacles with linear screens.

Using battlefield obscurants, such as smoke.

From optical sensor; Earth cover, Earth embankments, Vegetation, LCSS, Screens, Smoke

From thermal; same as above.

From radars; Chaff, Earth cover, Earth embankments, Vegetation, Nets, RAM, LCSS

Blending:

Generally, it is arranging or applying camouflage material on, over, and/or around a target to reduce its contrast with the background.

From optical sensors; Paint, Foam, Lights, Vegetation, LCSS, Textured Mats

From thermal sensors; Thermal paint, Foam, Air conditioning/heating , Vegetation, LCSS, Textured mats, Water,

Insulation

From radars; Vegetation, LCSS, RAM, Reshaping, Textured mats

Disguising:

Disguising is applying materials on a target to mislead the enemy as to its true identity. Disguising changes a target's appearance so that it resembles something of lesser or greater significance. For example, a missile launcher might be disguised to resemble a cargo truck or a large building might be disguised to resemble two small buildings.

From optical sensors; Reshaping, Paint, LCSS

From thermal sensors; Reshaping, Painting

Radar; Corner Reflectors

Disrupting:

Disrupting is altering or eliminating regular patterns and target characteristics. Disrupting techniques include pattern painting, deploying camouflage nets over selected portions of a target, and using shape disrupters (such as camouflage sails) to eliminate regular target patterns.

From optical sensors; Camouflage sails

From thermal sensors; Flares, smoke

Radar; Chaff

FOS , Pyrotechnics, Smudge pots, Balloons , Strobe lights, Tracer simulators, Smoke

Decoying:

Decoying is deploying a false or simulated target(s)

From optical sensors; Decoy target (pneumatic or rigid structures), Lights, Smoke,

From thermal sensors; Decoy target, Flares , Air conditioning/heating, Smoke

From radar; Decoy target, Corner reflectors , Signal generators

Have a helper chain the gates shut to lock the pursuit vehicles in.

Change vehicles under overhead cover to lose any airborne pursuit.

Anti-tank missiles will not recognize a motorcycle and will fly past it.

Continually fire flares at night, but from many different mortars.

(Reference, Step # 3 General phases of an attack, Phase one the attack and phase two contact)

Lessening post:

Used when unit is set up in thick vegetation, during bad weather or at night. They are placed farther out than O/P to give more time to warn of attack. Do to fact detection most likely well be at closer range then visual. You can hear better with mouth slightly open, when not breathing or breathing through mouth. When you are close to the surface, especially in holes or trenches, with ears cocked/cupped or next to pole, knife etc. stuck in surface or can/steel pot placed open end up. In winter hoods will canalize and hamper hearing. Helmets wind whirling around causes noise. Snow especially when it’s falling reduces all sounds. In MOUT location and the source of sounds becomes difficult due to the nature of echoing. And the tendency of sounds to carry farther at night. With armor the squeal and squeak of the tracks is louder than engine and easier to pinpoint. Note whistle Vs. yelling in base tone i.e note. This for hailing/calling others to your local. Detection of older Infantry fighting vehicle IFV 800 meters. For the newer Stryker, LAV or M-1 tank 200 m. Canon fire rounds are herd in coming, mortars are not. Average speech hard at a distance of 1320’ in a vacuum, or sound prove volt, 400’ out in the country side, 125’quite office/library, 40’ average office/department store, 12’ lobby or mall, 4’ at road side, 15” for subway. Sound range estimation by flash and sound. Sound travels through air at approximately 350 m/s, count seconds between flash and sound if you most count more than 9 seconds start over. Multiply number of seconds by 350 to get the range to weapons in hundreds of meters. Helicopter blades making different sounds at altitude, more of a cracking sound.

Mentioned on SP under warplanes F-35 has a fatal flaw. A decibel is defined as 10*log (P₁/P₀), which means "twice as loud" will add 10*log (2) = 3.01 decibels to the noise level. So, "Twice as loud" only means another 3 decibels and, since the power of sound decreases with the square of distance, 3 decibels is barely noticeable from far away. If the media stays out of it, I doubt anyone will notice.

(Reference, Appendix Defense rule # 5)

6) Choose and prepare fighting holes:

As with clearing fields of fire (rule # 8) and camouflaging area you must estimate time available not only to complete but remove if situation applies. Buildings with tin roofs make good positions, due to anti fire properties. Avoid older structures, if these must be occupied, extensive efforts are required to reduce the dangers of fire. Fires can double every 30 seconds

Smoke kills three ways, blocking oxygen into system, toxic fumes, lack of oxygen i.e. consuming it in the area.

Use the back of hand in a zig-zag patern when checking for heat behind door etc.

Cover attic and other wooden floors with one inch of sand or dirt. Position buckets of water or sand bags for immediate use. Water basins and bathtubs are filled. All electricity and gas are turned off. Firebreaks are created by destroying buildings adjacent to position. Corners and lower levels of buildings are stronger than else where. Destroyed vehicles make good fighting holes also existing craters caused by enemy or friendly fires. Do not choose isolated trees or bushes.

Snow covered terrain. On the down wind side of every obstacle, house, tree, or bush there is always a hallow, which may provide an excellent observation point or fighting hole. The wind particularly in open areas may form long wavy snow drifts and Snow banks along side plowed roads too. Either maybe used as an approach to objectives. Snow drifts are less of a problem in forest on hills or slopes. When preparing fighting holes you should team up, into teams of two or three. One for security one or two for working. Time to prepare the defense may be the most critical factor in selection of building or positions. Buildings that require extensive time consuming reinforcements, fire prevention measures or clearing of fields of fire should be avoided. With existing positions continuously improve, Marines constantly preparing fighting position (also areas used during assaults) for fallow on Marines. Add or remove rocks, dirt, sand bags, to fit your height. Fighting holes should be as deep as mans armpits. Estimated average time to dig, two hours. Stockpile extra sand bags in fighting holes as a fire-fighting aid. Sand bags are filled uniformly ¾ full, tie straps placed in bags and facing inward. Alternate placement of bags.

Urban setting any structures on the outside of a building that would assist scaling to gain access to upper floors or to the roof are removed or blocked. Remove glass, leave curtains and hang cloths in exits. Curtains and furniture cushions can reduce noises. Remove handrails and oil the stairs. Put claymores on the roof.

Inter walls removed, blankets hung to look like them. Clear walls for back blast 2 meters square hole. Open door at minimum. Ceiling 2 meters higher than weapon. Barricading or boarding up doors and windows leave many gaps. Avoid barricading only the windows to be used. Making loop holes, neat square or circular shapes avoided. Try to preserve looks of the outside. Have many false ones to conceal real. Should be cone shaped on the inside i.e. increasing size inwardly. Covered on inside with protective linings, such as an empty sandbag or wire mesh for protection from splinters caused by incoming rounds. Brick walls especially splinter when hit by bullets. The bottom should be loosened so grenades can be dropped outside. Covered completely with sandbags when not in use, to prevent the enemy from observing through them or keep enemy form detecting them. Conceal them behind pictures, drapes, furniture and shrubs. Create loop holes in roofs chimneys, mail drops, under door jams, under stairs though steps, though interior walls placed to cover hallways and unoccupied rooms. Loopholes in floors permit the defender to engage enemy on lower floors with small arms and/or to drop grenades. Avoid firing directly through a loophole. Use table or chairs to fire down from loop holes. Ground Floors, All doors not used by defenders are locked, nailed shut, and blocked with furniture or sandbags. Exit doors are booby trapped. Hallways/Stairs not required for the defender's movement are blocked with furniture and tactical wire. Floor level; if there is no basement, fighting holes are dug into the floor for additional protection against heavy direct-fire weapons. Frozen ground well provide better cover against artillery. Wet down floors and blankets in front of crew serve weapons to reduce dust and debris. Prone positions do not always permit sufficient freedom for firing at widely varying angles or at targets above the position. Holes for elbows lower profile. Weapons with top or side feed magazines or belts also reduces profile. Firing stakes one stake at stern/shoulder, or in pistol grip to indicate base. One left and one right to indicate left and right limits. Especially useful at night. SP instead of aiming stakes carry several empty sandbags. These can be filled on the spot (and emptied when it is time to move). Cross fields of view as will as fires. They should intersect at perimeter in the range of 33 yards. Purpose provides mutual support between adjacent units, reduces number of gaps in final protective fires. Perimeter should be convex i.e. curved slightly inward. As enemy approaches sides they come under increasing cross fires. Interlocking machine guns, located at corners to give greater chance to attack enemy’s flanks or stern. Crew served weapons produce the most KIA. The close proximity of others in the crew, which assists with ammo, provide security and the fire power of the weapon, reassures and helps suppress anxiety. Individuals tend to seek cover and not fire. Construct grenade slumps. These are made to absorb explosions of grenades. Floor is angled towards one corner where a hole is located. This has a small entry point only large enough for hand and length of arm to inter and hallow out cavern at base. Or there is the roof style type; floor is slanted from center in two directions like roof, with deep narrow gutter trench, surrounding edge of floor. In MOUT netting, sheets, fencing or chicken wire can be used to give some protection too. Wire screening (chicken wire) is preferable to camouflage netting because it will not burn readily. Camouflage floors with vegetation to conceal from air; do not use twigs or branches. Grenades that fine their way into your fighting hole well not roll into grenade slumps. In MOUT floors can be greased down or ball bearings/marbles used to cover floor, Marines would ware crampons or cleats. Rubbling certain parts of the building provide additional cover and concealment for weapon emplacement.

Positions with flat-roofs require anti-helicopter obstacles. Roofs accessible from adjacent structures are covered with tactical wire and guarded. Entrances to the building from the roof are blocked. Each position should have complete overhead and perimeter protection. Sand bag floors and or table tops over your position. Ceilings are reinforced with supports, all done to withstand the weight of rubble from upper floors. Removing or collapsing roofs, ceilings and floors, provides better protection against indirect fires, if Marines can locate themselves around large hole on upper floor or platforms extending from walls above ground level. Over head cover having (sun roof) for throwing grenades. When Marines expected to remain in area for a while equipment must be covered also with fighting holes in the field, tunnels are dug for protection from indirect fires. With snow structures use sticks for checking thickness of walls. Positions are made to appear flat when observed from ground level, or form air. Cover should blend in with the natural surroundings, vegetation and elevations. Smoothing cover/roofs by packing the snow (must be rounded off) in order to eliminate any sharp features that may produce shadows or reflections.

Vegetation can be exposed through top of netting or tarps. Surrounding vegetation i.e. living vines are pulled over the emplacement. The halve shelter the black triangle formed by the interior shadow can be seen a long way off, especially from the air. Conceal it by striking the front tent pole or by covering the opening and the outline of your tent with natural materials. Never pitch a shelter tent in daylight unless you are ordered to do so. The flat-top is an answer to the problem of concealing dug-in machine-gun positions. The simple flat-top requires no framework. Corner posts are not driven; they rest on the ground and are held in place by double strands. The whole structure is as low to the ground as possible. It can also be angled towards higher background, to best blend in with back ground. For a deliberate position, especially in terrain with natural foliage, the folding buggy-top conceals the machine gun which has an antiaircraft or all-around fire mission. It can be folded back quickly, allowing the gunners to engage aerial targets. For hinges use cloth or pieces of scrap leather, or stock door hinges. Take care that the vegetation around the position is not compressed by the buggy-top when it is open. Also in a deliberate position, the swinging flat-top (Figure 64) is a slightly more elaborate flat-top for anti-aircraft machine guns. It is a cantilever structure hinged on a post at one corner. It is easily pushed to one side, giving the gun an unobstructed view of the sky.

image edited, these I well add later.

Advantages of snow, protection from wind for engines when snow walls are built. Easy to dig trenches for communications. Trenches each Marine assigned a certain number of feet to prepare. As a rule observe odd numbers. Trenches covered with branches just before fresh snow fall to camouflage. Layer of branches, leafs placed under first layer of logs around fighting hole, to keep water from leaking in. Pykrete: Ice and sawdust mixture much stronger and melts much slower than regular ice. It is bullet resistant. And will actually float. There is also Ice create, water mixed with dirt, sand, gravel/rocks can be poured into wood forms and tamped, as it is poured. It is darker than ice or snow absorbs more heat. And therefore will melt quicker. You can cover it with snow, this well also reduce ricochets and provide camouflage. It will need repairs after fired upon. Encasement walls hollow interior filled with sand to absorb shock from battering rams. Also would have impeded entry by troops, sand harder to remove than bricks. Ground held to gather by roots of vegetation grass etc cut into bricks. Salient prominent conspicuous jutting walls curved around entrances, gates etc. Wide latus apparatus principle to block entrances also Claviculae (little hooks). Fighting holes constructed facing backwards, meaning in direction enemy will be traveling. So he walks right over into ambush. When position complete always view from foes view point. Penetration table: They had prepared boxes, containing wood, brick, earth and sand. From 100 yards, only the sand stopped it. On average bullets well pass through 13’ of newly fallen snow. If firmly frozen 8-10’, packed 6’, ice 3’, Pykrete or ice create 1½’. 18 inch thick walls of Afghan homes said to widthstand m-16s. Altitude higher oxygen less, ice becomes harder/concrete too. Body armor weight 9 oz per square inch, will stop 25, 22, and 38 caliber. 20oz for 9mm and 44 magnums. M-16A1 and A2 both weapons perform the same at 50m or less. The closer the range less penetration. At ranges of 25 m or less pent. greatly reduced. Round still yawing, angled at impact. Well ricochet or break up. At less than 50 m. 5.56 stopped by 18”-24” layer of books, one thickness of sandbags, 2” concrete, and 55 gallon drum filled with water or sand. Car door /body will inter may not exit. Over all at 45 degree angle ricochet percentage increases greatly. Rounds can ricochet on glass at a 45 degree angle. M16A1 maximum penetration is at 200 m. Pent. 120 mm. also 14 acrylic glass plates 1” thick each. 5.56 mm pent two plates/2”, 7.62 four plates and kinetic energy knocked all other plates down. Kevlar first developed 1970s for tires. Protection approval ratting, 2” diameter 44 cu mm max trauma/damage allowed. #5 boron carbine hardest ceramic mat known. Dragon skin ceramic desk material MFG company pinnacle armor in California.

SP 1/2000; troops are currently provided with the 20-year-old flak jackets which can stop shrapnel (not bullets). Added plates can stop 5.56mm bullets, but increase the weight to 25 pounds. The Interceptor jackets weigh less (only 16 pounds including their ceramic plates). They can stop shrapnel or 9mm bullets; the added ceramic plates can stop 7.62mm rounds.

M-16 well not pent. 8” of pine, at 28 yards the AK – 47 well.

SP Oct 2000; USMC MACHINEGUN TACTICS; "talking guns" tactic, two machineguns work in tandem. Each fires a short burst, then waits to hear the other before firing again. The doctrinal rate of fire is a burst of 6-8 rounds followed by a pause of 6-8 seconds. This ensures the bursts are six-eight seconds apart. As a practical matter, if friendly troops are not exposed while advancing on the target, a pause of 10-12 seconds will be adequate to keep the enemy pinned down. This doesn't really help when the guns are firing on different targets, although it does help each gun maintain its timing. It would be better to train each gun crew to count its own intervals as it is difficult in combat to hear clearly what the other gun crew is doing. There is also a tendency of one gun to increase its rate of fire when the second is reloading. One trick is for one gun to start with a 100-round belt and the other with 200 rounds. After firing the initial belt, each gun uses 200-round belts. This staggers reloading cycles. Doctrine calls for the gunner's left hand to remain on the elevating wheel of the traversing & elevation mechanism. This allows the gunner to adjust the fall of his rounds as needed or as directed by the team leader. Without intense training, however, the gunner has a tendency to move his hand back to the gun after each adjustment. This makes the weapon less stable and harder to adjust quickly. Training technique; tape a laser pointer to a cleaning rod. Insert this into the barrel of the weapon when dry firing inside a dimly-lit armory the team leader can track the abilities of the gunner to aim and adjust his weapon. The training of gun teams (on a static firing range) tends to make them think they are fighting alone rather than as a part of a platoon. Troops must be trained to maintain situational awareness. During training maneuvers, the team leader should periodically ask the team what else is going on around them to encourage them to note the broader picture. When two machineguns are working together the junior gun crew should be deployed farther forward than the senior crew. This will allow the senior team leader to keep an eye on the other gun and coordinate barrel changes and reloading. It could be hoped that at least 60% of operations are offensive in nature, but 95% of machinegun training is in defensive tactics and engagements. Gun crews should be trained in how to select and occupy a firing position while remaining under cover. Gun crews should carry empty sandbags to help them set up interim firing positions during an advance. If they have access to a vehicle, they should have filled bags on the floor to use and get the gun into action faster. Medium machineguns (M60 or M240) are not the same as heavy machineguns or Mark-19 grenade launchers. Gunners moved from one system to the other require formal retraining in order to establish the mindset. Medium guns use high rates of fire to suppress positions or break up attacks. Heavy machineguns are best for attacking vehicles or bunkers. Mark-19s are best when used to engage light armor, heavy bunkers, or troops in defilade. Mark-19 grenade launcher crews need to remember that they are one of the few weapons capable of engaging enemy forces behind cover or in defilade If Mark-19 rounds are striking a target which other weapons could engage and take out, something is wrong. Mark-19 ammunition is bulky and should not be used when other weapons can do the same job. The 40mm grenades will penetrate two inches of steel armor while .50-cal machinegun rounds will penetrate only one inch, so if the target is lightly armored, the .50 - cal may be the best weapon for the job.

Sp Firing tables at altitude are inaccurate and need to be redone.

Artillery ammunition storage and handling is very important in a dry, hot environment.

Very hot ammunition will affect the ballistic solution, which will cause the round to impact long or short of its intended target.

Digging in storage positions for ammunition will keep it cooler.

(Reference, Def. rule # 8 and COE, Armor, “The factors of cover”)

7) Establish communications:

LINES OF COMMUNICATION (LoC) a vast network of modern highways, all-weather roads, railroads, and canals connect built-up areas. These LoCs can permit rapid access to virtually all areas. Modern four-lane highways, capable of accommodating thousands of heavy vehicles, crisscross NATO-Europe. Frequently, these highways bypass the larger cities, or at least avoid the congested centers of most built-up areas. Limitations; they are often built across terrain that is relatively impracticable for vehicular traffic and are heavily dependent on bridges, ramps, overpasses and tunnels. They should not be used unless suitable bypasses are available.

Note 4^th GW; Every effort should be made to prevent destruction of the local telephone system, radio and TV stations, police, taxi or other commercial company radio systems and other communication facilities. They are already in place and there use by our forces provides immediate access to wire communications with overhead and buried cable. Local media, such as newspapers, provide communication with the locals. Wire can be laid while friendly forces are in static positions, but careful planning is necessary. When running lines and wire for phones they are laid through walls and floors, berry them use underground systems ditches, culverts, and tunnels to keep the wire below the streets, or use existing telephone poles to raise wire lines above the streets. All done to protect against vehicles and other traffic. Do not run wires directly across fields to your positions. Antennas should be hidden or blended in with the surroundings. Locate them among civilian TV antennas, up the side of a chimney, water towers, steeple, on roof slopes or out a back window away from the enemy observation and knock holes in walls below rooftop level for directional antennas. Consider parking radio-equipped vehicles inside buildings dismount radio and install it inside buildings (in basements); place generators against buildings or under sheds to increase noise absorption.

(Reference, Step # 3 concepts of operations, Three levels)

Trouble shooting radios; 1) Check function switch no/off. 2) Battery and power source. 3) Connections of wires, plugs, Antenna well mount. 4) Ck frequency, channel or station. 5) Hand set switch, mike switch. Throat microphone reduces back ground noises. Units should perform radio checks at a distance.

In MOUT Ground search radars GSR and remote electronic monitoring systems REMS have limited use in the center of cities. They are best employed on the outskirts to monitor traffic into and out of. If necessary GSR can be used to cover large open areas such as parks. REMS can be used in sub terrain areas. IR used at airports etc. to check to see if people have fevers. Note the five by five i.e. loud and clear vs. lets say three by five i.e. weak but clear etc. first number represents signal strength second number represents the single clarity or reliability.

Decide on signals; Visual signals, such as arm-and-hand signals, Sign language viewed through telescopes.

Sign language/hand signals can be used if foe is at close range. This is also necessary when working with foreign troops. Whenever passing word IMO due so loud clear and once, i.e. repeated at proper intervals only. In other words if you barely heard it chances are the next Marine did not hear it, or if the Marine beyond you is not observed or heard passing the word. In addition, IMO Marines, gangs and sports teams for that mater should teach and use official International sign language. Not some customized limited back on the block signals someone with too much time on their hands (lol) came up with, meaning new arrivals must learn it to be effective members. Everyone using ISL would promote it worldwide thus making communication with civilians easier too. IMO the coding of any messages should not be in the signal its self but in the way words are interpreted, that could also change maybe depending on the date being an odd or even number. Example; you may say or sign to your unit “departure well be around 0;00 hours, or we depart about 0;00 hours”. In the first statement you here the word (around) in your mind you know that means to go around 0;00 hours, in other words 01;00 hours, in the second statement you hear (about) you know that means in your mind you due an about face and you are facing 23;00 hours. Anyone may see you signing the message, they may know what you communicated they don’t know the correct interpretation. However they believe they do after all they know ISL and so they may waste time and effort planning based on that incorrect interpretation. Rhythm even but broken into logical parts speak slightly slower and louder than normal with higher pitch for clarity.

Pyrotechnics, or make use of smoke signals too. Recon using flares, balloons or Church bells to report sightings or movements of the enemy. The Mujahideen scouts fired flares to mark location of targets. Marking panels are also excellent means for communicating. When used for extended periods their meanings should change. Since foe may capture or manufacture copies. The noise in built up areas makes it difficult to use audio signals.

Messengers provide security and flexibility; Dogs used for messengers or to reach isolated O/Ps and L/Ps their mess tins packed with ammo as well. Carrier pigeons 60 mph, 600 miles max range. With guerrillas, letters should not be written from post office in same area or close to receiver. They should be sent to support group, community center then delivered by carrier. False return address. Invisible ink using a dip pen, written on plain sheet of paper. Use milk, vinegar, lemon, apple juice or urine. Paper would be held up to light or over candle to read. Another method of heating is ironing. Chemical solutions which are colorless dry also appear as various colors if they are treated with another solution. It is also possible to dissolve an aspirin (not child’s) in alcohol then dip a cotton ball in solution and whip over message. Cipher using later of alphabet out of sequence by one place. Passing notes in cigarette pack. Using a stick of a certain diameter, a strip of paper or tape with letters written on it, would be read by wrapped strip around stick to align letters. Resume used to communicate on internet. Collogue of photos that form an image. Perspective view art and holographic tech for covert communications. Batman laser writing in clouds, read with IR set to frequency. LEDs communicator could work shutter (spring loaded) device with string etc. Lessening tactic floating balloon to alt. than hitting it with laser or Farphoon. Note non lethal or less lethal (L RAD) i.e. long range acoustic system, these systems can also project messages or lesson to conversations. When used on small boats on rough seas it can be difficult to keep beam on target. Marines’ equipment with international calling codes that can be used on landlines in foreign nation.

Spinning flashlight on a core or rope as a signaling tactic. Makes large hallo of light.

Install and defend cellphone relays concealed in buildings.

If cellphones fail, direct civilians with color-coded fireworks.

Bikers with cellphones in their helmets can spot for mortar crews.

U.S. Works to Deploy Secret Internet, Mobile Phone Systems For Dissidents

New details have emerged about a secret U.S. effort to deploy shadow Internet and mobile phone systems overseas to give political dissidents a way to communicate with the world free of government censorship. The New York Times reports the project involves developing what has been described as an "Internet in a suitcase" that would allow dissidents to use “mesh network” technology to create an invisible wireless web without a centralized hub. Part of the effort is being led by Sascha Meinrath, director of the Open Technology Initiative at the New America Foundation. Meinrath described part of the project on Democracy Now! in April.

Sascha Meinrath, New America Foundation, Open Technology Initiative Director: “So we’ve been working on a number of technologies to develop distributed communication systems, so that you can turn cell phones, for example, into a medium that doesn’t need to go through a cell tower, a central location, but communicate in a peer-to-peer manner, directly with one another. And so, you can imagine if you daisy-chain a lot of these together, you can actually have an entire network built out of the already existing hardware that doesn’t need a central authority.”

Prowords and their explanations;

All After…. The part of the message to which I refer is all of that which follows.

All Before…. The part of the message to which I refer is all of that which precedes.

Authenticate…. The station called is to reply to the challenge which follows.

Authentication is…. The Transmission authentication of this message is --------

I Authenticate…. The group that follows is the reply to your challenge to authenticate.

Break…. I hereby indicate the separation of the text from other parts of the message.

Correct…. You are correct, or what you have transmitted is corrected.

Correction….. An error has been made in this transmition. Transmission will continue with the last word correctly transmitted. An error has been made in this transmission (or message indicated). The correct version is -----. That which follows is a corrected version in answer to your request for verification.

Flash…. Flash precedence is reserved for alerts, warnings, or other emergency actions having immediate bearing on national, command, or area security (e.g., Presidential use; announcement of an alert; opening of hostilities; land , air, or sea catastrophes; intelligence reports on matters leading to enemy attack; potential or actual nuclear accident or incident; implementation of services unilateral emergency action procedures).

From…. The originator of this message is indicated by the address designator immediately following.

Groups…. This message contains the number of groups indicated by the numeral following.

Immediate…. Immediate precedence is reserved for vital communications that (1) have an immediate operational effect on tactical operations, (2) directly concerns safety or rescue operations, (3) affect the intelligence community operational role (e.g., initial vital reports of damage due to enemy action; land, sea, or air reports that must be completed from vehicles in motion such as operational mission aircraft; intelligence reports on vital actions in progress; natural disaster or widespread damage; emergency weather reports having an immediate bearing on mission in progress; emergency use for circuit restoration; use by tactical command posts for passing immediate operational traffic.)

I read back…. The following is my response to your instructions to read back.

I say again…. I am repeating transmission or part indicated.

I spell…. I shall spell the next word phonetically.

Message….a message which requires recording is about to follow. Transmitted immediately after the call. (This proword is not used on nets primarily employed for conveying messages. It is intended for use when messages are passed on tactical or reporting nets

0.)

More to follow…. Transmitting station has additional traffic for the receiving station.

Out…. This is the end of my transmission to you and no answer is required.

Over…. This is the end of my transmission to you and no answer is required. IMO this is the end of my transmission and you may now reply.

Priority…. Priority precedence is reserved for calls that require prompt completion for national defense and security, the successful conduct of war, or to safeguard life or property, and do not require higher precedence (e.g., reports of priority land, sea, or air movement; administrative, intelligence, operational or logistic activity calls requiring priority action; calls that world have serious impact on administrative, intelligence, operational or logistic activities if handled as a ROUTINE call.) Normally, PRIORITY will be the highest precedence that may be assigned to administrative matters for which speed of handling is of paramount importance.

Radio Check…. What is my signal strength and readability. In other words, how do you read (hear) me?

Read back….. Repeat this entire transmission satisfactorily, and loud and clear.

Routine…. Routine precedence is reserved for all official communications that do not require flash, immediate, or priority precedence.

Say Again…. Repeat your last transmission or the part indicated.

Silence…. (Repeated three or more times), Cease transmissions on the net immediately.

Silence Lifted, Silence is lifted. (When an authentication system is in force, the transmission lifting silence is to be authenticated).

Speak Slower…. You are transmitting too fast, slow down.

This is….. This transmission is from the station whose designation immediately follows.

Time….. That which immediately follows is the time or date-time group of the message.

To…. The addressees immediately following are addressed for action.

Unknown station….The identity of the station with whom I am attempting to communicate is unknown.

Wait…. I must pause for a few seconds.

Wait out…. I must pause longer then a few seconds.

Wilco…. I have received your signal, understand it, and will comply. To be used only by the addressee. As the meaning of ROGER is included in that of WILCO, the two prowords are never used together.

(Reference, COE, rule # 1 Flash report, attack commands and Appendix DEF rule # 7)

8) Clear fields of fire:

Before clearing estimate how much can be done in time available. Start clearing near your position, clear narrow lanes in an irregular pattern. Avoid making tracks in your sector of fire and area as lanes are cleared. Under snow conditions burst of machine gun fire can cause long black streak shadows indicating location of positions. Cut lower branches of large trees. Thin under brush; leave a then natural screen of vegetation to hide position. Clear away anything that obscures your view or rounds going down range, out to max effective range of small arms. Every thing removed is brought back to your position and used or destroyed. Stroke upward on tress to limit sound.

9) Construct obstacles:

Also known as combat multipliers, supporting and subsidiary means that significantly increases the relative combat strength of a force while actual force ratios remain the same. Obstacles parallel (same direction at a fixed distance) to direction of attack may assist in protecting the flank of attacker. Obstacles perpendicular favor defense. In MOUT, cars can be filled with sand etc. and rolled around. Barricades are defended from a distance, because you have no protection from grenades or indirect fire. Obstacle losses 50 % of its effectiveness if not defended. Wire is meant to slow or canalize foe into fields of fire. Tactical wire is located within machine gun fields of fire to delay foe during FPF. Protective wire is located just out beyond grenade range. With barb wire check for booby traps and early warning devises, pull on it with rope and grappling hook. You can also pull it away from riot police. Use smoke to conceal your crossing over wire. Use materials like cardboard, chicken wire, wood etc. When going under place weapon lengthwise so it will slide along. Cutting your way though, cut only lowest wire, lease chance of being discovered. Wrap cloth around wire before cutting it. Combat engineers aka pioneers or sappers. Highly trained not as easily replaced as infantry. Their mission is mobility for blue forces, counter mobility of foe. MT. warfare roads, more cut and fill types, built as situation changes not preconceived plans. Roads fallow contour lines but not along crest or ridges. Sappers also used to set up elaborate defensives quickly. Weapons: mines, special explosives, flame throwers. USMC Wolverine also USMC Grizzly combat engineer vehicle CEV.

SP 10/2000; mobile/herd mines, acoustic microphones, IR can detect and rearrange to max attack. So work to develop a mine similar to the early 1980s model, except that this one would use a pneumatic piston to pop the mine 30 feet into the air. This would force enemy troops to spend a lot more time trying to clear these mobile anti-vehicle mines. Meanwhile, the mines could also radio friendly artillery to fire a few shells to the mine field. While anti-personnel mines are illegal, artillery is still legit.

Prepare

Dig pitfalls for tanks with a diesel storage tank in the bottom. Booby trap ten manhole covers for each bunker, must not impede your own traffic. Re-pave the city.

10) Cover dead spaces:

Any area you cannot attack the enemy with direct fire. Example leeward side of a hill, a Slope, depression, large bolder, group of trees etc. You must assign these areas to mortars, artillery, Grenadier or body trap them. Mortar dead space ½ the height of building. Artillery 5 times the height. With tank 30 m. to 10 m height. 3-1 ratio distance from target that is to height of impact. Remember dead spaces can be directional; you might be able to cover area from one direction in defense position. However, during counter attack or if enemy shifts direction, different areas could become dead spaces.

11) Organize a Final protective fire F.P.F.:

This is rigging up position for self-destruction, incase enemy over runs. You will have prepared a strong point at command post C/P. This is where unit gathers for protection. F.P.F. can be done in shifts i.e. layers. Every Marine should empty magazines while falling back and destroy all equipment you cannot take with you.

Weapons coverage;

60mm x2 tubes 60x30m

81mm x4 tubes 100x35m

105mm howitzer x 6 guns 180x 40m

107mm mortar x 3 tubes 150x40m

107mm mortar x 6 tubes 300x40m

120mm mortar ?

155mm howitzer x 4 guns 200x50m

155mm howitzer x 6 guns 300x50m

155 mm howitzer x 8 guns 400x50m

Area being bombarded by artillery becomes a no fly zone.

12) Dig tunnels, trenches and prepare avenues between positions:

In general this is done so supplies can be distributed and forces can be shifted quickly. Trenches staggered i.e. dug on zigzag course. Dug under the cover of darkness or use smoke, to conceal digging. Shovel out dirt, snow in direction of enemy. Dispose of excess soil by covering it with leaves, place it under brush or flush it down streams. Also clearing of creeks and digging drainage ditches around shelters and tents. Sufficient routes are required to permit defending forces to move within the building or base to engage enemy forces in any direction. Additionally, small holes are made in walls to permit movement between rooms. House holing corner holes in ceilings could provide access to multiple rooms maybe four or eight. Note removing frames or beams may weaken structure too. Would be best to choose location of ceiling wall juncture. Wall would aid with climbing. Avoid the center of ceilings or floors. Loop holes are concealed behind furniture and blocked with sandbags when not in use. Movement between floors is accomplished by knocking holes in ceilings/floors and using ropes or a ladder that can be quickly installed or removed. Once the defender has withdrawn to upper floors, these holes are blocked with timbers and furniture. Escape routes to permit rapid evacuation are clearly marked for night and day due to smoke and dust. All personnel are briefed and practice evacuation over different routes.

Connect the bunkers with tunnels to deliver ammo by rail.

13) Stock pile supplies:

Not all of the same items stored in same place. Stored in order you well use or need items. Dessert, water in plastic jugs will be good for up to 72 hours, Water in metal containers is safe only for 24 hours, if water trailers are kept cool, water is considered fresh and safe to drink, up to 5 days. The ice should be removed from tanks before moving them. Note best to use crushed ice or allow it to melt before moving tank. Water containers stored in the shade and benefit from an air draft. In an area protected from puncture or shrapnel. Able to be easily dismounted in case of vehicle evacuation. When you become thirsty you will be about a "quart and a half low" Drink before you work; carry water in your belly, do not "save" it in your canteen. Water purification one gallon of clear water requires 8 drops of bleach, cloudy 16 drops. 5 gallons clear ½ teaspoon, cloudy 1 teaspoon. Aid relief agencies generally avoid putting stations close to boarders of hot spots to discourage migration and prevent aid workers or supplies being captured.

COOKING

High altitude 25 degrees extra added to temperature 375 vs. 350 and two table spoons of floor added to cake mix at or above 3500 feet. The minimum daily fuel consumption per Yukon stove was approximately five gallons of gasoline per 8 to 12 hours of operation. Only cold rations served on patrols, eliminates heat and odder signatures.

(Reference, Appendix, Administration and logistics)

14) Plan your counter attack:

With retreats at night there is less observation or pursuits. Winter gives the advantage to the retreat; in open areas positions are not always visible. Upon retreats take spoils of the slain. The unit driven off loses more than the battle. Have scouts recon retreat routes. Routes should not be steep, thick or confined. In Forrest roads are blocked with fallen trees, as obstacle for your pursuer. Marines must see it as a means to drawl the enemy into an ambush. Cavalry withdrawn last to conceal infantry movements. Appoint stay behind troops. Retreating unit may reverse and attack sleeping pursuer. River crossings and narrow passes provide good time for pursuer to time intercept, or a reverse. The maxim of Scorpio; “that the golden bridge be made. When they have room to escape they think of nothing but”. An adversary is more hurt by desertion then by slaughter. On the contrary given no way out, adversary becomes a match for any attacker. From the very fact that they have no recourse but in despair the conquered safety is to hope for none. Counter attack enemy in the midst of joy after victory. For where loses and advantages are nearly equal he is reputed to have the superiority who rears up against his misfortunes with greatest resolution. He should therefore be first if possible to seize the spoils of the slain and to make rejoicing for victory. Often those who first loss, in the end are victorious. Deliberate encirclement as a defensive tactic. Marines stayed put and held out. Aloud attackers to sweep pass but inflected damage and casualties on them, all the while denying key points, intersections etc. Playing off the offensives goal to maintain the advance. Once encircled go into defensive mode, seize heights, restrict vehicle traffic, it saves fuel and you have the inside routes of the circle, so the enemy must go around.

In WWII interesting mention is made of the Carriers i.e. modern IFVs being used to establish outposts and support existing ones. This was qualified by the caution ‘they MUST be withdrawn at night’. When the conditions of the battlefield restricted the intended deployment of the Carrier, it was swiftly put to other uses. A British style Infantry Battalion had an enviable concentration of motor transport by comparison to other formations. While soft skin vehicles could not be used to ferry troops forward or casualties back under fire, Carriers could. This latter role was particularly important and helped save many lives. Fresh supplies of ammunition, food, water and other necessities could also be moved. APC can also ram buildings to breech them.

construct

15) Develop alternate and supplementary positions:

Alternate position to be occupied when primary one has become unsuitable for carrying out unit’s task. Located so that individuals or units can continue to carry out original task. Supplementary is a position from which over all situation must be reevaluated. Basically this is doing everything over again two more times.

Conduct of the defense

Joke; the enemy’s diversion you’re ignoring is the main attack. Troops should not man their fighting holes continuously; they well only give their locations away. Man them continuously when in thick terrain, during bad weather or at night. Sense foe can get in close and surprise you. Historically, darkness of night the necessity of sleep, dispersion of the horses in the pasture/modern vehicles under maintenance, affords opportunity for surprise.

Attacks also at night or in the morning; since these are hours of refreshment, meals and or showers. All Marines should be alerted and ready any time patrols exit camp, also kept at a distance from exits. When you wake up, get up, could be something woke you. Eat sleep and maintenance is done in shifts.

(Reference, Preparation and conduct of patrol, rule # 14)

Commander is positioned for max view of battle field, so to direct fire, through tracers fired by designated shooters. Cmdrs, F.O. or DMRs can use tracers in the day time and lasers at night to mark targets. Cmdr engages only if direct action is needed to turn the battle. Best way to truly soften up defense is through psychological means. Defenders that are fighting for something they believe in are difficult to demoralize. Enemy will usually have preemptory fire to soften up position. This is when you man positions. Check behind you often and always be prepared for hand to hand combat. Steel blades ready. Obey all commands and fields of fire. Do not shoot at some one far off to one side of your position. He well be in someone else’s field. Remember when using grenades they won’t give your position away and there’s no need to see the enemy. They are tossed at angles not strait out. Advantages of defense; by assuming a defensive posture a unit doubles or triples its firepower. The defender under cover is difficult to see. The attacker is nervously aware of the invisibility, this leads to panic. Attackers see comrades being hit by unseen defense. The defense also sees this and is encouraged. Defensive casualties are not seen by attacker or defense, further widening morale. Defense knows, safety is as close as the bottom of the fighting hole. When attacker goes for cover the attack brakes down. However, ultimately a defense produces only various degrees of defeat. If the defense dose manage to clobber attacker, it well only be rewarded with orders to counter attack.

(Reference, Step # 2, Leadership guidelines, Company cmdr, “reserves” and “Relief forces” below)

If next attack well succeed. A well timed retreat, will force enemy to waist time and supplies attacking empty position, thus weakening enemy for counter attack. If foe is repelled pursue with steady stream of fire i.e. shoot them right in the back! When soldiers are fleeing, you can kill them as fast as you can fire. Make a damage report, note all KIA, WIA, and MIA, which you are aware of. Do an ammo count, so it can be redistributed. All information is reported to command. Then reestablish O/Ps and L/Ps. Re-camouflage; if your fighting hole was not found during first attack, chances are it won’t be assaulted during second attack. If enemy over runs the position, you will see the FPF visual signals. You then retreat to strong point. FPF can be in the form of CAS, guns from ship or shore, or explosives rigged on site. “Relief forces” are best brought up in day light. Routes forward can lead through basements, tunnels, halve walls etc. If troops brought up during darkness they lack orientation. Use face of buildings across street for marking boundaries.

In the advance, it is possible to bypass certain obstacles, or at least fix them with fire. In the defense, any reverse gives the attacker a toehold in the position.

Over all tips

Reasons to assume: 1) Hold key terrain for surveillance etc. 2) Make plans. 3) Gather supplies, make repairs.

4) Rest. Good defensive planning discourages attack. Frederick the great “Little mines try to defend everything at once, but sensible people look at the main point, they parry the worst blows and stand a little hart, if there by avoiding the grater one. If you hold everything you control nothing”. Thus if they are prepared to defend to the front the stern will have few. If to the port, starboard has few. All positions all few. Position should be defendable by 1/3 of total force. Economy of force in one area to mass in another, this is taking every third man from one area and sending them elsewhere. In general fire should be opened ASAP to hamper offence during preparations for attack. Historically with stone throwing (Futtiablus range 600’) the attacker is often more annoyed by stones then arrows. Stones can kill without mangling body or loss of blood. Position your forces in depth and place obstacles in depth. Gives you the ability to absorb attackers initial blow, and time and space to figure out what he’s up to, develop situation, maneuver and concentrate your power where it is needed. Your choice of square, triangle or oblong shape depends on terrain. The circle provides best defense. Perimeter depth, one third the length, if area to small it confines Marines, to large they well be to dispersed. During summer place yourselves near water. In winter near foliage and wood. Raking lines in dirt or sand of perimeter to detect traffic. Guidelines to assist lost Marines should not be strait (i.e. lead right to base). Parapet built with under cut notches to allow lateral communications. Notches cut to depth below base of walls to detect tunnels (mining). Reasons not to set up a defense: Area consisting of lightly constructed buildings of flammable material. Next to hazardous industrial site, area around site is dominating. Avoid outer limits of cites to leave a buffer zone. Buildings located on the edge will be targets of direct fire weapons. In certain situations, requirements for security and fields of fire will require the occupation of exposed buildings. In such cases, additional reinforcing construction is necessary to provide suitable protection. Multiple buildings provide mutual support. Single buildings can be isolated or by passed. In dessert static/stationary defense is rare, due to the fact that there is very little difference from one location or another. No real advantage, enemy can easily by pass or isolate. Bad weather slows operations which reduces casualties. Loses from disease and sickness increase. Cumulative effect slows things up by 50 %, this reduces casualties even more. Chemical weapons have same effect. Although with a slightly higher casualty rate. Flat open terrain speeds up operations. If fast pace maintained more fatigue more casualties. Bare ground and good weather favored offence. Thick terrain and bad weather favor the defense. Buildings reduced to rubble make better cover and concealment than those left standing. Mountain warfare Defensive advantages, dominant terrain provides defense with and denies the attacker observation and firing positions. A good area for position is around the edges of small clearing. This is true for all terrain. Hill sides and ridge slopes are less traveled. Cold air sinks warm rises so camp high on mountain slopes but still in tree line. Cons: Difficulty in digging fighting holes, more time needed. Lack of roads restricts vehicle usage and makes them vulnerable. Small unit nature of mountain warfare, makes it difficult to coordinate and conduct counter attacks, and for the shifting of support. Pack artillery/mortars are used more often. Supporting fire is likely just before reaching objective on windward side. Infantry attacking over rising terrain is easier to support, up to the point of reaching the objective, than one over descending terrain. Although impacts may dislodge rocks or cause avalanches endangering attacker. Grazing fire is poor to impossible. Wooden slopes and cliffs make surprise attacks possible at multiple points. Chinese troops frequently burrowed through the snow crest from reverse slope to forward slope.

There is considerable divergence of opinion as to the use of the reverse slope for reorganization but all agree that effective measures must be taken to protect against the retaliatory artillery fire placed on the objective. The four main methods of evading this fire are: 1) Press on forward to next defiladed area. 2) Pull bulk of unit back onto reverse slope, leaving only outposts on forward slope. 3) Move bulk of unit to one flank of the objective.

4) Dig in promptly and hang on until dark. Ridge position lee vs. windward, i.e. yin and yang. Lee/yin being side enemy can not see you. Windward/yang being the side they can see you. On the Lee side enemy can’t see you as well to keep tabs on you, but you can’t see them either, so surprise is in there favor. Your defensive weapons are only effective out to the range of the ridge crest. It well be tricky for enemy to cross crest, but once over he will be on down hill slope. Nether you or them can use direct fire weapons or adjust indirect fire weapons as well. Windward side now both can see each other better. Defensive small arms are now effective to max range. Enemy must attack up hill, both you and them can use direct fire weapons and adjust indirect fire better. Defense now has ridge crest to use for cover during FPF i.e. unit can retreat to opposite side as strong point. You choose yin or yang side, based on size of forces and types of weapons available to both sides, mission and nature of the terrain: Degree of enemy observation depends on hour of the day. Reverse ridge/corner tactic, this is positioning a few on one side, many on other. Also used with corners of buildings or intersections. Works two ways, if few attacked many over whelm attacker. If many attacked few maneuver and surprise enemy. The crossing of a linier valley and assault of a well defended ridge are similar to the forging of a river. The purpose of crossing a small unit is to establish a foot hold, to protect crossing of larger unit.

(Reference, PCP, rule # 13, below)

A Platoon had the resources to defend in depth. A Platoon Commander could commit two of his Squads to the main line, placing his third to provide cover fire or deal with any breach of the position. However defense in depth truly begins with the Rifle Company. A Company would normally occupy a frontage of at least two Platoons, with the third held as reserve. It was not uncommon though for the situation to demand the Company defend a line in length rather than depth. This was a particularly unappealing prospect, as it gave the Commander little way of responding to a breach into his position. In a normal defensive position though, the Company would adopt a horseshoe style stance, with two Platoons placed forward, and the third again adopting a reserve role. It would be placed between and to the rear of the forward units. Conducting the defense in depth gave the Company a greater chance of repelling the assault.

(Reference, COE, general combat tips, weapons employment)

Glacier bivouac procedures, when locating a bivouac site where the team well un-rope, "probe" the area for hidden crevasses. The probe pole, at least eight feet in length. Other rope team members will belay the probers. Probers are "feeling" for a solid platform to place the tent. Probing should be in 2-foot intervals in all directions within the site. Attempts to outline crevasses can be futile if a crevasse is large. Normally, the best decision is to relocate. Mark boundaries of site with wands or other items. Snow walls are constructed to protect the tent from storms with high winds. At a minimum, build walls on the windward side of the site. The walls should be slightly higher than the tent. Walls can be constructed from blocks cut from consolidated snow layers. In deep snow, digging three or four feet to find a consolidated layer will result in enough snow moved to build up decent walls around the site. Cut blocks approximately 1 by 1 by 2 feet, and construct the walls by interlocking the blocks with overlapping placements. Notes snow must be at least 10 inches thick to provide insulation form cold. Bare earth has at least a 50 degrees temperature due to thermal heat, this is true any where on earth.

Tall building are the high ground and will be the center of fighting.

Defenders must be volunteers. Buildings will eventually be lost. Buildings cannot be retaken. Tunnel in and blow the foundation.

Preparations and conduct of patrols

1) Check your perimeter;

This is around area, buildings, camp, room or vehicle, before leaving or exiting. You’re looking for enemy in waiting or signs of activity past or present. With sub terrain entries point man inters and waits just inside for 10 minutes to check air. Should remain farther ahead during patrols too. Debark subs in pairs in case buddy breathing is necessary due to malfunction of equipment, and pair up any time operating in water. Patrols should never leave base from an out post especially under snow conditions. Least they leave tracks back to post. A number of patrols may be deployed to 'screen' a large area, for instance with armored formations in desert theatres or infantry in MOUT. “Lay dog” pop a squat i.e. this is having your unit set up in a defensive position just outside base and just wait and lessoning for a while. Like with Urban patrols pausing now and then to just lesson i.e. stop and “lay dog” to listen for anything out of place. Maneuvering units can use sounds of battle and guns for guidance i.e. as means of staying within range of objective.

DOG TRACKING TEAMS; Dog is trained not to bark. The dog can be used to locate sentries or determine the extent of emplacements and may assist in positioning troops for an ambush, without being detected by enemy. A great many insurgents wounded in ambushes get away. The tracker group should not form part of the ambush party, but should stand by at RP ready to move when the ambush has been sprung. While small and lightly armed, they increase the area a security unit can search. When looking for sniper teams, trolling along roads or intersections is a favorite tactic of tracking teams. Trackers also use wood line sweeps and area searches. Since wood line sweeps tend to be less specific, trackers perform them faster. A wood line sweep if the wind is blowing through the woods and out of the wood line, trackers move 50 to 100 meters inside a wooded area. Wind direction determines whether the sweep will be parallel to the edge, as well as outside or 50 to 100 meters inside the wood line. If the search is started up wind of your position, searches well move away from you. The best position for the dog team is directly in front of the patrol/stick i.e. search team. The stick can track visually from the flanks, and the dog and handler well guide. If the stick loses the signs, then the dog can take over. An area search is used when a search location is specific such as a small wooded area or block of houses. The search area is cordoned off, if possible, and the dog/handler teams are brought on line, about 25 to 150 meters apart, depending on terrain and visibility. The handler hides behind cover with the dog. He searches for movement and then sends the dog out in a straight line. The handler may control the dog with whistles, gestures or voice commands that maybe transmitted to speaker on dog’s collar. He remains undercover, directing the dog in a search pattern. Usually, when the dog has moved about 50 to 75 meters, the handler calls the dog back. The handier then moves slowly forward and always from covered position to covered position. The search line moves forward with each dog dashing back and forth in assigned sectors. Fight or flight? Eliminating or injuring the dog or handler only confirms that there is a hostile in the area. One dog can be dealt with relatively easy with a knife or large club. Dogs are quick and will try to strike the throat, groin or limbs. The sniper must keep low and strike upward using the wrist, never overhand. (lie down with your arms bear hugging your own neck). If alone and faced with two or more dogs, avoid this situation. Dogs are so reliable that if the dog does not return immediately, the handler knows something is wrong. The handlers rely on radios and often do not have visual contact with each other. So the sniper team may have the opportunity to eliminate the handler and to escape the search net. The best time is as the dog is recalled. If a handler is eliminated after he has released the dog, but before he has recalled it, the dog continues to randomly search out and away from the handler for several minutes. The dog may return to another handler or to his former handler's last position. This creates a gap from 25 to 150 meters wide in the search pattern. The eliminated handler will probably be quickly missed from the radio net. Response times by other searchers tends to be fast.

Climatic factors favorable to scenting conditions: Air and ground temperatures approximately the same. Dull, damp weather. A dog can track faster than a man, and it can track at night. The dogs will track well at night, in the early mornings and late evenings. Under the most favorable conditions, it will be quite feasible to follow tracks up to 24 hours old. Some dogs can (depending on weather and wind) sense the target two hundred meters away. The dog will normally follow the freshest track, but he will, if “given the scent” from personal clothing or belongings, discriminate and follow the scent of that particular quarry. Even scent of disturbed vegetation caused by man’s passing.

Climatic factors adverse to scenting conditions: Hot sun, strong winds, heavy rains, tarmac roads, rock and other hard surfaces. Dust and running water. Dogs are attracted quickly to and distracted by movement. Dogs are as sensitive to the elements as humans. It should be realized that dogs tire easily, and therefore they should only be used for tracking when visual tracking becomes very difficult or impossible. If the tracks become visible once more visual tracking should be resumed to conserve the dog’s strength and concentration. Dogs pant, make other noises, and are smelly. They also crap and piss. Patrols tend to expect the dog to perform miracles and relax their alertness. Counters available to the sniper team. NOTE; sniper teams should always operate in the counter tracking mode. Hides located in woodpiles, never establish a position at the edge of cover and concealment. Surround the site with a 3-cm to 5-cm band of motor oil to mask odor; although less effective but easier to carry, garlic may be used. A dead animal can be used, although it may attract unwanted wild canine attention. It is critical to try to obscure or limit tracks around the hide. Try to approach the position on hard, dry ground or along a stream or river. Remain as faraway from the targets area as possible. Urinate in streams or rivers or in a hole and cover it up. Never urinate in the same spot. With feces use MRE bags sealed with tape (melting fold) and take it with you. Carry all trash until it can be buried elsewhere. Think like the dog, they think in scent pictures not in images. The dog is trained to avoid baits, or cover odors used to throw it off the ‘track. You can try traveling in increasing circles, zigzag, or figure 8. Switch modes of transportation bike, skates, use short removable bridges, swing threw tress like Tarzan, all set up prior to being needed. Use stilts with single or multiple i.e. tripod base. Plank, pole or magic carpet walking, a Plank, pole or carpet is walked over then placed back out in front of you again. Turning up earth to cover scent, dampen surface of soil. Carefully disguising your own scent with grass or earth. Try to smell like local animals, especially females, furs raped around shoes. Save piss, shit, yours and animals etc. piss on your souls, two scents one shoe on one off. Lure techniques, a string anchored to you i.e. hold on to it, with cloth tide to end that is flung out in some direction then dragged back. Might be flung back over your actual tracks to re-scent them. Bottle rolled down hills, bottle tethered on long rope bragged behind you, filled with piss etc. Broaden your scent by rolling down hills, use poll with cloth tide to end. Laundry and sponge bath water minus any detergent placed in container with holes then tide to rope and swung overhead etc. Balloons with some item for scent, placed inside. Build a catapult or slingshot and or fling your fecal matter around Ha! Ha! Ha! The stench/irritant agent, tear gas CS, powder or pepper spray, substances laced with ammonia, plants that cause sneezing or etching. All placed on your tracks. Sounds to distract or cause pain too. Scorched earth, burning fields etc. Starting fires in area well quickly overwhelm dog’s senses. Piping your scent through tubing?

This could also include checking updates on wall maps or reports of recently returning patrols.

2) Dominate eye closed;

This is around actual or possible light sources at night. So when such a light goes out you still have night vision with dominate/shooting eye. Look only obliquely at sudden flares or headlights. Use dim red lighting before night operations. Red light and or lens exposure for 20 minutes, then closed, this to charge pupils. Wear sunglasses if you are going to spend time in the sun. Adequate levels of Vitamin A can help. Night vision takes 30 minutes to recover after red light exposure. Two weeks to adapt to high altitude. In addition, people’s eyes adapt at varying rates. People who are older, people who smoke (not smoking four to six hours before can help), or people who may not be in great physical shape will take longer. Twilight Vision; It occurs at dawn and dusk, down to full moonlight. During night operations around artificial illumination in cities and when driving around in a car at night. It also occurs when snow is on the ground at night. Even in the daytime under double layers of jungle canopy. Due to the lower light levels at dawn, dusk, and full moon conditions, your visual acuity is poorer. Visual acuity can be as poor as 20/100. In fact, the best visual acuity you can hope to obtain under twilight conditions is between 20/50 and 20/100. You also have poorer color vision. You can still see colors but they won't be as vivid. You also have slower reaction times because of the reduced lighting levels. Night Vision; Occurs under starlight, as well as on moonless and cloudy nights when there are no stars or cultural lighting. Acuity-from 20/200 to 20/400 and possibly much worse. You can recognize silhouettes, but not the details of the objects. With night vision, the longer wavelengths of light, such as the reds and oranges, are hard to see and will appear dark. Unless a dark color is bordered by two lighter colors, it becomes totally invisible. Reds will be almost invisible at night. The reason red crosses are on white backgrounds on tents or vehicles is so they can be seen more easily at night. On the other hand, greens and blues will appear brighter, although you may not be able to determine their color. Test for dominate eye; you focus on an object, three feet out in front of you. Extend one of your hands and line up one finger with object. Then close one eye at a time. When finger appears to have shifted to one side of the object, you have just closed your dominate eye.

Field of view with vision, 60 degrees normal, 90 peripheries, 6 degrees focused.

Afghans with their better eyesight will be able to make eye contact with one another from much farther distances than the average westerner would realize.

3) Knees slightly bent;

By standing with your knees slightly bent, you have quicker reaction time when ducking for cover. It also reminds you to keep swaying, moving around in general, as an Anti sniper tactic. It may just cause sniper to pick someone else. Note; here I have chosen to place most of my sniper notes. Sniper detection, the first sign of the presents of a sniper could come from the unmistakable report of a rifle, and the sight of a man stopping as if halted by an invisible hand before falling to the ground. In general units should look for increase in single shot casualties.

To ensure their own stealth, the sniper needs to change appearance of ghillie suit when entering buildings. Changing positions to avoid detection. Snipers choose next position before repositioning i.e. moving, studies route etc. Policing his area for any evidence lift behind. Snipers do not choose roofs or top floors. They well be located one or two floors down. In trees when snipers are tied to post to steady aim, they will not fall from post to confirm kill. Snipers also can be found in trenches and under concrete slabs, these slabs can be raised with car jacks. Will position themselves between large units, to cause blue on blue shootings. They do not like to shoot at groups. Sniper’s radio more deadly than his rifle. Snipers well call in fire on structures to flush out targets. Sniper counter measures include artillery or mortar and or air strikes. This ensures they well not choose positions too close to their own infantrymen who well not be thankful for such attention. Snipers can be used to delay the enemies’ pursuit during your retreat. When facing an enemy on the move, inevitably towards him snipers operate in an opportune manner. A lone sniper can effectively pin down a whole Rifle Platoon as they try to advance. Unlike in a defensive action, the troops have to break cover at some point if they are to take ground. To be truly effective, the sniper would seek to engage the enemy in an area where he had cover, but they were forced to operate in the open.

(Reference, COE rule # 2 and # 3 espicially “cavalry” as well as rule # 16)

Sniper’s target analysis, the uncomfortable thing about the sniper is the deliberation taken before a kill. Ordinary riflemen took aim and fired just the same, perhaps picking their targets in order of the threat they posed. What was, and remains, unique to the sniper was his ability not to shoot a particular target. First rule choose targets carefully, what counts is who you kill. After taking time and trouble to secure a good position, don’t 'waste' perhaps your only shot on a lowly private if there is a chance of an officer showing up. Choose targets based on their location within units, special equipment/gear enemy has on them. Priorities: other snipers, dog teams, Officers, communications, optical equipment and operators. Crew served weapons and operators, direct fire weapons in MOUT, machine gunners may hold their weapon down to look more like regular riflemen. Tank commanders and scouts. Once shooting starts sniper shoots moving targets first. Snipers well wait till paths of merging targets (i.e. targets walking towards one another) cross to shoot. And well closely monitor exits. Snipers staking out likely points i.e. windows where targets may expose themselves. Note as a result of this deliberation on targets, snipers were not normally praised. A British officer recounted the rebuke he received from his Sergeant after shooting dead an unsuspecting German busy combing his hair; 'Are you satisfied now you've killed him?' The only certainty is that when a sniper of any nationality opens fire, the same two thoughts goes through the minds of the men under attack. One is spoken, the other concealed; Where is he? Am I next? Lethal circle formed by eyes, nose and mouth. Vital areas neck, heart, stomach, liver, kidneys, spinal column. With heart shot, body can function 10-12 seconds, round placed behind ear lobe well cut brain stem. AKA the Apricot. From front view aiming point lower lip. Shooting at units; first shot to hip of the point men. A sniper should use a standard setting (dope) on sights for 500 meters, target closer aim low, this for quicker shots at moving targets. Snipers avoid constant sun on one side of rifle barrel and cold wet ammo, cold wet = low shot, hot dry = high shot. Hot air is thinner i.e. less denser than cold.

CROWS common remotely operated weapons system/stations gun turret multi mm weapons 5.56 – 40mm. Fiber optics gyros telescopic boom? Accurate to 500 yards 2’ target single shot/sniper mode less accurate on auto. Camera jump computer control can help with auto engage system and while on the move. Boomerage/boomerang? Jacks/ spike design. Shot location system gives autoable and texts message, a top compos within 1-2 seconds system works with vehicle up to 60 mph and at range of ¼ mile from weapons, bullet most pass with in 30 meters of mikes for best results. SP 12/11/08 the army ordered over 9,000 CROWS but for a while could only get 15 a month. By the end of 2006, there were about a thousand in service. Possible counters to system; hot loaded blanks, burst of fire at a distance but along same azimuth as closer sniper, farther shot first and after closer shot. Also fire from area of max echo, Example surrounding area (L) shaped to misdirect echo. Muffle sound with altitude i.e. shooting form dominate or at least very high position. Down loaded ammo stays subsonic. Quieter but close range headshot necessary for kill. Bolt-action so ejection not hard or seen. With silencers noise from bolt action and ejections still make noises. In WW 2 sniper Viselli Zeitsev recorded 137 kills in one mouth, an average of four per day. Sniper term “pink mist”.

Position. Select neither a panoramic view nor a tiny loophole. Positions with a wide view are easily identified and targeted early. Positions with a wide view are elevated and thus easily encircled. If you are too hidden, nobody will walk in front of your loophole. If it is hard for the invaders to find you, it is hard for you to scram. There are many semi-concealed hides; quantity makes them obscure.

Only go into upper stories if all the nearby buildings are multi-story. The roof and top floors of buildings will be destroyed by artillery. Avoid skyscrapers; they are easily encircled and have solid windows. Apartments and hotels are wider and have windows and balconies.

Elevation. Stay in the basement or first floor of most buildings. No Russian vehicle can depress its main gun below -6°. Newjarheaddean; Tanks could attach a log to the tanks stern. With quick release gizmo to drop it thus be able to back up onto it and fire. If the ground is frozen, basements will protect one from artillery.

Aim to break a soldier's pelvis. He cannot run and must be carried.

The center of mass (hips, not heart) moves around the least.

A .308 at 500 yards will not penetrate the armor over the heart.

Shoot dirt banks to create dust for wind reading.

Low recoil is more important than power against dogs.

Silently shoot enemy soldiers who blunder into you.

What is the single worst tactic for the civilian sniper? Engaging mounted troops from over 600 yards away by firing down the length (the long axis) of a street. The enemy has cannons that, unlike your deer rifle, really are accurate at that range. Also, they have vehicles that can quickly close in on you with machine guns and grenade launchers, which are very dangerous at close range. Thus, by attempting a shot that you will probably miss, you have given the enemy two can’t miss opportunities to kill you. Asymmetry is supposed to work the other way around.

(Reference, PCP rule # 8, Tracking especially “weather”)

Note: with the fallowing rule 4/5 the detailed notes for the rules 4 and 5 became so similar; I decided to combine the rules. I did not renumber due to the personal difficulty of retaining a new numerical order of rules.

4/5) Everything taped, tied, strapped down:

Pre-operations Inspections (POIs). Get "eyes-on" accountability of critical items. Units should perform functions checks of all devices and weapons.

Load Plans, units normally have basic load plans for vehicles, trailers, containers and packs. Adherence to load plans can assist in POIs by providing an orderly array of equipment for inspection.

The fighting load for a properly conditioned Marine should not exceed 48 lbs; the approach/force march load should not exceed 72 lbs; the weights include all clothing and equipment, either worn or carried.

All gear on all troops organized in same manner, to make it easy to locate items on someone else in emergency or at night.

Packs;

Packs come in many sizes and should be sized appropriately for the individual according to manufacturer's specifications. Every Marine should keep a Bug out bag, packed with enough kit for a few days. Placed for grab and go in emergency. Policing the ground; anything not being used is repacked; you are ready to go at a moments notice. Packs often come with many unneeded features. A good rule of thumb is: the simpler the pack, the better it will be.

The two most common packs are internal and external framed.

Internal framed packs have a rigid frame within the pack that helps it maintain its shape and hug the back with the weight carried low; this assists the climber in keeping their balance. The body-hugging nature also makes it uncomfortable in warm weather.

External framed packs suspend the load away from the back (so air circulates). The frame transfers weight to hips and shoulders, but can be cumbersome when balance is needed for climbing and skiing. Belly straps keep loads from swaying.

Speed and endurance are enhanced if the load is carried more by the hips (using the waist belt) and less by the shoulders and back. This is preferred for movement over trails or less difficult terrain. By packing the lighter, more compressible items (sleeping bag, clothing) in the bottom of the rucksack and the heavier gear (stove, food, water, rope, climbing hardware, extra ammunition) on top, nearer the shoulder blades, the load is held high and close to the back, thus placing the most weight on the hips. In rougher terrain it pays to modify the pack plan. Heavy articles of gear are placed lower in the pack and close to the back, placing more weight on the shoulders and back. This lowers the climber's center of gravity and helps him to better keep his balance. Equipment that may be needed during movement should be arranged for quick access using either external pockets or placing immediately underneath the top flap of the pack.

The pack and its contents should be waterproofed. Zip-lock plastic bags can be used for small items, which are then organized into color-coded bags. A few extra-large plastic garbage bags should be carried for a variety of uses spare waterproofing, emergency bivouac shelter, and water procurement, among others.

Kit sanitized of identification i.e. remove all markings. All buckles, flaps, laces, & straps secured. Fins tided together with water ops, gloves in winter too. So you don’t loose. Inserts and liners not worn by themselves or they may wear out quicker. Trigger inserts fit either hand, should be changed to opposite hand frequently to ensure even wearing.

Check gear for noises by jumping up and down. Use rubber mallet to find rattles with vehicles or equipment.

Loose items should be taped, tied or raped in cloths when placed in bags/pockets. Canteens and pockets should be kept full or empty. This keeps water from sloshing. Once canteen opened, use all the water, pass it around if necessary.

With vehicles small fires under engine blocks or gearboxes. Petrol poured into gearboxes. A number of vehicles kept on stand by with engines running or started hourly. Hot water from running vehicle drained into other vehicles to start with.

Equipment can be hauled on a sled aka Ahkio (in winter).

For patrols equipment must be checked and loads evenly distributed.

Sleds vary greatly in size, from the squad-size Ahkio, a component of the 10-man arctic tent system, to the one-person skow. Regardless of the size, sleds are an invaluable asset during mountainous operations when snow and ice is the primary surface on which to travel. Whichever sled is chosen, it must be attachable to the patrol members that will be pulling it. Most sleds are constructed using fiberglass bottoms with or without exterior runners. Runners will aid the sleds ability to maintain a true track in the snow. The sled should also come with a cover of some sort whether nylon or canvas to keep load dry. Packing the sled, take great care especially when hauling fuel. Heavier items are carried towards the stern and lighter items towards the front.

Stoves, when selecting one must define its purpose i.e. for heating, cooking or both? When choosing a stove, factors that should be considered are weight, altitude and temperature where it will be used, fuel availability, and its reliability. They should be easy to clean and repair during an operation. White gas, kerosene, and butane are the common fuels used. All stoves require a means of pressurization to force the fuel to the burner. Stoves that burn white gas or kerosene have a hand pump and butane stoves have pressurized cartridges. All stoves need to vaporize the liquid fuel before it is burned. This can be accomplished by burning a small amount of fuel in the burner cup assembly, which will vaporize the fuel in the fuel line. Fire Starter material is key to igniting wet wood for emergency campfires. Candles, heat tabs, and canned heat all work. In alpine zones above tree line with no available firewood, a stove works as an emergency heat source. Matches and Lighter. Lighters are handy for starting fires, but they should be backed up by matches stored in a waterproof container with a strip of sandpaper.

images (2) edited

Fuel, batteries (frozen the damage is to their plates. Remove batteries store in warm room or boxes). A dry cell battery at 0 degrees Fahrenheit is about 40% of the power it would have at room temp.

Water, food, POWER BARS: The MRE is too big and produces too much trash for most combat situations. The military needs to reissue something like the old "D rations" of WWII, basically a compressed food bar (bran, nuts, raisins, whatever) that can provide 400-600 calories and keep a Marine moving for a few more hours. Unlike the MRE which is tedious to open and consume, a Marine could simply rip the wrapper off, eat it in three bites, and keep moving.

Extensive first aid kits, climbing equipment i.e. extra ropes and extra ammunition or demolition materials, if needed. List of more MT. equipment; oxygen tanks, aneroid barometer, rope, snap rings, pitons (rock spikes), block and tackle, winches, hammer for difficult rock climes, ice ax, (if not carried in hand, should be stowed on the outside of pack with the spike up and the adze facing forward or to the outside) crampons (can be secured to the outside stern of the pack with the points covered).

Snow Saw; used to cut into ice and snow. It can be used in step cutting, in shelter construction, for removing frozen obstacles, and for cutting snow stability test pits. The special tooth design of the snow saw easily cuts into frozen snow and ice. The blade is a rigid aluminum alloy of high strength about 3 mm thick and 38 cm long with a pointed end to facilitate entry on the forward stroke.

Snow Shovel; the snow shovel is used to cut and remove ice and snow. It can be used for avalanche rescue, shelter construction, step cutting, and removing obstacles. The handle should be telescopic, folding, or removable to be compact when not in use.

Wands; are used to identify routes, crevasses, snow-bridges, caches, and turns on snow and glaciers. Spacing of wands depends on the number of turns, number of hazards identified, weather conditions (and visibility), and number of teams in the climbing party. Carry too many wands is better than not having enough if they become lost. Wands are 1 to 1.25 meters long and made of lightweight bamboo or plastic shafts pointed on one end with a plastic or nylon flag (bright enough in color to see at a distance) attached to the other end.

Wind proof outer garment, have protection against sun too. Sunglasses, sun block and lip protection, Sunscreens should have an SPF factor of 15 or higher. For lip protection, a total UV blocking lip balm that resists sweating, washing, and licking is best. This lip protection should be carried in the chest pocket or around the neck to allow frequent reapplication.

In extreme cold canteen raped and placed in pack close to back. Use warm water, never over 2/3 full. To allow for expansion, if it dose freeze, open & allow to thaw slowly. Check for leaks. Squeeze air from the repellent container and screw the cap on firmly. In cold weather it’s a good idea to carry cough drops. For warmth, you can place a rock near fire. Then rap it in cloth, it’s carried like hot water bottle. IMO this would be used more at night i.e. warm pillow aid. In winter gasmask upon removal, any excess moisture wiped off immediately. Of no use in protecting against frost bite in fact the opposite is true. Helmets will be restricted to static ops. Helmet under windy conditions well cause more noise.

MOUT Equipment; axes, crowbars, stun grenades. Sub-terrain eq. Chalk for marking routes. The glow from the face of a compus, glint or thermal strips, glow sticks, even a peace of decaying wood can be used for I.D. and location of bubs in your patrol. Located on heel or under collar of Marine in front of you. Glowing items always held away from head or chest. Used on night operations too.

KNEE PADS; Extended physical activity tends to cause the pads to slip, and tightening the straps cuts off circulation. The overall impression is that knee pads are worth using but elbow pads just get in the way. Knee pads during the winter make life easier. If you need to suddenly take a knee to fire, you won’t be squeamish about planting one in the snow or onto a hidden rock. It will also keep your knee dry and let you stay kneeling for an extended period of time with very little knee fatigue, plus there is added protection in case of a fall.

RADIOS; allow fewer men to cover more ground, and still be able to move to support each other. While these would lack encryption, the odds that a given enemy would have the type of radio to intercept these transmissions, happen to speak English, understand another unit's internal slang, and be able to use the information in the few seconds he would have, is extremely low.

Two new portable ladders are under testing. The Quick Stepladder folds up to 2x3 feet but extends to 14 feet long. It is carried clipped to the outside of pack. The Light Modular Ladder extends to 15 feet; a second module can be added to reach 30 feet. The system is carried inside a bag the size of a rucksack. The 30-foot length allows soldiers into third-story windows or onto the roofs of single or two-story buildings.

The Hooligan Tool is a "wedge on a handle" which can be pounded into doors with a hammer to provide leverage to break them open.

Tuff Cuffs (a new system to restrain prisoners).

Emergency survival kit containing signaling material, fire starting material, food and water procurement material. Pocket knife, whistle, pressure bandage, notebook with pen or pencil, map, compass and or altimeter.

Repair Kit; a repair kit should include: Stove tools and spare parts. Duct tape. Patches. Safety pins. Heavy-duty thread. Awl and or needles. Cord and or wire. Small pliers (if not carrying a multipurpose tool).

RIFLE SCOPES /PERISCOPES: Decades after trench periscopes were common in the trenches of Flanders, the US military has no such item in its inventory. A simple $75 rubberized system would allow a good field of view around corners, into windows, and over obstacles. One should be issued to each squad.

LASER RANGEFINDERS: civilian $ 350 (designed for hunters, building contractors, and other uses). These can accurately determine distances up to 1000m. With such a device, a squad leader could quickly lay out the range cards. In concert with the GPS and compass one could radio precise target information on enemy patrols too close to his position for normal artillery (with its fire-and-adjust procedure) to engage. (The unit's mortars, also equipped with GPS, could do so far more safely, quickly, and effectively.)

Uniforms, guerillas often use system where a simple, color or item scarf/shirt etc is worn a certain way. That can be hidden or discarded quickly. Also members may switch articles of clothing from time to time to disguise individuals identification. (Guerilla tattoos between thumb & index finger I love you (is that in English?)

Layered principle: the Layers are of different material, wool under layer very porous, Modern Wick-a-way cloth material that lets moisture evaporate away from body but not towards it. Wicker material designed with an increasing number of strans in the layers as you get farther away from the body. Also a chemical posse to make the non absorbent man made material become absorbent.

Gore-Tex; its waterproof, and lets the moisture from the body evaporate. It only works when it's clean. Dirt, sweat, and oil if allowed to build up, clog up i.e. block the gaps in the weave and trap moisture in. Polypropylene is a good but expensive set of thermal underwear. It wicks moisture away from the body. Polar fleece will do this too. It is possible to break out in a sweat, remaining completely dry, and have a layer of ice on your back while still being warm in this combination.

Outer layer should be water resistant, if last layer water proof it well freeze over. Light weight lose outer layer, to trap warm air along side. Layering permits rapid adjustment of clothes over wide range of activity & temperatures. With out the modern materials one must avoid sweating! Even with modern materials if deployed for long periods. Best to be slightly chilly than too warm. Remove cloths accordingly head, hands and feet are good vents. When in doors wear as little clothing as possible. Clean cloths are warmer then dirty, also dirty well be more flammable. Friendly and enemy forces supplementing the layers of their uniforms with those of the dead. Corps striped of over coats, boots particularly Russian felt boats best for snow conditions, also lambskin cap. Wearing enemy uniforms or items there is a danger of being shot by friendly forces. Contrasting gear like web shouldn’t be warn on outside of snow whites. Solid whites will loose effectiveness. Special care taken when handling sooty stoves or digging holes. You may not won’t to wear. Under wet winter conditions -13 degrees or up. Moisture soaks in from inside and outside due to melting show and ice. During the spring rains & autumn’s alternating day thawing and night freezing protection against cold and moisture i.e. humidity and wet brush etc. is needed, by summer insects are a problem too. Clothing and foot gear to tight well restrict blood flow and invite cold enjoy. Wearing to many pairs of socks is not a good idea. Feet should be massaged when changing. A dry pair of socks is always carried. Socks can be hung on out side of pack on the move for drying. Dry items in shade if you can. Drying by fire, items hung close to ceiling, dry leather slowly. Do not place items down wind of fires because of smell and sparks. Never left unattended! Woolens do not boil or use hot water. In desert stay fully clothed even on cloudy days.

Recall acronym, C.O.L.D. Clean clothes, avoid Overheating, Layers, Dry.

EXTREME COLD WEATHER CLOTHING SYSTEM

Outer Layers; ECWCS the jacket and pants are made of a durable waterproof fabric. Both have a nylon shell with a laminated breathable membrane attached. This allows the garment to release moisture while the nylon shell provides a degree of water resistance during rain and snow. The nylon also acts as a barrier to wind, which helps retain warm air trapped by the insulating layers.

Insulating Layers; are those layers worn over the underwear and under the outer layers of clothing. They should provide for easy moisture movement as well as trap warm air. The insulating layers that are presently available are referred to as pile or fleece. ECWCS incorporates the field jacket and field pants liner as additional insulating layers. However, these two components do not move moisture as effectively as the pile or fleece. Cotton layers must not be included in any layer in an extreme cold environment.

Underwear; Underwear should also be made of materials that move moisture from the body. Many civilian companies manufacture this type of underwear. The primary material in this product is polyester, which moves moisture from the body to the outer layers. A lightweight set of long underwear coupled with a heavyweight set will provide a multitude of layering combinations.

Headgear; 25 % of heat loss occurs through the head and neck area. Very important to wear a hat i.e. Black watch cap of natural fibers, predominately wool. For colder climates a neck gaiter can be added. It is a tube that fits around the neck and can reach up over the ears and nose. For extreme cold, a balaclava can be added. This covers the head, neck, and face leaving only a slot for the eyes (Figure 3-5). Worn together the combination is very warm.

Photo edited

Figure 3-5 Neck gaiter and balaclava

Helmets; the Kevlar ballistic helmet can be used for most basic mountaineering tasks. It must be fitted with parachute retention straps and the foam impact pad.

SP 12/20/08 in 2007 the Indian firm Anjani Technoplast, came up with some innovative protective vest technologies, a new fiber (Dyneema HB26) which is 15 % lighter, 40 % stronger than aramid (Kevlar) fibers, floats, and is more resistant to sunlight, moisture and chemicals. Helmets made of it are 20 % lighter than the Kevlar ones, and more resistant to bullets. It's also likely that the new generation of U.S. armored trucks (the hummer replacement) will use Dyneema HB26, which will lower fuel consumption and strain on the suspension and other vehicle components.

Headlamps; it is common to need a light source and the use of both hands. A flashlight can provide light, but can be cumbersome when both hands are needed. Most headlamps attach to helmets by means of elastic bands. Ensure it is waterproof and the battery is small and is compatible with the supplies available. Most lights will accept alkaline, nickel-cadmium, or lithium batteries. Alkaline battery life diminishes quickly in cold temperatures, nickel-cadmium batteries last longer in cold but require a recharging unit, and lithium batteries have twice the voltage so modifications are required. When the light is being packed, care should be taken that the switch doesn't accidentally activate and use precious battery life. Also while on patrols to eliminate accidental activation.

Eye gear; glacier glasses and goggles. Glacier glasses are sunglasses that cover the entire eye socket. They should be antifogging. Double or triple lenses work best. Many operations in the mountains occur above the tree line or on ice and snow surfaces where the harmful UV rays of the sun can bombard the eyes from every angle increasing the likelihood of snow blindness. At least one extra pair should be carried by each climbing team.

Ballistic eye protection: Simple sports glasses with polycarbonate lenses actually work better, and take up no more space than a normal pair of glasses.

Super ears: Powered by four batteries, they block out sharp loud sounds (e.g., rifle shots), allow normal conversation to pass unaffected, and enhance small sounds such as footsteps, whispers, and the crunching of leaves and twigs. These cost $130 each. SilversonicXL lessen up type device that is worn around ear. Also product called lesson up.

Electronic ear protection, that can allow troops to hear normally, when sound levels are normal, but block out very loud noises. Equipment like this is already available for those who maintain jet engines, and other loud equipment (like tanks).

Foot gear; socks provide cushioning, remove excess moisture, and provide insulation from cold temperatures. Improper wear and excess moisture are the biggest causes of hot spots and blisters. Regardless of climatic conditions, socks should always be worn in layers. The first layer should be a material that moves moisture from the foot surface to the outer sock. The outer sock should also be made of like materials, but should be complimented with materials that provide cushioning and abrasion resistance. A third layer can be added depending upon the climatic conditions. In severe wet conditions, a waterproof type sock can be worn over the first two layers to reduce the amount of water that would saturate the foot. In extremely cold conditions a vapor barrier sock can be worn either over both of the original pairs of socks or between the whicker layer and the insulating layer. If the user is wearing VB boots, the vapor barrier sock is not needed.

Old socks can be pulled over boats for camouflage. Boots souls can be painted with white non-glossy paint. Chicken wire can be tied around boots for traction in sewers.

Currently, CTA 50-900 provides adequate footwear for most operations in mountainous terrain. In temperate climates a combination of footwear is most appropriate to accomplish all tasks. The two types of footwear needed are climbing shoes and plastic mountaineering boots. (1) Climbing shoes are made specifically for climbing vertical or near vertical rock faces. These shoes are made with a soft leather upper, a lace-up configuration, and a smooth "sticky rubber" sole. The smooth "sticky rubber" sole is the key to the climbing shoe, providing greater friction on the surface of the rock, allowing the climber access to more difficult terrain. (2) The plastic mountaineering boot is a double boot system. The inner boot provides support, as well as insulation against the cold. It may or may not come with a breathable membrane. The outer boot is a molded plastic (usually with a lace-up configuration) with a lug sole. The welt of the boot is molded in such a way that crampons, ski bindings, and snowshoes are easily attached and detached.

Gaiters are used to protect the lower leg from snow and ice, as well as mud, twigs, and stones. The use of waterproof fabrics or breathable materials laminated to the nylon can also be insulated if necessary. Gaiters are not presently fielded. Gaiters are available in three styles i.e. Alpine or open toed, full randed and overboot.

image edited

The most common style of gaiter is the open-toed variety, which is a nylon shell that may or may not have a breathable material laminated to it. The open front allows the boot to slip easily into it and is closed with a combination of zipper, hook-pile tape, and snaps. It will have an adjustable neoprene strap that goes under the boot to keep it snug to the boot. The length should reach to just below the knee and will be kept snug with a drawstring and cord lock. The second type referred to as a full or randed gaiter. It completely covers the boot down to the welt. It is used with plastic mountaineering boots and should be glued in place and not removed. The third type of gaiter is specific to high-altitude mountaineering or extremely cold temperatures and is referred to as an overboot. It is worn completely over the boot and must be worn with crampons because it has no traction sole.

Crampons; (Figure 3-25) Two types: Flexible and Rigid. They should fit snugly on the boot with a minimum of 1 inch of front point protruding. Straps should fit snugly around the foot and any long, loose ends should be trimmed, any tools needed for adjustment will be provided by the manufacturer. The Flexible or hinged crampon is best used when no technical ice climbing will be done. It is designed to be used with soft, flexible boots, but can be attached to plastic mountaineering boots. The flexible crampon gets its name from the flexible hinge on the crampon itself. All flexible crampons are adjustable for length while some allow for width adjustment. Most flexible crampons will attach to the boot by means of a strap system. The Rigid crampon, does not flex. It is designed for technical ice climbing, but can be used on less vertical terrain. It can only be worn with plastic mountaineering boots. Rigid crampons will have a toe and heel bail attachment with a strap that wraps around the ankle.

image edited

Snowshoes; offer a large displacement area on top of soft snow preventing tiresome post-holing. Still show shoeing uses 50 % more energy than regular walking.

Some snowshoes come equipped with a crampon like binding that helps in ascending steep snow and ice. Snowshoes are slower than skis, but are better suited for mixed terrain. When carrying heavy packs, snowshoes can be easier to use than skis. Skis; Mountaineering skis are wide and short. They have a binding that pivots at the toe and allows for the heel to be free for uphill travel or locked for downhill. There are Synthetic skins with fibers attached to the bottom thus allowing the ski to travel forward and prevent slipping backward. Historically with skies, animal fur was tided backwards (i.e. far lying opposite direction of travel) for traction with up hill climbing. It also aids in slowing down the rate of descents. Wax can be applied to the ski to aid in ascents instead of skins. Skis also do not provide good traction for pulling loads; again one might make use of fiber attachments or Animal fur. Wind in open areas can greatly slow skiers down.

Skis can make crossing crevasses easier because of the load distribution also a skier or a unit on skis is able to cross frozen lakes and rivers when the ice will not support a man on foot. Skis can become a makeshift stretcher for casualties. On skis Marines can be towed i.e. pulled by vehicles.

(Reference, Over all tips, MT. slopes etc.)

Hand gear; use of hand wear is extremely important in the mountains. Even during the best climatic conditions, temperatures can dip below freezing. While mittens are always warmer than gloves, the finger dexterity needed to do most tasks makes gloves the primary gear. Just as the clothing system is worn in layers, gloves and mittens work best using the same principle. Retention cords that loop over the wrist work extremely well when the wearer needs to remove the outer layer to accomplish a task that requires fine finger dexterity. Leaving the glove or mitten dangling from the wrist ensures the wearer knows where it is at all times.

The Ninja claw for climbing things like the phone repairman’s ankle hook on his boot.

Ski poles; assist in balance on skis or snowshoe patrols with heavy packs. Some are collapsible for ease of packing. The basket at the bottom prevents the pole from plunging deep into the snow and, on some models, can be detached so the pole becomes an avalanche or crevasse probe. Some ski poles come with a self-arrest grip, but should not be the only means of protection on technical terrain.

Remove loose snow and insects at entrances. Remove vegetation before approach to helicopters. Marines wear ear plugs during helicopter hopes to preserve hearing after exit.

If theirs little difference in inside an out side temp, weapons maybe taken into buildings and stored at floor level, where temperature is lowest. Weapons also sweat in warm vehicles. Batteries, binoculars, scopes, compos, grenades and weapons kept close to body in inter clothing, inside over coats. Keep ports and muzzles covered. Place magazines upside down in your pouches to keep out dirt and dust. Marines kept watch with hand over action/port area. Carry or handle, muzzle down during transport by helicopters. Trailing musket to keep it from being seen. Also slung over shoulder muzzle down, with sling over front part of shoulder hidden. Marine looks unarmed. Normal lubes in cold become thickened, sluggish action or stoppages results. Weapons are completely stripped, cleaned with dry solvents gasoline, alcohol and lighter fluid, only then lightly oiled. Particularly effective was sunflower seed oil. To insure smooth bolt action when no oil is used a finely ground powder is sprinkled on action. Also finely textured flour or sulfur. Check bore for obstructions before shooting i.e. work action.

On patrols cold rations only, so to illuminate the smell of cooking.

Trooper mentioning how he fill during a firefight and ended up on his back in a small depression and could not roll over to get up on his own. He told of how his bubs help i.e. IMO they had experienced the same thing and know right away.

New Winter clothing ensemble (officially called , generation III of the extended cold-weather system or Gen III ECWCS.)

(Reference, Appendix PCP rule # 4/5)

6) Whisper in an exhale:

This reduces echoes inside the mouth. Voice well travel, project clearer and farther. Whispering to disguise voice i.e. eliminates voice signatures, due to the fact that you’re not using vocal cords. Gaps in teeth and other characteristics would still be present but not specific enough to ID person out of general public.

7) Extra quite at night or around water:

Sounds travel faster and farther at night or over water. Night air cooler and less surrounding noises. Still cool air of north carries much farther than in temperate zone, which lies between 23 and 53 degrees north latitude. In calm weather (no wind), air currents that may be too light to detect, can still carry sounds. Air cools in the evening and moves downhill toward the valleys. If you are moving uphill late in the day or at night, air currents will probably be moving toward you if no other wind is blowing. As the morning sun warms the air in the valleys, moves uphill. Keep the wind in your face. With the sun at your back and the wind in your face, you have a slight advantage. Wind affects sounds and odors. Determine wind direction by dropping a handful of dust or dried grass from shoulder height. By facing in the same direction the wind is blowing, one can locate sounds by cupping his hands behind his ears and turning slowly. When sounds are loudest, you are facing the origin. Swimming shallow well reduce air consumption, waves conceal noise. Stay one meter off bottom to keep from silting. When coming ashore stay flat or roll out of water. Rough bark canoes are very quite.

(Reference, Def. Desquises, decoys etc. “local vapor fogs”)

8) Step toe first:

This is done two apply pressure on soul of foot gradually and evenly, this also muffles noise of braking twigs. This would also change up your digital gate signature that maybe on some database of some system tracking you.

(Reference, Planning, intelligence preparation of the battle field, I.P.B., “SP the oldest biometric”)

Crawling, (Monkey walk) supporting yourself with fest and placing knees where fest where. (Leopard crawl) supporting body with elbows and toes only. Esp. suited for crawling over leafs. Always lift feet high and pay close attention to avoid lose rocks on slopes and hills. Low crawl; hold the rifle sling with your thumb at the upper sling swivel, with the balance point of weapon on top of the fore-arm (ie see sawed on forearm), keeping the butt just off of the ground. Push your arms and right leg forward, then cover ground by pulling with the arms and pushing with the right leg. Keep the whole body flat, and change the pushing leg frequently to avoid fatigue. High crawl; cradle your rifle on top of your arms, with the muzzle off the ground. Proceed by alternately advancing right elbow and then left knee, then left elbow and right knee. Use short movements, keeping your knees well behind your buttocks. Keep your head and your buttocks low.

TRACKING

The best way of judging the effectiveness of a stick, (i.e. dog tracking team) is to note how often they track into contact. If constantly being fired on first, then they are only marginal. Good trackers will be able to tell how far ahead the enemy is. During assaults, trackers are too valuable to risk in a fire fight. However when crossing obstacles such as rivers, streams, roads, the tracking team becomes the security and first over (to keep any spoor on the other side undisturbed). When operating, use hand signals at all times. The Tracker: is responsible for reading and interpreting the spoor for the team leader. The flankers: these two members who are also trained trackers are responsible for the forward and flank security of the tracker and will probably see the enemy first. As the tracker becomes fatigued rotate duties so all trackers remain alert. The standard tracking formation is Y shaped, with the flankers at the ends of open legs of the Y and the tracker at the junction, with the team leader about 5 meters directly behind him. Fallow on troops can be in a column behind or in echelons to both sides in X formation. This allows the troops to move forward at once and leaves the trackers a gap to fall back through. Much of’ tracking means noting what is out of context in nature and realizing the cause. When examining spoor always keep your head slightly up and look 15 to 20 yards ahead of you. Move from sign to sign and always be sure of your last confirmed sign before you move on to the next. Make sure the print is not one of your own and keep a record of the different type prints you encounter. Plaster impressions, drawings, photos or even a copy of the soles themselves should be on record with local intelligence units. Once you identify a particular track, follow it. Target units may split up or scatter, until you are left following one set of tracks. If you have the personnel, assign tracking teams to each set of tracks. If not, pick one and run him to ground, then pick another. Try to stay with the main body, if possible. You may get lucky and nail the commander or end up following the spoor to a RP where you can ambush the entire unit. If you lose the spoor be patient, go back to the last positive spoor confirm and mark it. From multiple elevations conduct a quick scan. If no spoor is relocated, brief team to the nature of the searches (i.e. type and duration) to be use. Then begin searches to relocate the tracks. Types of search patterns; the most common are the cross grain, the box search and the 360-degree sweep. Cross grain method, the tracker moves laterally from the spoor either left or right about 100 meters and then doubles back toward his original line of march. Each time he turns, the tracker should advance about 50 to 75 meters forward before doubling back. If you have moved approximately 500 meters ahead of the last spoor and still cannot find the tracks, resort to the 360-degree method. 360 degree method, making ever increasing circles from last confirmed tracks. Some trackers have been known to circle as far as five kilometers from the last confirmed spoor until they cut the trail of their prey. Box method, this is boxing off all four corners of area, starting on the two sides of the spoor in direction of march. This method is best when you have enough troops for teams.

Weather; all indicators well be effected by weather. Can either aid or hinder. The type of country - Savannah or Mopani forest. Things lack depth in overcast weather. The position of the sun relative to the direction of travel. The most suitable position is when one has to track towards the sun. Use the last rain or strong wind to determine timing. Rain flattens or washes litter into low lying areas and turns paper into pulp. Exposure to weather can cause food cans to rust at the opened edge; then, the rust moves toward the center. Wind dries tracks and blows litter, sticks, or leaves into prints. By recalling wind activity, one may estimate the age of tracks. Example, one may reason "the wind is calm at present, but blew hard about an hour ago. These tracks have litter in them, so they must be over an hour old." However, he must be sure that the litter was not crushed into them when the tracks were made. On windy day, sand remaining on pebbles within tracks can indicate a fresh track. There are two distinct types of spoor; ground spoor and aerial spoor. Ground spoor is normally made by a boot or foot print and aerial spoor is in the form of trampled grass, broken bushes, broken cobwebs, spider webs usually take about an hour to be replaced by the insects. Knowing spiders usually make nest in morning hours could help. Might be wiped off onto a nearby tree or bush. Ground spoor can be defined by tracking concepts: displacement, stains, litter, (poorly disciplined or untrained units may leave a trail of litter) urine and excrement, frequently indicated by house flies, mopani bees, yellow butterflies and, during the rains, dung beetles. DDD; if the target party members realize they are being followed, they may try DDD using a stream to cover tracks. Determining the difference between staining and displacement. Both terms can be applied to some indicators. For example, muddied water; displaced mud also stains the water. Muddy footgear can stain stones in streams, and algae and other water plants can be displaced by lost footing. Rocks overturned have a lighter or darker color on the opposite side. Overturned rocks take a couple of hours to dry in direct sun, longer in shade. The person entering or exiting a stream creates slide marks scuff bark off roots or footprints, stains stones or the bank, gets vegetation wet. Normally, a person or animal seeks the path of least resistance; therefore, look for departure signs in open areas with gradual sloping banks. Or where there are large overhangs of tree branches.

(Reference, PCP rule # 9)

Trails exiting streams may appear weathered by rain due to water running from clothing or equipment. This is especially true if the party exits the stream single file. The existence of a wet, weathered trail slowly fading into a dry trail indicates the trail is fresh. Displacement; takes place when anything is moved from its original position. Impression of rifle butts being used as canes up steep slopes. The color of Scuff marks, scratched or chipped bark darkens with time; sap oozes, then hardens as it makes contact with the air. Chewed vegetation by persons or accompanying animals. Foliage, sticks, vines may be dragged or broken while cutting through heavy vegetation clearing a trail with a machete. Age track by the state of dryness, broken twigs and vines require about 10 hours for the pulp inside begins to turn brown. Grass blades will remain green for about a day after being broken, but after a few days turns brown. The reflection of light from grass or leaves displaced at an angle. When one walks through a field overturned leaves well now have their damp side exposed. Stones and sticks overturned, scuffed or removed from their original position, show a different color underneath. Disturbed dew drops on grass and plants will indicate passage of something within the last few hours after sunrise. Dew usually remains for about 4 hours after sunrise. Stains/spoor; a stain occurs when any substance from one organism or article is smeared or deposited on something else. When bloodstains are fresh, they are bright red. Air and sunlight first change blood to a deep ruby-red color, then to a dark brown crust as the moisture evaporates. Spatters or drops are not always on the ground; they may be smeared on leaves or twigs. Bloodstains, can determine the wound's location. If it seems to be dripping steadily, it probably came from a wound on the trunk. If it appears to be slung to the front, stern, or sides, the wound is probably in the extremity. Arterial wounds appear to pour blood at regular intervals with heart beat. If the wound is venous, the blood pours steadily. A lung wound deposits pink, bubbly, and frothy bloodstains. A bloodstain from a head wound appears heavy and slimy. Abdominal wounds often mix blood with digestive juices light in color, and has an odor (acidic?). One can determine the seriousness of the wound thus how far the victim can move unassisted. Staining can also occur when muddy footgear is dragged over grass, stones, and shrubs. Thus, staining and displacement combine. Crushed leaves may stain rocky ground that is too hard to show footprints. Roots, stones, and vines may be stained where leaves or berries are crushed by moving feet. Analyzing Footprints; a foot or shoe print is a good example of displacement. If a tracker finds the tracks of two men, this may indicate that a sniper team is operating in the area. Footprints may indicate direction, rate of movement, number, sex, and whether the individual knows he is being tracked. Or for example, a print that was left by a barefooted person or one with worn or frayed footgear indicates that he may have poor equipment. Rapid movement or running is apparent, if footprints are deep and with long strides, splayed out toes with toe prints deeper than heel prints, skid marks, and badly damaged vegetation. Old dried dirt, maybe from different area, stuck in treads will change print and may fall out on rocks. This dirt also indicates pass surface traveled. Prints that are deep, short, and widely spaced, with signs of scuffing and with toes splayed out indicate person is carrying a heavy load. Persons walking backward have a short, irregular stride. With an unnaturally deep toe, and soil is displaced in the direction of movement. To determine the sex study the size (women are smaller) and their toes are more splayed out than the males. Women tend to be pigeon-toed, while men walk with their feet straight ahead or pointed slightly to the outside. The stride is usually shorter than men’s. The rhythm or length of stride is a guide to where the next footprint can be found. If the stride is shorter than usual or the trail is erratic or circuitous, this may indicate walking in the dark. If particles of soil are beginning to fall into the print, or water still filling in the print is very resent. If the edges are dried and crusty, the prints are at least 1 hour old, varies with terrain. A light rain or morning dew cycles may round the edges of the print. By recalling when the last rain occurred, one can place print into a time frame. Impressions and Prints in mud will usually take about an hour to fill with water, depending on the amount of moisture in the earth. If the track is very fresh, water will not have run back into the depressions. The water will run back later, muddy water collects in new footprints in swampy ground; however, the mud settles and the water clears, normally the mud clears in about one hour, although time varies with the terrain. First of all the mud pushed up around the depression and kicked forward by the foot leaving the ground will begin to dry. If the tracks are pockmarked, they were obviously made before a heavy rain and, if not pock-marked, they were made after the rain. Note look to see if the tracks were pock-marked by water dripping from trees. Determining Key Prints; the last individual in the file usually leaves the clearest footprints; these become the key prints. Cut a stick matching length of the prints and notch it to indicate the width at the widest part of the sole. Then study the angle of the key prints for the direction of march. Look for an identifying mark or feature i.e. worn or frayed footwear, to help identify the key prints. If the trail becomes vague, erased, or merges with another, use key prints to ID unit. To count the total individuals being tracked use the box technique. There are two methods to employ it. The most accurate is to use the stride as a unit of measure. Draw a line from the key print heel across the trail. Then move forward to the key print of the opposite foot and draw a line through its instep. This well form a box to analyze with the drawn lines forming two sides, and the edges of the trail forming the others. This method is accurate for counting up to 18 persons. 36-inch box method; if key prints are not evident. Measure a 36 inches long cross section the edges of the trail as the sides of the box. Count each indentation or partial print in the box and dividing by two. This method gives an estimate it is not as accurate as the stride measurement. Should you discover a resting place, count the places on the ground and no matter what the number, add two and report that number. Troops carrying loads set down at halts make indentions like box edges, crushed grass and twigs can help to identify the load. A reclining soldier also flattens the vegetation. Look for cigarette butts. A number of them in one place with evidence of only one person in the immediate area could give time table of halt. Check the campfire’s heat. Wild life; there are many paths in the bush made by game during their nightly or seasonal movements. These animals avoid steep or slippery slopes and therefore game paths will normally provide easy going. Patrols can use these trails when quick, silent movement is required. Flushed from their natural habitat, animals and birds are another example of displacement. Most wild creatures are shy of man and will seek shelter if he has been in the area. Listen for animals snorting or running and note the direction. The Grey Loerie when disturbed will utter a loud and drawn out “g-way” call, and often follows the intruder, thus alarming the quarry or warning the tracker. The honey guide bird and ox-pecker both have the same “give away” effect on both quarry and tracker. Squashed animal or insect life and whether it has been attacked by ants, location of ant mound would be advantageous to note. Changes in the normal life of insects disturbed bees, ant holes uncovered and Tom spider webs, often spun across open areas, trails. If one does not avoid these webs, he leaves an indicator. Game Tracks; most animals lie up during the day and move about at night. Animal prints superimposed on the spoor will tell you that the spoor was made prior to nightfall. If human prints have a double set of animal spoor superimposed and spoor shows that the game has moved in both directions, the human prints are probably at least 24 hours old. If the animal spoor show that game has moved in one direction only, then the human prints were probably made during the night after the game had moved down to water but before the game moved back. The reverse is also applicable; if you see the spoor on the animal prints, the spoor was made sometime after sunrise.

(Reference, PCP rule # 3 and Defense, rule # 5 Features of Recognition, “Wild Animals” as well as Disguises decoys and diversions, “Mujahideen traveling”)

9) Walk single file:

Reduces number of tracks, but causes them to be deeper. Tracks grater problem in desert snow or mud. With later you can spread out a breast and zigzag across open areas. Concentrate on getting away from rivers and wet land or open areas quickly after crossing. With snow move just before or during fresh snow fall. For short distance you can roll and also in desert. Change direction in tall grass frequently. Movement in a strait line will cause unnatural weaving. Your foot could be swept/dragged back over grass before applying pressure on foot. Thus pressing grass down in opposite direction to travel.

COUNTER TRACKING

Main goal is to expose the tracker in the open, where he dose not what to spend much time studying tracks. When being tracked the best bet is to either try to outdistance tracker or to double back and ambush the group.

Fishhook; used to double back on your own trail in an over watch position to ambush pursuers. The size of the pursuing force dictates the chances of success. If the pursuing force is too large to be destroyed, the sniper team strives to eliminate the tracker.

image edited

The sniper team may use the frequently used and or the least used routes to cover its movement. Frequently Used Routes; travel on railways, roads merging with civilians. Least Used Routes; avoid all man-made trails or roads. Least used routes are normally magnetic azimuths between two points. Reduction of spoor; moving on hard-surfaces or rocky ground. Changing footgear, wrap footgear with rags. Wear the same boots as the enemy, if you are operating in his territory. Brush out the trail. This is rarely done without leaving signs (best just before rains). A sniper who tries to hide his trail moves at reduced speed; sniper secures area, scopes target area, spotter hides tracks, scouts routes. Backward Walking; walking backward in tracks already made, and then stepping off the trail onto terrain or objects that leave little sign. Use this technique when leaving or entering a stream. Large Tree; a good deception tactic is to change directions at large trees (Figure 8-7). Walk past a large tree (12 inches wide or larger) for 5 to 10 paces. Carefully walk backwards to the forward/lee side of the tree and make a 90-degree change in the direction of travel, passing the tree on its forward side. Using the tree as a screen to hide the new trail. If this is not the direction that you want to go, change direction again about fifty meters away using the same technique.

Image edited

Cut the Corner; used when approaching a road or trail. About 100 meters from the road, change direction, either 45 degrees left or right. Once the road is reached, leave a visible trail in the direction of the deception for a short distance on the road. Leave several signs of your presence. The tracker should believe that the corner was cut to save time. The sniper team backtracks on the trail to the point where it entered the road, and then it carefully moves on the road without leaving a good trail (i.e. maybe rolling), once the desired distance is achieved, the sniper team changes direction and continues movement. Or you just cross the trail and leave no sign of your leaving it in the first place. Then move about one hundred meters at an angle of 45 degrees, but this time on the other side of the trail and in the reverse of your approach. When changing direction back to your original line of march, the big tree technique is used to draw the enemy tracker along the easier trail. By changing direction before reaching the trail, you have indicated that the trail is your new line of march.

image edited

Slip the Stream; executed the same as the cut the comer technique. After entering the stream, move down stream to prevent floating debris and silt from compromising the fact you have entered the river. At some point cross to opposite shore then move back upstream and leave the stream in your initial direction. The sniper team establishes false trails upstream if time permits. Then, it moves downstream to escape since creeks and streams gain tributaries that offer more escape alternatives. When your direction of movement parallels a stream, use the stream to deceive. Stay in the center of the stream and in deep water. Watch for rocks or roots near the banks that are not covered with moss or vegetation and leave the stream at that point. - Walk out backward on soft ground.

The Circle; used to escape pursuers or to hide a patrol base. It establishes a trail in a circle as large as possible. The trail that starts on a road and returns to the same point. At some point along the trail you step off, leaving one set of tracks. The large tree maneuver or low hanging branch technique can be used to leave the trail.

Scent start by washing yourself and your clothes without using soap.

Standing in smoke from a fire can help mask your scent from animals. While animals are afraid of fresh smoke from a fire, older smoke scents are normal smells after forest fires and do not scare them.

(Reference, Defence, rule # 5 Disguises, decoys, etc. “tracks once made” and PCP rule # 8 “exiting streams” as well as the next rule number 10, Don’t back track)

10) Don’t back track:

Don’t use same door, gate, road, route you used to inter. Also with Firewatch relief’s, you should not use path your relief just used on his approach. With patrols you can circle back on to your route to ambush someone fallowing you. Easier in jungle or desert, where terrain looks similar. Note with a circular pattern, a tracker might be slowed thinking he’s being set up for ambush. Return routs along paths just off original i.e. parallel to, however at far enough distance i.e. enough separation to avoid enemy ambush, but close enough to engage the enemy. The hope here is that you well walk up on them, just behind their position.

(Reference, rule # 9 i.e. walk single file, counter tracking)

11) Keep distance:

Second in command in stern of patrol, first up front. For patrol members, dispersed at 45’-55’ feet intervals, if terrain allows. Dispersion reduces WIA especially if enemy fire hits ammo of crew served weapons or grenades. It also makes it more difficult for enemy to get a count, as he must wait longer for patrol to pass.

With groups, this could be not everyone leaving at the same time to go to the same i.e. next location. Or not setting i.e. hanging out with each other once everyone arrives. Members could play it casual gradually introducing one another and joining up at a certain table as security situation is assessed.

In dessert, large units should converge on objective than scatter as an anti counter attack tactic, especially from air. Also recon units stay farther away from main units and move in deceptive directions from main units. MOUNTAINEERING; Route Selection; Crossing re-entrants as near to the watershed as possible. (All the land area that drains into a stream system is called a watershed) Bad weather limiting visibility can lift quickly. Don’t get caught in open areas or camp in them. In general the shortest route was not always the quickest; the trick was to avoid obstacles such as cliffs, quarries scree/rocks, bracken, ice, snow and bogs. Often the best descent is on a different route than the ascent. When looking for a firmer surface, watch for darker/dirty/settled snow this absorbs more heat and thus hardens faster than lighter/clean/fresh snow. Windward sides more packed easier traveled. Pick route where you can traverse downhill as quickly as possible. When you must ascend a dangerous slope, climb to the side of the avalanche path, and not directly up the center. Since most avalanches occur within 24 hours of a storm and or at midday, avoid moving during these periods. Units should travel before sun up, not at noon, not during unusually high or low temperatures. Late night or early morning patrols are best especially if daytime temperatures are going to rise above freeing. Avoid cornices from above or below. Avoid convex slopes stay high in slopes or low in tree line. You have to pace yourself, breath and march rhythmically. Traversing the slope in a zigzag i.e. switch back manner. The number of stragglers may be expected to increase. You had to make up time by running down the easy slopes. On the uphill keep your feet horizontal on the slopes. Avoid areas next to logs, rocks, trees, where the surrounding snow has melted away, creating hidden ice hazards. Cross danger areas one at a time. Use same path, keep mouth covered with cloth, loosen or remove skies. Remove your hands from ski pole wrist straps. Detach ski runaway cords. Prepare to discard equipment. Put your hood on. Close up your clothing. Deploy avalanche cord. Make avalanche probes and shovels accessible. If caught in slid swim or roll, working towards the edge of the avalanche. If you feel your feet touch the ground, give a hard push and try to "pop out" onto the surface. If buried spitting can help determine up or down, also throbbing in head. When your buried your breath fresses around your head trapping the carbon dioxide and you are asphyxiated. Avalanches accounted for more than ½ the KIA during alpine fighting in WW1.

AVALANCHE SEARCH AND RESCUE TECHNIQUES; when the snow comes to rest it sets up like cement. Don’t shout unless you hear rescuers immediately above you; in snow, no one can hear you scream. The respiration of an unconscious person is shallower, their pulse rate declines, and the body temperature is lowered, all of which reduce the amount of oxygen needed. Chances of survival after burial by an avalanche are approximately 90 % if the victim is located within 15 minutes. However, probability of survival drops rapidly and, after two hours, chances of survival are remote. Suffocation accounts for 65 % of fatalities, collision with debris accounts for 25 % and hypothermia and shock accounts for 10 %. In many respects, a moving avalanche resembles a liquid. A human body, with a higher density than the flowing snow, would be expected to sink deeper and deeper into the avalanche; however, several factors influence the body's location. Turbulence, terrain, and the victim's own efforts to extricate himself all interact to determine the final burial position. Efforts of the victim to extricate himself by vigorous motion and "swimming" definitely minimize burial depth. Conversely, the limp body of an unconscious victim is likely to be buried deeply. If any indication of the location of the victim is found, random probing starts in that vicinity. Establish from witnesses where the victim was located just before the avalanche to determine the point where the victim disappeared the "last seen" point. Using this and any other information, establish a probable victim trajectory line leading to high priority search areas. If two points of the victim's trajectory can be established, a high probability exists that the victim will be near the downhill flow line passing through these two points. The tip and edges of the slide are also likely areas to search. A human body is bulky and is apt to be thrown toward the surface or the sides. The majority of buried victims are carried to the place of greatest deposition, usually the toe of the slide. Any terrain features that catches debris are also apt to catch a victim. The likelihood of a victim being buried in a particular bend is proportional to the amount of debris deposited there. The victim tends to be retained above the obstacle. An obstacle may simply delay the victim's motion, leading to final burial down flow from the obstacle. Maximum speed of the flowing snow occurs at the avalanche center. Friction reduces flow velocity along the edges. The closer the victim's trajectory is to the center of the slide, the greater will be his burial depth. Probing for victims; probe Poles, 10 feet long two ski or tent pools, designed to attach to each other. The ski pole can be reversed, probing with the wrist strap down; or the basket can be removed so that the point is down (the preferred method), which allows the ski pole to penetrate the snow more easily. Probing Lines; for the probing operation to be effective, probing lines must be orderly and properly spaced. To ensure systematic and orderly probing. A string may be used to keep the probe lines aligned, but will require added time to maintain. Probing does not come to a halt when a possible contact is made. The probe is left in contact and the line continues. A shovel crew follows up by digging down along the pole. Dig in shifts, one standing by to assist when needed. Such a plan of operation is especially important when more than one victim is buried. Striking a body gives a distinct feel to the probe, which is easily recognizable in soft snow but less recognizable in hard compacted snow. A common problem is encountering debris that can be mistaken for the victim. Debris usually much more solid causing vibrations through probe. The probers themselves work silently. Probers are spaced the same as for the coarse probe. Each man probes in front of his left foot, then in the center of his straddled position, and finally in front of his right foot, then does the reverse. Types and characteristics; Starting points average 10 k’. Speeds average 200 mph. Slope Aspect; any slope of fresh snow (which dose not cohere) with an angle of repose of around 25 degrees or steeper suspect until it settles, Slopes as gentle as 15 degrees have avalanched. Most avalanches occur on slopes between 30 and 45 degrees. Slopes above 60 degrees often do not build up significant quantities of snow. When the avalanche danger is high avoid Northern, eastern and southern facing slopes? South and west slopes are harder and harden earlier in season and after storms? Most prone to avalanches in spring. Snow on north facing slopes is more likely to slide in midwinter. South facing slopes are most dangerous in the spring and on sunny, warm days. Slopes on the windward side are generally more stable than leeward slopes. Loose snow (aka point) avalanches; dangers of powder snow slides are suffocation or being swept over cliffs. Start at one point on the snow cover and grow in the shape of an inverted "V." Most frequently during the winter snow season. They often fall as many small sluffs during or shortly after a storm. This process removes snow from steep upper slopes and either stabilizes lower slopes or loads them with additional snow. Wet loose snow avalanches, large avalanches of this type, lubricated and weighed down by melting water or rain can travel long distances and have tremendous destructive power. Coastal ranges that have high temperatures and frequent rain are the most common areas for this type of avalanche. Occur in spring and summer. Slab avalanches are generally considered more dangerous than loose snow avalanches. Slab release is rapid. Are more likely to occur on convex slopes when cohesive snow begins to slide on a weak layer. The fracture line where the moving snow breaks away from the snow pack makes this type of avalanche easy to identify. Slides of wet snow freezes more solidly upon stopping. Settled snow looks darker than new flake. Compacted snow normally will not avalanche. Ground Cover rough terrain is more stable than smooth terrain. On grass, scree or on smooth rock, the snow has little to anchor to so slopes of even moderate steepness, are liable to avalanche. Or if seeping water peculates under snow forming ice base. Evidence of Avalanching look for recent avalanches and for signs of wind-loading and wind-slabs. Fracture Lines avoid any slopes showing cracks. Sounds beware of hollow sounds a "whumping" noise. They may suggest a radical settling of the snow pack.

TRIGGERS; Vibration, earth tremors have triggered avalanches. Units should always trigger avalanches before crossing if tactical situation permits. Using passing helicopters, heavy equipment, explosions.

Temperature, early ski mountaineers in the Alps noticed that avalanches sometimes occurred when shadows struck a previously sun-warmed slope. When the temperature is extremely low, settlement and adhesion occur slowly. Avalanches that occur during extreme cold weather usually occur during or immediately following a storm. At a temperature just below freezing, the snow pack stabilizes quickly. At temperatures above freezing, especially if temperatures rise quickly, the potential for avalanche is high. Rapid temperature changes, packed snow expands and contracts with temperature changes. For normal density, settled snow, a drop in temperature of 10 degrees Celsius (18 degrees Fahrenheit) would cause a snow slope 300 meters wide to contract 2 centimeters. Precipitation, storms can deposit dry snow early, which bonds poorly with the heavier snow deposited later. About 90 % of avalanches occur during or within twenty-four hours after a snowstorm. The rate at which snow falls is important. High rates of snowfall (2.5 centimeters per hour or greater?), especially when accompanied by wind, are usually responsible for major periods of avalanche activity. Rain falling on snow will increase its weight and weakens the snow pack. Wind, sustained winds of 15 mph and over transport snow and form wind slabs on the lee side of slopes.

TEST; Snow Pits; snow pits can be used to determine slope stability. Dig the snow pit on the suspect slope or a slope with the same sun and wind conditions. Snow deposits may vary greatly within a few meters due to wind and sun variations. Dig a 2-meter by 2-meter pit across the fall line, down to ground level. Once the pit is complete, smooth the face with a shovel. Conduct a shovel shear test; a shovel shear test puts pressure on a representative sample of the snow pack. The core of this test is to isolate a column of the snow pack from three sides. The column should be of similar size to the blade of the shovel. Dig out the sides of the column without pressing against the column with the shovel (this affects the strength). To isolate the rear of the column, use a rope or string to saw from side to side to the base of the column. If the column remained standing while cutting the rear, place the shovel face down on the top of the column. Tap with varying degrees of strength on the shovel to see what force it takes to create movement on the bed of the column. The surface that eventually slides will be the layer to look at closer. This test provides a better understanding of the snow pack strength. For greater results you will need to do this test in many areas and formulate a scale for the varying methods of tapping the shovel i.e. shovel lifted to a constant height before dropping onto column. Conduct a Rutschblock test; to conduct the test, isolate a column slightly longer than the length of your snowshoes or skis (same method as for the shovel shear test). One person moves on their skis or snowshoes above the block without disturbing the block. Once above, the person carefully places one snowshoe or ski onto the block with no body weight for the first stage of the test. The next stage is adding weight to the first leg. Next, place the other foot on the block. If the block is still holding up, squat once, then twice, and so on. The remaining stage is to jump up and land on the block.

(Reference, Step # 3 Concepts of Operations, part B) maps, models and weather. COE rule # 3 Formations “men learned” and rule # 5. And Appendix PCP rule # 13 for information on glaciers and Appendix MM&W for more information)

12) Don’t skyline:

Don’t cast silhouettes against backgrounds i.e. skylines, crawl up too roof pecks, hill crest, ridges or cliffs after choosing good backgrounds. Example, positioned right in front of tree. The rising ground behind objective prevented light form fire diffusing itself. Those close to fire see less of what is in its light. Be just as careful at night especially moonlight nights as in the daytime about keeping off the skyline. If you are framed against a light road at night, you will make a sharp silhouette. Remember that the position of the enemy observer, and not the topographic crest, fixes the skyline.

13) When crossing:

The easy way is always mined. lol! With elongated objects, Example: logs, fences or walls lie along side and roll over parallel to them. When crossing roads, trails and (rivers if tactical and other factors coincide) you want to cross just before a bend at low points and or at under passes or bridges. Look for a high place from which you can get a good view of the obstacle and possible crossing sites. A distant view, perhaps from a ridge is sometimes better than a hundred close views from the roadside or riverbank. Then crawl up to the edge of road etc (chose good back ground) and observe the other side. Pick location with cover and or concealment on both sides. Always set up flank security especially a lookout posted 100 meters upstream to watch for any obstacles (fallen trees) that may be carried downstream and interfere with the crossing (or traffic of any kind on river or roads). Security posted downstream might set up a net to snag items lost or Marines who fall in. At least have poles or ropes prepared to throw for rescue. After crossing to other side, check area and establish flank security. From the air, crossing an open field is easily observed. Movement over open ground is disclosed by tracks, especially from the air, your individual footprints show up as a light line across such a field. Stay on the terrain lines: fences, ditches, hedgerows, roads and paths already there. In open areas standing Marines casts larger shadows. Hugging the ground, keeps shadows as small as possible. With less growth available, the more the necessity for crawling and speed i.e. running. Moving in the open during moonless nights. Reasons for this, a dark night furnishes the shadow/concealment and a route is chosen to give you background, keeping you off the skyline. In cultivated fields, the lowest point may be covered by water, reducing silhouette if you wade in, and concealing tracks. Also despite conventional wisdom to the contrary, many prefer to travel in the middle of rice paddies. People, pigs and geese lived in the tree lines. Furthermore, it is also difficult to walk quietly in the woods at night, easier for the enemy waiting in ambush to here you. Light discipline is essential. On bright moonlight nights, the shadow along the edge of the woods maybe the best route, but you lose security, with enemy having cover and concealment if located along wooded edge.

The absents of good roads well have less effect in summer but dust gives away the least movement. Dust clouds of German vehicles on eastern front during WW 11 seen 40 miles away by USSR civilians. In barren land dust can wear out pistons in weeks. Crossing desert surfaces maintain constant speed, avoid sharp turns abrupt stops or starts. Patches of different colors or Shades should be checked before crossing, especially in Marshes. Marsh tails visible during dry season well hold water in wet season. In summer marshes/swamps are barriers to traffic, in winter like rivers become bridges for traffic. Mud in general leads to the feeling of isolation and premature retreats. Avoiding tracks of vehicles in front of yours may provide better traction. Lead vehicles become separated from fallow on vehicles. Formations difficult to control as Marines and vehicles simply seek out best routes. Getting stuck, tress cut down, items and debris (from buildings) taken and thrown into the road. Vehicle winching use anchored whole method. Tarp is filled with sand for anchor. Letting air out of tires for traction. Using engine exhaust to fill air bags, to lift vehicles. Crossing dunes drive strait up at best speed on windward/up wind side which is crusted and has a more gradual slope. Leeward/Down wind side no crust and has steeper slope. With tanks, sluggish steering response indicates sand build up between stern sprockets, treads can come off. Counter by backing up. Shaking right and left. Tank treads shorten not raped around all wheels will still work.

(Reference, Step # 3 Concepts of Operations, part B) maps, models and weather. And PCP rule # 11. Appendix PCP rule # 13 for information on glaciers and Appendix MM&W for more information)

14) Patrol till dusk wake before dawn:

As long as patrol is moving it is less a target. Once you stop, seeing you is more difficult. Enemy will most likely attack at dawn be up and ready. You do not wait for sunrise in the place you were at during sunset. Move to alternate position. Attack at night or in the morning; these are hours of refreshment, meals and or showers.

(Reference, Def., conduct of the defense, “Historically, darkness of night” etc.)

15) Never let up your guard:

When you secure an area don’t forget to tell the enemy. lol! This rule applies especially at exits or entries when patrols are leaving or returning. Enemy attacks likely at night or after long patrols. Villagers in area being friendly with Marines on there initial contact, then blocking patrol on their return trip, upon egress from area. When walking look back frequently to note features of recognition for return trip, especially in sub-terrain or caves. With units every other man (360 degree check) method for enemy searches. When returning to original positions make a complete circle with your body. Urban patrols should pause now and then to just lesson i.e. stop and “lay dog” to listen for anything out of place.

When on patrol and you come up on a possible ambush point i.e. ally entrance a foe could jump out from and get between patrol members to shoot them after they pass. You should station yourself there until next member arrives to relieve you. Aka station and relief tactic. Note figure eight pattern might work well for individual search as you patrol.

Over all tips

The classic Law of the 7 P’s applies. Proper Previous Planning Prevents Piss Poor Performance.

Dispatch trail breaking teams far enough in advance to insure continuous, uninterrupted movement of the main body.

Prior detailed reconnaissance is most important to insure successful mobility as always.

The first halt after initiating a march should be made in approximately 15 minutes. This will allow adjustment of clothing and equipment.

Normally, corpsmen and first sgt will bring up the rear of the column and, in each halt, will check the men and report their condition to the leader.

Marching in single file is often the best formation. It maintains track discipline, camouflage, and reduces the number of trailbreakers and reconnaissance parties required.

Advantages of snow; speed of patrol on skies and longer ranges possible. Holding capacity is the interaction with waxes and snow to minimize back sliding with out impeding forward motion. Changes with snow conditions different waxes are used. Carrying capacity when snow packed capacity improves movement is easier. Ice although it is firm it is slippery. In the woods snow softer Carrying capacity pourer than in open area. Also in wooded areas snow collects latter in winter and remains longer into spring. Movement from sun lighted to shaded areas is difficult because snow in lighted areas is wet and sticks to skies and snow shoes, then freezes in shaded areas. During break up periods i.e. Spring. Snow becomes slushy, danger of rust and corrosion is at its highest in Summer. At mid winter the lack of moisture in the air reduces this risk. During brake up and autumn drops in temperature at night and still in early morning makes movement easier. Sleds when run long distances build up heat on there skates; when sleds are stopped they may settle in snow and freeze in the ice. Should be parked on logs or unloaded and stood on end or side.

MT. slopes easy to travel in summer can be difficult in winter. Sleet on rocks can quickly transform trail into difficult route. Rock falls almost always localized on certain part of the face of a peak in gullies or couloirs making natural funnels. Routes which cling to a ridge (military crest) are immune. (Sinai) Rock slides and avalanches are not as common as in high cold mountains. Whenever a rock is kicked loose, personnel in area can immediately lean into the cliff to reduce their exposure, and do not look up. Personnel farther away may look up to determine where the rock is heading and seek cover behind an obstacle. Lacking cover, personnel should move out of its path to the left or right. If a Marine slips or stumbles he must immediately self-arrest, roll over onto stomach with his legs downhill, digging into the slope with hands, elbows, knees and toes. With steep terrain, of solid ground, (rock or ice) use the ice ax for self-arrest. Also used as a third point of contact on difficult terrain. If not in use the ice ax is carried in or on the rucksack with its head down and secured. The character of rocks; Dolomite or Granite of the Aiguilles of Chamonix is very secure. Sandstone and shale of the Canadian Rockies very unstable. Rock most likely to fall when ice of previous night melts in morning sunlight, Eastern slopes first.

In MT. travel is difficult on snow shoes. Continuous traffic packs snow and may allow movement on foot, with out skies or shoes. Infantry may utilize tracks made by armor. Marines on skies can be towed but not with shoes. On shoes mobility restored to point approaching foot traffic on hard ground.

(Reference, PCP, rule # 4/5 skis)

Assent of MT. start from camp located at snow line or above, early as possible in morning several hours before sunrise. Marines roped together as soon as unit reaches the ne’ve (firn) of glaciers. Most experienced leads, least in the middle. If soft snow is found or much step cutting in ice is necessary each Marine relieves the other as leader. Pace is slow enough that no one gasps for breath. At low altitude strong unit can average 2000 feet per hour vertically. Can be as slow as 100 feet per hour with lots of step cutting or on rocks. Rope always kept taunt between Marines. Spikes driven in by leader as high as can be reached. Snap ring emplaced, rope fed threw and then haul others up. Halts made rarely at low altitudes, every two hours at high elevations. Crossing wide snow fields, willow wands may be set. Stone cairns may be erected at strategic points on rocks. On descent strongest man at stern for holding Marines that fall. At difficult points on the descent even more than on the ascent the rope is belayed about a projection (piece of rock) or ice axes, wedged in to rocks. Only one man moves at a time. At very difficult points during descent units may descend en rappel. Fatigue or feeling of relaxation makes for carelessness, more accidents happen during descent. At least 3 Marines per unit, smaller the party less delay crossing difficult terrain, when only one at a time may cross. With out 3 rescue of one becomes difficult. The weak link is very important, in gauging units’ abilities. When vehicle patrols are stopped (weather to turn engines off or not) Herringbone maneuver, column splits into two one each side facing out. Two vehicles forward one each lane to block traffic, two vehicles move to stern.

CLIMBING

The margin of safety is a protective buffer the climber places between himself and potential climbing hazards. Both subjective (personnel-related) and objective (environmental) hazards must be considered when applying the margin of safety. The leader must apply the margin of safety taking into account the strengths and weaknesses of the entire team or unit.

Rock climbing can leave the climbing party totally exposed to weather, terrain hazards, and the enemy for the length of the climb. Sometimes steep rock cannot be avoided. Climbing relatively short sections of steep rock (one or two pitches) may prove quicker and safer than using alternate routes. A steep rock route would normally be considered an unlikely avenue of approach and, therefore, might be weakly defended or not defended at all.

Approach Observations for route selection.

Watch the mountain during the approach march, studying it for climbing routes. Distant views can reveal large-scale patterns of ridges, cliffs, snowfields and glaciers. General angles of the large rock masses can be seen from afar. Most features (patterns and angles) repeat themselves at increasingly finer levels (smaller scale), as they are generally derived from the overall structure of the particular mountain group. A basic knowledge of mountain geology, combined with the specific geological background of the operational area, pays off in more efficient travel. Experienced climbers learn to climb with the "eyes." before getting on the rock, study all possible routes, or "lines," to the top. Noting fault lines, gross bedding planes of rock, cliff bands, and crevasse zones. Snowy or vegetated ledge systems. Note any larger ledges or benches for resting places. Weaknesses in the mountain walls, such as couloirs or gullies. Looking for cracks, ledges, nubbins, and other irregularities in the rock used for footholds and handholds, mentally climb the route, rehearsing the step-by-step sequence of movements required.

SPOTTING

A "top-rope" belay can be used for safety, allowing the individual to increase the length and difficulty of the climb under the protection of the climbing rope.

Personnel not climbing can act as "otters" for those climbing. Spotting is a technique used to add a level of safety to climbing without a rope. A second man stands below and just outside of the climbers fall path and helps (spots) the climber to land safely if he should fall. The spotter should not catch but pushes the climber against the rock.

CLIMBING TECHNIQUE

A variety of techniques are used to climb different types of rock formations. These techniques can be thought of as a combination of the balanced movement required to walk a tightrope and the used to ascend a ladder. No mountaineering equipment is required; however, the techniques are also used in roped climbing.

Climbing involves linking together a series of movements based on foot and hand placement, weight shift, and movement. When this series of movements is combined correctly, smooth climbing which reduces excess force results. The basic principle is based on the five body parts described here. The right hand, left hand, right foot, left foot, and body (trunk). The basic principle is to move only one at a time. The trunk is not moved in conjunction with a foot or hand, a hand is not moved in conjunction with a foot, and so on. Following this simple technique forces both legs to do all the lifting simultaneously.

Body position is the single most important element. The body should be near vertical with the weight centered over feet. Leaning in towards the rock will cause the feet to push outward, away from the rock, resulting in a loss of friction between the boot sole and rock surface. A relaxed, comfortable stance is essential. The legs are straight, bent legs and tense muscles tire quickly. The heels are kept low to reduce fatigue. Strained muscles may vibrate uncontrollably. AKA "Elvis-ing" it is cured by straightening the leg, lowering the heel. The hands are used to maintain balance. Keeping the hands between waist and shoulder level will reduce arm fatigue.

Whenever possible, three points of contact are maintained with the rock. Proper positioning of the hips and shoulders is critical. When using two footholds and one handhold, the hips and shoulders should be centered over both feet. In most cases, as the climbing progresses, the body is resting on one foot with two handholds for balance. The hips and shoulders must be centered over the support foot to maintain balance, allowing the "free" foot to maneuver.

The angle or steepness of the rock also determines how far away from the rock the hips and shoulders should be. On low-angle slopes, the hips are moved out away from the rock to keep the body in balance with the weight over the feet. The shoulders can be moved closer to the rock to reach handholds. On steep rock, the hips are pushed closer to the rock. The shoulders are moved away from the rock by arching the back. The body is still in balance over the feet and the eyes can see where the hands need to go. Sometimes, when footholds are small, the hips are moved back to increase friction between the foot and the rock. This is normally done on quick, intermediate holds. It should be avoided in the rest position as it places more weight on the arms and hands. When weight must be placed on handholds, the arms should be kept straight to reduce fatigue.

Performing these steps in this exact order will not always be necessary because the nature of the route will dictate the availability of hand and foot placements. The basic steps are weight, shift, and movement (movement being either the foot, hand, or body). (A typical climbing sequence is shown in Figure 6-3.)

The trunk does not move during foot movement. Shift the weight from both feet to one foot. Feet placed within one to two feet of the starting position (higher placement will result in a potentially higher lift for the legs to make, creating more stress, and is called a high step) Shift the weight onto both feet. Lift the body into a new stance with both legs. Move one hand to a new position between waist and head height. During this movement, the trunk should be completely balanced in position and the removed hand should have no effect on stability.

Now the entire body is in a new position and ready to start the process again. Following these steps will prevent lifting with the hands and arms, which are used to maintain stance and balance. If both legs are bent, leg extension can be performed as soon as one foot has been moved. Hand movements can be delayed until numerous foot movements have been made, which not only creates shorter lifts with the legs, but may allow a better choice for the next hand movements because the reach will have increased.

When the angle of the rock increases, these movements become more critical. Holding or pulling the body into the rock with the arms and hands may be necessary as the angle increases (this is still not lifting with the arms). Many climbing routes have angles greater than ninety degrees (overhanging) and the arms are used to support partial body weight. The same technique applies even at those angles. Avoid climbing directly above or below other climbers. When personnel must climb at the same time, following the same line, a fixed rope should be installed.

Avoid moving on the knees and elbows. These bony portions of the limbs offer little friction and "feel" on the rock.

USE OF HOLDS

All jewelry should be removed from the fingers.

Avoid climbing with gloves on because of the decreased "feel" for the rock. The use of gloves in the training environment is especially discouraged, while their use in the mountains is often mandatory when it is cold. A thin polypropylene or wool glove is best for rock climbing, although heavier cotton or leather work gloves are often used for belaying.

Avoid grasping vegetation for handholds; the root systems can be shallow and will usually not support much weight.

The climber should check each hold before use, grab and tug on the hold to test it. Force can be applied in a direction that strengthens it. A loose nubbin might not be strong enough to support the climber's weight, but it may serve as an adequate handhold.

CLIMBING WITH THE FEET

It is true that solid handholds and a firm grip are needed in some combination techniques; however, even the most strenuous techniques require good footwork and a quick return to a balanced position over one or both feet.

The beginning climber will have a natural tendency to look up for handholds. Try to keep the hands low and train your eyes to look down for footholds. Even the smallest irregularity in the rock can support the climber once the foot is positioned properly and weight is committed to it.

Maximum Sole Contact. Maximum friction is obtained by placing as much of the boot sole on the rock as possible, leg muscles can also relax. (Figure 6-4) On some large holds, like bucket holds that extend deep into the rock, the entire foot cannot be used. The climber may not be able to achieve a balanced position if the foot is stuck too far underneath a bulge in the rock. In this case, placing only part of the foot on the hold may allow the climber to achieve a balanced stance. Remember to keep the heels low to reduce strain on the lower leg muscles.

image edited

Edging. used where horizontal crack systems and other irregularities in the rock form small, well-defined ledges. The edge of the boot sole (usually, the inside edge) is used. Whenever possible, turn the foot sideways and use the entire inside edge. (Figure 6-5)

On smaller holds, edging with the toe, may be used. Use of the toe is most tiring because the heel is off the rock. Remember to keep the heel low to reduce fatigue. Curling and stiffening the toes in the boot increases support. A stronger position is usually obtained on small ledges by turning the foot at about a 45-degree angle, using the strength of the big toe and the ball of the foot. The stiffer the sole, the better the edging capability.

image edited

Smearing. When footholds are too small to use a good edging technique, the ball of the foot can be "smeared" over the hold. The smearing technique requires the boot to adhere to the rock by deformation of the sole and by friction. The leg should be kept straight whenever possible. Rock climbing shoes are specifically designed to maximize friction for smearing; some athletic shoes also work well. (Figure 6-6)

image edited

Jamming. Works on the same principal as chock placement. The foot is set into a crack in such a way that it "jams" into place, resisting a downward pull. The jamming technique is a specialized skill used to climb vertical or near vertical cracks. The technique is not limited to just wedging the feet; fingers, hands, arms, even the entire leg or body are all used in the jamming technique, depending on the size of the crack. The foot can be jammed in a crack in different ways. It can be inserted above a constriction and set into the narrow portion, or it can be placed in the crack and turned, like a camming device, until it locks in place. Some foot jams may be difficult to remove once weight has been committed to them, especially if a stiffer sole boot is used. The foot is less likely to get stuck when it is twisted or "cammed" into position. When removing the boot from a crack, reverse the way it was placed to prevent further constriction.

image edited

USING THE HANDS

Exactly how and where to position the hands and arms depends on what holds are available, and what configuration will best support the current stance as well as the movement to the next stance. Selecting handholds between waist and shoulder level helps in different ways. Circulation in the arms and hands is best when arms are low. Secondly, there’s less tendency to "hang" on the arms when handholds are at shoulder level and below. Both of these contribute to a relaxed stance and reduce fatigue.

a. As the individual climbs, he continually repositions his hands and arms to keep the body in balance, with the weight centered over the feet. On lower-angled rock, he may simply need to place the hands up against the rock and extend the arm to maintain balance; just like using an ice ax as a third point of contact in mountain walking. Sometimes, he will be able to push directly down on a large hold with the palm of the hand. More often though, he will need to "grip" the rock and push or pull to maintain balance.

b. Beginners will undoubtedly place too much weight on the hands and arms. Think about ourselves climbing a ladder, our body weight is on our legs. Our hands grip, and our arms pull on each rung only enough to maintain our balance. Of course, as the size and availability of holds decreases, and the steepness of the rock approaches the vertical, more weight well be placed on the arms and handholds for brief moments. The key move quickly from smaller holds to the larger holds.

(1) Push Holds. rely on friction created when the hand is pushed against the rock. Most often a "downward pressure" on a ledge or nubbin. However, don’t limit push holds to applications of down pressure. Pushing sideways, and on occasion, even upward on less obvious holds can prove secure. Push holds often work best when used in combination with other holds. Pushing in opposite directions and "push-pull" combinations are excellent techniques.

(a) effective push holds don’t require the use of the entire hand. On smaller holds, the side of the palm, the fingers, or the thumb may be all that’s needed.

(b) Most push holds do not require much grip; however, friction might be increased by taking advantage of any rough surfaces or irregularities in the rock. Try squeezing, or "pinching," the rock between the thumb and fingers (see paragraph on pinch holds).

(2) Pull Holds. aka "cling holds," which are grasped and pulled upon, are the most widely used holds. Grip plays more of a role, therefore, it normally feels more secure to the climber than a push hold. Because of this feeling of security, pull holds are often overworked, and climbers have a tendency to hang from them. Avoid the "death grip" syndrome by climbing with the feet. (Figure 6-9)

(a) Like push holds, pressure on a pull hold can be applied straight down, sideways, or upward.

(b) Pulling sideways on vertical cracks can be very secure. There is less tendency to hang from "side-clings" and the hands naturally remain lower. The thumb can often push against one side of the crack, in opposition to the pull by the fingers, creating a stronger hold. Both hands can also be placed in the same crack, with the hands pulling in opposite directions. The number of possible combinations is limited only by the imagination.

image edited

(c) Friction and strength of a pull hold can be increased by the way the hand grips the rock. Normally, the grip is stronger when the fingers are closed together; however, sometimes more friction is obtained by spreading the fingers apart and placing them between irregularities on the rock surface. On small holds, grip can often be improved by bending the fingers upward, forcing the palm of the hand to push against the rock. This helps to hold the finger tips in place and reduces muscle strain in the hand. Keeping the forearm up against the rock also allows the arm and hand muscles to relax more.

(d) Another technique that helps to strengthen a cling hold for a downward pull is to press the thumb against the side of the index finger, or place it on top of the index finger and press down. This hand configuration, known as a "ring grip," works well on smaller holds.

(3) Pinch Holds. Sometimes a small nubbin or protrusion in the rock can be "squeezed" between the thumb and fingers. Friction is applied by increasing the grip on the rock. Pinch holds are often overlooked by the novice climber because they feel insecure at first and cannot be relied upon to support much body weight. If the climber has his weight over his feet properly, the pinch hold will work well in providing balance. The pinch hold can also be used as a gripping technique for push holds and pull holds.

image edited

(4) Jam Holds. Like foot jams, the fingers and hands can be wedged or cammed into a crack. Cotton tape can be used to protect the fingertips, knuckles, and the back of the hand; however, tape also adds friction. Prolonged jamming technique should be avoided.

(a) An open hand or clenched fist can be inserted and wedged into a crack. Friction can be created by applying cross pressure between the fingers and the back of the hand. Another technique for vertical cracks is to place the hand in the crack with the thumb pointed either up or down. The hand is then clenched as much as possible. When the arm is straightened, it will twist the hand and tend to cam it into place. This combination of clenching and camming usually produces the most friction, and the most secure hand jam in vertical cracks.

(b) In smaller cracks, only the fingers will fit. Use as many fingers as the crack will allow. The fingers can sometimes be stacked in some configuration to increase friction. The thumb is usually kept outside the crack in finger jams and pressed against the rock to increase friction or create cross pressure. In vertical cracks it is best to insert the fingers with the thumb pointing down to make use of the natural camming action of the fingers that occurs when the arm is twisted towards a normal position. Note thumb up or down or tucked into palm.

(c) Jamming technique for large cracks, or "off widths," requiring the use of arm, leg, and body jams, is another technique. To jam or cam an arm, leg, or body into an off width, the principle is the same as for fingers, hands, or feet-you are making the jammed appendage "fatter" by folding or twisting it inside the crack. For off widths, you may place your entire arm inside the crack with the arm folded and the palm pointing outward. The leg can be used, from the calf to the thigh, and flexed to fit the crack. Routes requiring this type of climbing should be avoided as the equipment normally used for protection might not be large enough to protect larger cracks and openings. However, sometimes a narrower section may be deeper in the crack allowing the use of "normal" size protection.

6-10. COMBINATION TECHNIQUES

a. Sometimes, the climber may come upon a section of the rock that defies the basic principles of climbing. Many of these type problems require the hands and feet to work in opposition to one another. Most will place more weight on the hands and arms than is desirable, and some will put the climber in an "out of balance" position. To make the move, the climber may have to "break the rules" momentarily. The key to using combination techniques is to plan and execute them deliberately, without lunging or groping for holds, yet quickly, before muscles tire, good technique more than great strength.

(1) Change Step. The change step, or hop step, can be used when the climber needs to change position of the feet. It is commonly used when traversing to avoid crossing the feet. Two solid handholds should be used. Keeping the forearms against the rock during the maneuver takes some of the strain off the hands. The climber simply places his weight on his handholds while he repositions the feet. Often with a quick "hop," replacing the lead foot with the trail foot on the same hold.

(2) Mantling. can be used when the distance between holds increases and there are no immediate places to move the hands or feet. It does require a ledge (mantle) or projection in the rock that the climber can press straight down upon.

(a) When the ledge is above head height, mantling begins with pull holds, usually "hooking" both hands over the ledge. The climber pulls himself up until his head is above the hands, where the pull holds become push holds. He elevates himself until the arms are straight and he can lock the elbows to relax the muscles. Rotating the hands inward during the transition to push holds helps to place the palms more securely on the ledge. Once the arms are locked, a foot can be raised and placed on the ledge. The climber may have to remove one hand to make room for the foot. With the foot on the ledge, weight can be taken off the arms and the climber can grasp the holds that were previously out of reach. Once balanced over the foot, he can stand up on the ledge and plan his next move.

(b) Pure mantling uses arm strength to raise the body; however, the climber can often smear the balls of the feet against the rock and "walk" the feet up during the maneuver to take some of the weight off the arms.

(3) Undercling. a classic example of handholds and footholds working in opposition (Figure 6-13). Commonly used where the rock projects outward, forming a bulge or small overhang. Can be used in the tops of buckets, also. The hands are placed "palms-up" underneath the bulge, applying an upward pull. Increasing this upward pull creates a counterforce, or body tension, which applies more weight and friction to the footholds. The arms and legs should be kept as straight as possible to reduce fatigue. The climber can often lean back slightly in the undercling position, enabling him to see above the overhang better and search for the next hold.

(4) Lieback. another good example of the hands working in opposition to the feet. Often used in a vertical or diagonal crack separating two rock faces that come together at, more or less, a right angle (commonly referred to as a dihedral). The crack edge closest to the body is used for handholds while the feet are pressed against the other edge. The climber bends at the waist, putting the body into an L-shaped position. Leaning away from the crack on two pull holds, body tension creates friction between the feet and the hands. The feet must be kept relatively high to maintain weight, creating maximum friction between the sole and the rock surface. Either full sole contact or the smearing technique can be used, whichever produces the most friction.

(a) The climber ascends a dihedral by alternately shuffling the hands and feet upward. The lieback technique can be extremely tiring, especially when the dihedral is near vertical. The arms should be kept straight throughout the entire maneuver so the climber's weight is pulling against bones and ligaments, rather than muscle. The legs should be straightened whenever possible.

(b) Placing protection in a lieback is especially tiring. Look for edges or pockets for the feet in the crack or on the face for a better position to place protection from, or for a rest position. Often, a lieback can be avoided with closer examination of the available face features. The lieback can be used alternately with the jamming technique, or vice versa, for variation or to get past a section of a crack with difficult or nonexistent jam possibilities. The lieback can sometimes be used as a face maneuver (Figure 6-14).

image edited

(5) Stemming. When the feet work in opposition from a relatively wide stance, the maneuver is known as stemming. Sometimes used on faces, as well as in a dihedral in the absence of solid handholds for the lieback (Figure 6-15).

image edited

(a) The classic example of stemming is when used in combination with two opposing push holds in wide, parallel cracks, known as chimneys. Chimneys are cracks in which the walls are at least 1 foot apart and just big enough to squeeze the body into. Friction is created by pushing outward with the hands and feet on each side of the crack. The climber ascends the chimney by alternately moving the hands and feet up the crack (Figure 6-16). Applying pressure with the back and bottom is usually necessary in wider chimneys. Usually, full sole contact of the shoes will provide the most friction, although smearing may work best in some instances. Chimneys that do not allow a full stemming position can be negotiated using the arms, legs, or body as an integral contact point. This technique will often feel more secure since there is more body to rock contact.

Figure 6-16. Chimney sequence (continued).

(b) The climber can sometimes rest by placing both feet on the same side of the crack, forcing the body against the opposing wall. The feet must be kept relatively high up under the body so the force is directed sideways against the walls. The arms should be straightened with the elbows locked whenever possible. The climber must ensure that the crack does not widen beyond the climbable width before committing to the maneuver.

(6) Slab Technique. A slab is a relatively smooth, low-angled rock formation that requires a slightly modified climbing technique (Figure 6-17). Since slab rock normally contains few, if any holds, the technique requires maximum friction and perfect balance over the feet.

(a) On lower-angled slab, the climber can often stand erect and climb using full sole contact. On steeper slab, the climber will need to apply good smearing technique. The climber will have to flex the ankles and knees so his weight is placed more directly over the balls of the feet. He may then have to bend at the waist to place the hands on the rock, while keeping the hips over his feet.

(b) The climber must pay attention to any changes in slope angle and adjust his body accordingly. Even the slightest change in the position of the hips over the feet can mean the difference between a good grip or a quick slip. The climber should also take advantage of any rough surfaces, or other irregularities.

(7) Down Climbing. Descending steep rock is normally performed using a roped method; however, the climber may at some point be required to down climb a route. Down climbing easier terrain is often quicker than taking the time to rig a rappel point. Also, a climber might find himself confronted with difficulties part way up a route that exceed his climbing ability, or the abilities of others to follow.

1. Down climbing can inadvertently lead into an unforeseen dangerous position on a descent. When in doubt, use a roped descent.

2. Down climbing is accomplished at a difficulty level well below the ability of the climber.

(a) On easier terrain, the climber can face outward, away from the rock, enabling him to see the route better and descend quickly. As the steepness and difficulty increase, he can often turn sideways, still having a good view but being better able to use the hands and feet on the holds available. On the steepest terrain, the climber will have to face the rock and down climb using good climbing techniques.

(b) Down climbing is usually more difficult than ascending a given route. Some holds will be less visible when down climbing, and slips are more likely to occur. The climber must often lean well away from the rock to look for holds and plan his movements. More weight is placed on the arms and handholds at times to accomplish this, as well as to help lower the climber to the next foothold. Hands should be moved to holds as low as waist level to give the climber more range of movement with each step. If the handholds are too high, he may have trouble reaching the next foothold. The climber must be careful not to overextend himself, forcing a release of his handholds before reaching the next foothold.

Do not drop from good handholds to a standing position. A bad landing could lead to injured ankles or a fall beyond the planned landing area.

(c) Descending slab formations can be especially tricky. The generally lower angle of slab rock may give the climber a false sense of security, and a tendency to move too quickly. Down climbing must be slow and deliberate, as in ascending, to maintain perfect balance and weight distribution over the feet.

(d) On steeper slab, the climber will normally face the rock and down climb, using the same smearing technique as for ascending. An alternate method for descending slab is to face away from the rock in a "crab" position (Figure 6-18). Weight is still concentrated over the feet, but may be shifted partly onto the hands to increase overall friction. The climber is able to maintain full sole contact with the rock and see the entire descent route. Allowing the buttocks to "drag behind" on the rock will decrease the actual weight on the footholds, reducing friction, and leading to the likelihood of a slip. Facing the rock, and down-climbing with good smearing technique, is usually best on steeper slab.

image edited

MOUNTAIN WALKING TECHNIQUES

BASIC PRINCIPLES

Up scree or talus, through boulder fields or steep wooded mountainsides, over snow or grass-covered slopes, the basic principles of mountain walking remain the same.

a. The soldier’s weight is centered directly over the feet. He places his foot flat on the ground to obtain as much (boot) sole-ground contact as possible. Then, he places his foot on the uphill side of grass tussocks, small talus and other level spots to avoid twisting the ankle and straining the Achilles tendon. He straightens the knee after each step to allow for rest, and takes moderate steps at a steady pace. An angle of ascent or descent that is too steep is avoided, and any indentations in the slope are used to advantage.

b. pace is adapted to conditions. Set a tempo, or number of steps per minute, according to the pace of the unit. (Physical differences mean that the tempos of two people moving at the same speed will not always be the same.) The soldier maintains tempo and compensates for changes of slope or terrain by adjusting the length of his stride. Tempo, pace, and rhythm are enhanced when an interval of three to five paces is kept between individuals. This interval helps lessen the "accordion" effect of people at the end of the file who must constantly stop and start.

c. The terrain, weather, and light conditions affect the rate of climb.

d. When a moderate pace is set, the need for rest halts decreases, the chance of personnel overheating is lessened, and a unit can cover a given distance in a minimal time. Moving too fast, produces early fatigue, requires more rest halts resulting in loss of climbing time. Rest, good nutrition and hydration, acclimatization, are key to successful mountain operations.

If possible, rests should be taken on level ground avoiding steeper inclines.

(1) During the first half-hour of movement an adjustment halt should be taken. Soldiers will loosen or tighten bootlaces as needed, adjust packs and add or remove appropriate layers of clothing.

(2) Following the first halt, a well-conditioned party may take a short rest every 1 to 1.5 hours. If possible, soldiers lean against a tree, rock, or hillside to relieve the shoulders of pack weight, breathe deeply, hydrate, and snack on trail food. These halts are kept short enough to avoid muscles stiffening (one to two minutes).

(3) Later in the march longer halts may be necessary due to fatigue. At these halts soldiers should immediately put on additional clothing to avoid chilling—it is much easier to keep a warm body warm than to warm up a cold one.

e. The rest step is used for steep slopes, snowfields, and higher elevations. It controls pace and limits fatigue by giving the lungs and legs a moment to recuperate between steps. Pace is kept slow and rhythmic.

(1) After each step forward, the soldier pauses briefly, relaxing the muscles of the forward leg while resting his entire bodyweight on the stern leg. The rear leg is kept straight with the knee locked so that bone, not muscle, supports the weight.

(2) Breathing is synchronized with the rest step. The number of breaths per step will change depending on the difficulty of the climb. Steeper slopes or higher elevations may require several breaths per step. When the air thins at altitude it is especially important to breathe deeply, using the "pressure breathing" technique. The soldier exhales strongly, enabling an easier, deeper inhale.

(3) This slow, steady, halting rest step is more efficient than spurts of speed, which are rapidly exhausting and require longer recovery.

f. Downhill walking uses less energy than uphill but is much harder on the body. Stepping down can hammer the full bodyweight onto the feet and legs. Blisters and blackened toenails, knee damage, and back pain may follow. To avoid these problems the soldier should start by tightening bootlaces and keep toenails trimmed. A ski pole, ice ax, or walking stick will help. (Refer to Chapter 11 for techniques and use of the ice ax.) Keep a moderate pace and walk with knees flexed to absorb shock.

g. Side hill travel on any surface should be avoided. Weighted down with a rucksack, the soldier is vulnerable to twisted ankles, back injury, and loss of balance. If side hill travel is necessary, try to switchback periodically, and use any lower angle flat areas such as rocks, animal trails, and the ground above grass or brush clumps to level off the route.

8-2. TECHNIQUES

Mountain walking techniques can be divided according to the general formation, surface, and ground cover such as walking on hard ground, on snow slopes and grassy slopes, through thick brush, and on scree and talus slopes.

a. Hard Ground. When ascending, employ the rest step to rest the leg muscles. Steep slopes can be traversed rather than climbed straight up. To turn at the end of each traverse, the soldier should step off in the new direction with the uphill foot. This prevents crossing the feet and possible loss of balance. While traversing, the full sole-to-ground principle is accomplished by rolling the ankle downhill on each step. For small stretches the herringbone step may be used—ascending straight up a slope with toes pointed out. A normal progression, as the slope steepens, would be from walking straight up, to a herringbone step, and then to a traverse on the steeper areas.

(2) Descending is best done by walking straight down the slope without traversing. The soldier keeps his back straight and bends at the knees to absorb the shock of each step. Body weight is kept directly over the feet and the full boot sole is placed on the ground with each step. Walking with a slight forward lean and with the feet in a normal position make the descent easier.

b. Snow Slopes. Snow-covered terrain can be encountered throughout the year above 1,500 meters in many mountainous areas. For ascending and descending moderate snow slopes are similar to walking on hard ground with some exceptions.

(1) Diagonal Traverse Technique. The most efficient means to ascend snow, in conjunction with the ice ax it provides balance and safety. This technique is a two-step sequence. The basic rest step, placing the leading (uphill) foot above and in front of the trailing (downhill) foot, and weighting the trail leg. This is the in-balance position. The ice ax, held in the uphill hand, is placed in the snow above and to the front. The soldier shifts his weight to the leading (uphill) leg and brings the unweighted trail (downhill) foot ahead of the uphill foot. He shifts weight to the forward (downhill) leg and then moves the uphill foot up and places it out ahead of the trail foot, returning to the in-balance position. At this point the ax is moved forward in preparation for the next step.

(2) Step Kicking. A basic technique used when crampons are not worn. It is best used on moderate slopes when the snow is soft enough to leave clear footprints. On softer snow the soldier swings his foot into the snow, allowing the leg’s weight and momentum to carve the step. Fully laden soldiers will need to kick steps, which take half of the boot. The steps should be angled slightly into the slope for added security. Succeeding climbers will follow directly in the steps of the trailbreaker, each one improving the step as he ascends. Harder snow requires more effort to kick steps, and they will not be as secure. The soldier may need to slice the step with the side of his boot and use the diagonal technique to ascend.

(3) Descending Snow. If the snow is soft and the slope gentle, simply walk straight down. Harder snow or steeper slopes call for the plunge step, which must be done in a positive, aggressive manner. The soldier faces out, steps off, and plants his foot solidly, driving the heel into the snow while keeping his leg straight. He shifts his weight to the new foot plant and continues down with the other foot. On steeper terrain it may be necessary to squat on the weighted leg when setting the plunge step. The upper body should be kept erect or canted slightly forward.

Tips on Snow Travel.

(a) Often the best descent is on a different route than the ascent. When looking for a firmer travel surface, watch for dirty snow—this absorbs more heat and thus hardens faster than clean snow.

(b) In the Northern Hemisphere, slopes with southern and western exposures set up earlier in the season and quicker after storms, but are more prone to avalanches in the spring. These slopes generally provide firm surfaces while northern and eastern exposures remain unconsolidated.

(c) Travel late at night or early in the morning is best if daytime temperatures are above freezing and the sun heats the slopes. The night’s cold hardens the snow surface.

(d) Avoid walking on snow next to logs, trees, and rocks as the subsurface snow has melted away creating hidden traps.

c. Grassy Slopes, are usually composed of small tussocks of growth rather than one continuous field.

(1) When ascending, step on the upper side of each hummock or tussock, where the ground is more level.

(2) When descending a grassy slope, the traverse technique should be used because of the uneven nature of the ground. A climber can easily build up too much speed and fall if a direct descent is tried. The hop-skip step can be useful on this type of slope. In this technique, the lower leg takes all of the weight, and the upper leg is used only for balance. When traversing, the climber’s uphill foot points in the direction of travel. The downhill foot points about 45 degrees off the direction of travel (downhill). This maintains maximum sole contact and prevents possible downhill ankle roll-out.

Note:

Wet grass can be extremely slippery; be aware of ground cover conditions.

d. Thick Brush is both a help and a hindrance. Brush-filled gullies can provide routes and rally points concealed from observation; on the other hand steep brushy terrain is hazardous to negotiate. Cliffs and steep ravines are hidden traps, and blow downs and thickets can obstruct travel. When brush must be negotiated take the most direct route across the obstacle; look for downed timber to use as bridges through the obstacle; or create a tunnel, standing on lower branches and using upper limbs for support.

e. Scree Slopes. Slopes composed of the smallest rocks are called scree slopes. Scree varies in size from the smallest gravel to about the size of a man’s fist.

(1) Ascending scree slopes is difficult and tiring and should be avoided, if possible. All principles of ascending hard ground and snow apply, but each step is carefully chosen so that the foot does not slide down when weighted. This is done by kicking in with the toe of the upper foot (similar to step-kicking in snow) so that a step is formed in the loose scree. After determining that the step is stable, weight is transferred to the upper leg, the soldier then steps up and repeats the process with the lower foot.

(2) The best method for descending scree slopes is to come straight down the slope using a short shuffling step with the knees bent, back straight, feet pointed downhill, and heels dug in. When several climbers descend a scree slope together, they should be as close together as possible (one behind the other at single arm interval) to prevent injury from dislodged rocks. When the bottom of the slope (or run out zone) cannot be seen, use caution because drop-offs may be encountered.

(3) Scree slopes can be traversed using the ice ax as a third point of contact. Always keep the ax on the uphill side. When the herringbone or diagonal method is used to ascend scree, the ax can be used placing both hands on the top and driving the spike into the scree slope above the climber. The climber uses the ax for balance as he moves up to it, and then repeats the process.

f. Talus Slopes, composed of rocks larger than a man’s fist. When ascending or descending, in talus climbers should always step on the uphill side of rocks and stay alert for movement underfoot. Disturbing unstable talus can cause rockslides. Climbers must stay in close columns while walking through talus so that dislodged rocks do not reach dangerous speeds before reaching lower soldiers. To prevent rock fall injuries, avoid traversing below other climbers. All other basics of mountain walking apply.

MOVEMENT OVER SNOW AND ICE

10-1. MOVEMENT OVER SNOW

On steep slopes in deep snow, the climber may climb straight up facing the slope. The ice ax shaft, driven directly into the snow, provides a quick and effective self-belay in case of a slip—the deeper the shaft penetrates the snow, the better the anchor (Figure 10-1). It is usually best, however, to climb snow-covered slopes in a traversing fashion in order to conserve energy, unless there is significant avalanche danger.

image edited

a.The progression from walking on flat terrain to moving on steep terrain is the same as for moving over snow-free terrain. If the snow is packed the sole of the boot will generally hold by kicking steps, even on steep slopes. Where it is difficult to make an effective step with the boot, a cut made with the adze of the ice ax creates an effective step. In these situations crampons should be used for faster and easier movement.

A technique known as glissading may also be used as an easy method of descent and is covered in detail later in this chapter.

10-3. USE OF ICE AX AND CRAMPONS

Movement over snow and ice is almost impossible without an ice ax and or crampons.

a.Ice Ax. When walking on snow or ice, the ice ax can be used as a third point of contact.

(1) Cane Position. The ice ax can be used on gentle slopes as a walking stick or cane (Figure 10-2). The ax is held by the head with the spike down and the pick facing to the rear in preparation for self-arrest. When moving up or down gentle slopes the ice ax is placed in front as the third point of contact, and the climber moves toward it. When traversing, the ax is held on the uphill side, in preparation for a self-arrest.

Figure 10-2. Using the ice ax in the cane position.

(2) Cross Body Position or Port Arms Position. On steeper slopes the ax can be used in the port arms position, or cross body position (Figure 10-3). It is carried across the chest, upslope hand on the shaft, spike towards the slope. The head of the ax is held away from the slope with the pick to the rear in preparation for self-arrest. Ensure the leash is connected to the upslope hand, which allows the ax to be used in the hammer position on the upslope side of the climber. The spike, in this case, is used as an aid for maintaining balance.

image edited

(3) Anchor Position. As the slope continues to steepen, the ax may be used in the anchor position (Figure 10-4). The head is held in the upslope hand and the pick is driven into the slope. The spike is held in the downhill hand and pulled slightly away from the slope to increase the "bite" of the pick into the ice. If the climber is wearing a harness, the pick can be deeply inserted in the ice or hard snow and the ax leash could be connected to the tie-in point on the harness for an anchor (ensure the ax is placed for the intended direction of pull).

image edited

(4) Push-Hold Position. (Figure 10-5). The hand is placed on the shaft of the ax just below the head with the pick forward. The pick is driven into the slope at shoulder height. The hand is then placed on the top of the ax head for use as a handhold.

image edited

(5) Dagger Position. Used to place a handhold above shoulder height (Figure 10-6). The hand grasps the head of the ax with the pick forward and the shaft hanging down. The ax is driven into the surface in a stabbing action. The hand is then placed on the ax head for use as a handhold.

image edited

(6) Hammer Position. The ax is used like a hammer, sets the pick deepest in any snow or ice (Figure 10-7). On vertical or near-vertical sections, two axes used in the hammer position will often be required.

b. Crampons. Walking in crampons does present difficulties. The same mountain walking principles are used, except that when a leg is advanced it is swung in a slight arc around the fixed foot to avoid locking the crampons or catching them on clothing. The trousers should be bloused. All straps should be secured. The buckles should be located on the outside of each foot.

(1) Two methods of ascent are used on slopes: traversing and straight up.

(a) A traverse on ice or snow looks much like any mountain walking traverse, except that the ankles are rolled so that the crampons are placed flat on the surface (Figure 10-8). On snow the points penetrate easily; on ice the foot must be pressed or stamped firmly to obtain maximum penetration. At the turning points of a traverse, direction is changed with the uphill foot as in mountain walking.

image edited

(b) A straight up method is for relatively short pitches, since it is more tiring than a traverse. The climber faces directly up the slope and walks straight uphill. As the slope steepens, the herringbone step is used to maintain the flatfoot technique. For short steep pitches, the climber may also face downslope, squatting so the legs almost form a 90-degree angle at the knees, driving the spike of the ice ax into the slope at hip level, and then moving the feet up to the ax (similar to the crab position). This method can be tiring.

(2) A technique known as "front-pointing" may be used for moving straight uphill (Figure 10-9). It is especially useful on steep terrain, in combination with the ice ax in the push-hold, dagger, or hammer position. Front-pointing is easiest with the use of more rigid mountain boots and rigid crampons. The technique is similar to doing calf raises on the tips of the toes and is much more tiring than flat-footing.

(a) The technique starts with the feet approximately shoulder width apart. When a step is taken the climber places the front points of the crampons into the ice with the toe of the boot pointing straight into the slope.

(b) When the front points have bitten into the ice the heel of the boot is lowered slightly so that the first set of vertical points can also bite. The body is kept erect, with the weight centered over the feet as in climbing on rock.

Figure 10-9. Front-pointing with crampons.

c. Vertical Ice. When a climb on ice reaches the 60- to 70-degree angle, two ice axes may be helpful, and will become necessary as the angle approaches 90 degrees. The same basic climbing techniques described in Chapter 6 should be applied. If leashes of the correct length and fit are attached to both axes, it may be possible to hang completely from the axes while moving the feet.

d. Descending with Crampons and Ice Ax. Whenever possible, descend straight down the fall line. As the slope steepens, gradually turn sideways; on steeper slopes, bend at the waist and knees as if sitting, keeping the feet flat to engage all vertical crampon points and keep the weight over the feet as in descending rock slab (Figures 10-10 and 10-11). On steep terrain, assume a cross body or port arms position with the ax, and traverse. Regardless of the technique used, always ensure the points of the crampons are inserted in the snow or ice and take short, deliberate steps to minimize the chance of tripping and falling down the slope.

image edited

Normal Progression. The techniques can be used in any combination, dictated by the terrain and skill of the individual. A typical progression could be as follows:

(1) Crampons.

Walking as on flat ground.

Herringbone step straight up the slope.

Traverse with feet flat.

Backing up the slope (crab position).

Front-pointing.

(2) Ice Ax. Use the ice ax in these situations:

Cane position on flat ground.

Cane position on uphill side as slope steepens.

Port arms position with spike on uphill side.

Anchor position with pick on uphill side.

Push-hold position using front-pointing technique.

Dagger position using front-pointing technique.

Hammer position using front-pointing technique.

Climbing Sequence. (Figure 10-12). Begin by positioning the feet in a secure stance and placing the ax in the hammer position as high as possible. Slowly and carefully move the feet to higher positions alternately, and move the hand up the ax shaft. Repeat this until the hand is on top of the head of the ax. Remove the ax and place it at a higher position and begin again.

Figure 10-12. Climbing sequence.

f. Step Cutting. In ascending, steps may be cut straight up the slope, although a traverse will normally be adopted. In descending, a traverse is also the preferred method. When changing direction, a step large enough for both feet and crampons must be made. Once the step is formed, the adze is best used to further shape and clean the step.

(1) Snow. using the inside corner of the adze for cutting. fashion the step so that it slopes slightly inward and is big enough to admit the entire foot. Steps used for resting or for turning must be larger.

(2) Ice. Hard ice requires that the pick of the ax be used. Begin by directing a line of blows at right angles to the slope to make a fracture line along the base of the intended step. This technique will reduce the chance of an unwanted fracture in the ice breaking out the entire step. Next, chop above the fracture line to fashion the step. When using the pick it should be given an outward jerk as it is placed to prevent it from sticking in the ice.

(3) Step Cutting in a Traverse. When cutting steps in a traverse, the preferred cutting sequence is to cut one step at an arm's length from the highest step already cut, then cut one between those two. Cutting ahead one step then cutting an intermediate step keeps all of the steps relatively close to one another and maintains a suitable interval that all personnel can use.

(4) Handholds. If handholds are cut, they should be smaller than footholds, and angled more.

image edited

g. Self-Arrest. The large number of climbers injured or killed while climbing on snow and ice can be attributed to two major failings on the part of the climber: climbing unroped, and a lack of knowledge and experience in the techniques necessary to stop, or arrest, a fall (Figure 10-14). A climber should always carry an ice ax when climbing on steep snow or ice; if a fall occurs, he must retain possession and control of his ice ax if he is to successfully arrest the fall. During movement on steep ice, the ax pick will be in the ice solidly before the body is moved, which should prevent a fall of any significance (this is a self belay not a self-arrest).

CAUTION

Self-arrest requires the ax pick to gradually dig in to slow the descent. Self-arrest is difficult on steep ice because the ice ax pick instantly "bites" into the ice, possibly resulting in either arm or shoulder injury, or the ax is deflected immediately upon contact.

image edited

(1) A climber who has fallen may roll or spin; if this happens, the climber must first gain control of his body, whether it is with his ice ax or simply by brute force. Once the roll or spin has been controlled, the climber will find himself in one of four positions.

Head upslope, stomach on the slope, and feet pointed downslope.

Head upslope, back to the slope, and feet pointed downslope.

Head downslope, stomach on the slope, and feet pointed upslope.

Head downslope, back to the slope, and feet pointed upslope.

(2) To place the body in position to arrest from the four basic fall positions the following must be accomplished.

(a) In the first position, the body is in proper relation to the slope for an arrest.

(b) In the second position, the body must first be rotated from face up to face down on the slope. This is accomplished by rolling the body toward the head of the ax.

(c) In the third position, the pick of the ice ax is placed upslope and used as a pivot to bring the body into proper position.

(d) In the fourth position, the head of the ax must be driven into the snow to the climber's side. This will cause the body to rotate into a head up, stomach down position.

(3) The final position when the arrest of the fall is completed should be with the head upslope, stomach on the slope, with the feet pointed downslope. If crampons are not worn, the toe of the boots may be dug into the slope. The ax is held diagonally across the chest, with the head of the ax by one shoulder and the spike near the opposite hip. One hand grasps the head of the ax, with the pick pointed into the slope, while the other hand is on the shaft near the spike, lifting up on it to prevent the spike from digging into the slope.

Note:

If crampons are worn, the feet must be raised to prevent the crampons from digging into the snow or ice too quickly.

(4) When a fall occurs, the climber should immediately grasp the ax with both hands and hold it firmly as described above. Once sufficient control of the body is attained, the climber drives the pick of the ice ax into the slope, increasing the pressure until the fall is arrested. Raising the spike end of the shaft increases the biting action of the pick. It is critical that control of the ice ax be maintained at all times.

10-4. GLISSADING

Glissading is the intentional, controlled, rapid descent, or slide of a mountaineer down a steep slope covered with snow (Figure 10-15). Glissading is similar to skiing, except skis are not used. The same balance and control are necessary, but instead of skis the soles of the feet or the buttocks are used. The only piece of equipment required is an ice ax, which serves as the rudder, brake, and guide. The two basic methods are:

a.Squatting Glissade. accomplished by placing the body in a semi-crouched position with both knees bent and the body weight directly over the feet. The ice ax is grasped with one hand on the head, pick, and adze outboard (away from the body), and the other hand on the shaft. The hand on the shaft grips it firmly in a position that allows control as well as the application of downward pressure on the spike of the ax.

b. Sitting Glissade. It is slower but easier to control. Sitting on the snow with the legs flat, and the heels and feet raised and pointed downslope. The ice ax is firmly grasped in the same manner, with the exception that the hand on the shaft must be locked against the hip for control.

c. Safety. Should never be attempted if the snow cover is thin or on a slope where the bottom cannot be seen, since drop-offs may exist out of view.

image edited

ROPED CLIMBING

Class 4 and usually on class 5 terrain, ropes must be used.

TYING-IN TO THE CLIMBING ROPE

Some of the older methods of tying directly into the rope require minimal equipment and are relatively easy to inspect; however, they offer little support to the climber. Tying directly into the rope is perfectly safe for many roped party climbs used in training on lower-angled rock.

BELAY TECHNIQUES

In some instances, such as on glaciers, rope team members can often move at the same time, relying on the security of a tight rope and "team arrest" techniques , but not on steep terrain. For the climbing rope to be of any value on steep rock climbs, the rope team must incorporate "belays" into the movement.

Belaying is a method of managing the rope in such a way that, if one person falls, the fall can be halted or "arrested" by another rope team member (belayer). One person climbs at a time, while being belayed from above or below by another. The belayer manipulates the rope so that friction, or a "brake," can be applied to halt a fall. Belay techniques are also used to control the descent of personnel and equipment on fixed rope installations, and for additional safety on rappels and stream crossings.

Setting up a belay remember the following key points:

Select the best possible terrain features for the position and use terrain to your advantage.

Use a well braced, sitting position whenever possible.

Aim and anchor the belay for all possible load directions.

Follow the "minimum" rule for belay anchors-2 for a downward pull, 1 for an upward pull.

Ensure anchor attachments are aligned, independent, and snug.

Stack the rope properly.

Choose a belay technique appropriate for the climbing.

Use a guide carabiner for rope control in all body belays.

Ensure anchor attachments, guide carabiner (if applicable), and rope running to the climber are all on the guidehand side.

The brake hand remains on the rope when belaying.

CAUTION

Never remove the brake hand from the rope while belaying. If the brake hand is removed, there is no belay.

The belay remains in place from the time the belayer commands "BELAY ON" until the climber commands "OFF BELAY."

PROCEDURE FOR MANAGING THE ROPE

A number of different belay techniques are used in modern climbing, ranging from the basic "body belays" to the various "mechanical belays," which incorporate some type of friction device.

a. Whether the rope is wrapped around the body, or run through a friction device, the procedure is basically the same. The belayer performs three basic functions: manipulate the rope to give the climber slack during movement, take up rope to remove excess slack, and apply the brake to halt a fall.

b. The belayer must maintain "total control" of the rope at all times. Meaning the brake hand is NEVER removed. When giving slack, the rope simply slides through the grasp of the brake hand, at times being fed to the climber with the other "feeling" or guide hand. Taking up rope, however, requires a certain technique to ensure the brake hand remains on the rope at all times. The following procedure describes how to take up excess rope and apply the brake in a basic body belay.

(1) Grasping the rope with both hands, place it behind the back and around the hips. The hand on the section of rope between the belayer and the climber would be the guide hand. The other hand is the brake hand.

(2) Take in rope with the brake hand until the arm is fully extended. The guide hand can also help to pull in the rope (Figure 6-21, step 1).

(3) Holding the rope in the brake hand, slide the guide hand out, extending the arm so the guide hand is father away from the body than the brake hand (Figure 6-21, step 2).

(4) Grasp both parts of the rope, to the front of the brake hand, with the guide hand (Figure 6-21, step 3).

(5) Slide the brake hand back towards the body (Figure 6-21, step 4).

(6) Repeat step 5 of Figure 6-21. The brake can be applied at any moment during the procedure. It is applied by wrapping the rope around the front of the hips while increasing grip with the brake hand (Figure 6-21, step 6).

image edited

6-15. CHOOSING A BELAY TECHNIQUE

The choice between body belays and mechanical belays depends largely on equipment available and the amount of load, or fall force to be absorbed.

The basic body belay uses friction between the rope and the clothed body as the rope is pressured across the clothing. It is simple, requiring no special equipment. It gives the belayer the greatest "feel" for the climber, letting him know when to give slack or take up rope. Rope management is quick and easy and is effective when ropes become wet, stiff, and frozen. It will hold low to moderate impact falls well.

CAUTION

The belayer must ensure he is wearing adequate clothing and gloves to protect his body from rope burns.

(1) Sitting Body Belay. is the preferred position and most secure (Figure 6-22). The belayer sits facing the direction where the force of a fall will likely come from, using terrain to his advantage, brace both feet against the rock. It is best to sit in a slight depression, placing the buttocks lower than the feet, and straightening the legs for maximum support. When perfectly aligned, the rope running to the climber will pass between the belayer's feet. Sometimes, the belayer may not be able to sit facing the direction he would like, or both feet cannot be braced well. The leg on the "guide hand" side should then point towards the load. The belayer can also "straddle" a large tree or rock.

In snow or ice the position can be improved by digging depressions into the snow or ice for a seat and footholds.

image edited

(2) Standing Body Belay. Used on smaller ledges where there is no room to sit (Figure 6-23). What appears at first to be a fairly unstable position can actually be quite secure when belay anchors are placed at or above shoulder height to support the stance when the force will be downward.

image edited

(a) For a body belay to work effectively, the belayer must ensure that the rope runs around the hips properly, and remains there under load when applying the brake. The rope should run around the narrow portion of the pelvic girdle, just below the bony high points of the hips. If the rope runs too high, the force of a fall could injure the belayer's midsection and lower rib cage. If the rope runs too low, the load may pull the rope below the buttocks, dumping the belayer out of position.

The rope is clipped into a carabiner attached to the guide hand side of the seat harness (or bowline-on-a-coil). This "guide carabiner" helps keep the rope in place around the hips and prevents loss of control. (Figure 6-24).

image edited

b. Mechanical Belay. Used whenever there is potential for the lead climber to take a severe fall. The holding power of a belay device is vastly superior to any body belay. However, rope management is more difficult to master.

(1) Munter Hitch. Requires only a rope and a carabiner (Figure 6-25). The Munter is actually a two-way friction hitch. The Munter hitch will flip back and forth through the carabiner as the belayer switches from giving slack to taking up rope. The carabiner must be large enough, and of the proper design, to allow this function. The locking pear-shaped carabiner, or pearabiner, is designed for the Munter hitch.

(a) The Munter hitch works exceptionally well as a lowering belay off the anchor. As a climbing belay, the carabiner should be attached to the front of the belayer's seat harness. The hitch is tied by forming a loop and a bight in the rope, attaching both to the carabiner. It's fairly easy to place the bight on the carabiner backwards, which forms an obvious, useless hitch. Put some tension on the Munter to ensure it is formed correctly, as depicted in the following illustrations.

(b) The Munter hitch will automatically "lock-up" under load as the brake hand grips the rope. The brake is increased by pulling the slack rope away from the body, towards the load. The belayer must be aware that flipping the hitch DOES NOT change the function of the hands. The hand on the rope running to the climber, or load, is always the guide hand.

image edited

(2) Figure-Eight Device. A versatile piece of equipment and, though developed as a rappel device, has become widely accepted as an effective mechanical belay device (Figure 6-26). The advantage of any mechanical belay is friction required to halt a fall is applied on the rope through the device, rather than around the belayer's body. The device itself provides rope control for upward and downward pulls and excellent friction for halting severe falls. The main principle behind the figure-eight device in belay mode is the friction developing on the rope as it reaches and exceeds the 90-degree angle between the rope entering the device and leaving the device. As a belay device, the figure-eight works well for both belayed climbing and for lowering personnel and equipment on fixed-rope installations.

(a) As a climbing belay, a bight placed into the climbing rope is run through the "small eye" of the device and attached to a locking carabiner at the front of the belayer's seat harness. A short, small diameter safety rope is used to connect the "large eye" of the figure eight to the locking carabiner for control of the device. The guide hand is placed on the rope running to the climber. Rope management is performed as in a body belay. The brake is applied by pulling the slack rope in the brake hand towards the body, locking the rope between the device and the carabiner.

(b) As a lowering belay, the device is normally attached directly to the anchor with the rope routed as in rappelling.

image edited

(3) Mechanical Camming Device. The mechanical camming device has an internal camming action that begins locking the rope in place as friction is increased. Unlike the other devices, the mechanical camming device can stop a falling climber without any input from the belayer. A few other devices perform similarly to this, but have no moving parts. Some limitations to these type devices are minimum and maximum rope diameters.

ESTABLISHING A BELAY

A belay can be established using either a direct or indirect connection. Each type has advantages and disadvantages. The choice will depend on the intended use of the belay.

a. Direct Belay. The direct belay removes any possible forces from the belayer and places this force completely on the anchor. Used often for rescue installations or to bring a second climber up to a new belay position in conjunction with the Munter hitch, the belay can be placed above the belayer's stance, creating a comfortable position and ease of applying the brake. Also, if the second falls or weights the rope, the belayer is not locked into a position. Direct belays provide no shock-absorbing properties from the belayer's attachment to the system as does the indirect belay; therefore, the belayer is apt to pay closer attention to the belaying process.

b. Indirect Belay. An indirect belay, the most commonly used, uses a belay device attached to the belayer's harness. This type of belay provides dynamic shock or weight absorption by the belayer if the climber falls or weights the rope, which reduces the direct force on the anchor and prevents a severe shock load to the anchor.

c. Belaying on Snow and Ice. The principles of belaying on ice and snow are the same as on rock. Generally, the high-force falls found in rock climbing are not present on snow and ice unless the pitch being climbed is extremely steep.

(1) Boot-Ax Belay. Can be useful in areas where the full length of the ice ax can penetrate the snow. The holding strength is directly related to the firmness of the snow and to the strength of the ice ax shaft. The shaft of the ax is tilted slightly uphill and jammed into the snow. The belayer places his uphill foot against the downhill side of the ax for support. A bight formed in the rope is placed over the boot and around the shaft of the ice ax. The brake is applied by wrapping the rope around the heel of the boot (Figure 10-20).

image edited

(3) Munter Hitch. This belay technique is also used on snow and ice. When using the hitch off of the anchor, a two-point equalized anchor should be constructed as a minimum.

6-17. SETTING UP A BELAY

In rock climbing, climbers must sometimes make do with marginal protection placements along a route, but belay positions must be made as "bombproof" as possible. Additionally, the belayer must set up the belay in relation to where the fall force will come from. All belay positions are established with the anchor connection to the front of the harness. If the belay is correctly established, the belayer will feel little or no force if the climber falls or has to rest on the rope. Regardless of the actual belay technique used, five basic steps are required to set up a sound belay.

a. Select Position and Stance. Once the climbing line is picked, the belayer selects his position. It's best if the position is off to the side of the actual line, putting the belayer out of the direct path of a potential fall or any rocks kicked loose by the climber. The position should allow the belayer to maintain a comfortable, relaxed stance, as he could be in the position for a fairly long time. Large ledges that allow a well braced, sitting stance are preferred. Look for belay positions close to bombproof natural anchors.

b. Aim the Belay. Determine where the rope leading to the climber will run and the direction the force of a fall will likely come from. When a lead climber begins placing protection, the fall force on the belayer will be in some upward direction, and in line with the first protection placement. If this placement fails under load, the force on the belay could be straight down again. The belayer must aim his belay for all possible load directions, adjusting his position or stance when necessary. The belay can be aimed through an anchor placement to immediately establish an upward pull; however, the belayer must always be prepared for the more severe downward fall force in the event intermediate protection placements fail.

c. Anchor the Belay. For a climbing belay to be considered bombproof, the belayer must be attached to a solid anchor capable of withstanding the highest possible fall force. A solid natural anchor would be ideal, but more often the belayer will have to place pitons or chocks. A single artificial placement should never be considered adequate for anchoring a belay. The rule of thumb is to place two anchors for a downward pull and one anchor for an upward pull. The following key points also apply to anchoring belays.

(1) Each anchor must be placed in line with the direction of pull it is intended to support.

(2) Each anchor attachment must be rigged "independently" so a failure of one will not shock load remaining placements or cause the belayer to be pulled out of position.

(3) The attachment between the anchor and the belayer must be snug to support the stance. Both belayer's stance and belay anchors should absorb the force of a fall.

(4) It is best for the anchors to be placed relatively close to the belayer with short attachments. If the climber has to be tied-off in an emergency, say after a severe fall, the belayer can attach a Prusik sling to the climbing rope, reach back, and connect the sling to one of the anchors. The load can be placed on the Prusik and the belayer can come out of the system to render help.

(5) The belayer can use either a portion of the climbing rope or slings of the appropriate length to connect himself to the anchors. It's best to use the climbing rope whenever possible, saving the slings for the climb. The rope is attached using either figure eight loops or clove hitches. Clove hitches have the advantage of being easily adjusted. If the belayer has to change his stance at some point, he can reach back with the guide hand and adjust the length of the attachment through the clove hitch as needed.

(6) The anchor attachments should also help prevent the force of a fall from "rotating" the belayer out of position. To accomplish this, the climbing rope must pass around the "guide-hand side" of the body to the anchors. Sling attachments are connected to the belayer's seat harness (or bowline-on-a-coil) on the guide-hand side.

(7) Arrangement of rope and sling attachments may vary according to the number and location of placements. Follow the guidelines set forth and remember the key points for belay anchors; "in line", "independent", and "snug". Figure 6-27 shows an example of a common arrangement, attaching the rope to the two "downward" anchors and a sling to the "upward" anchor. Note how the rope is connected from one of the anchors back to the belayer. This is not mandatory, but often helps "line-up" the second attachment.

image edited

d. Stack the Rope. Once the belayer is anchored into position, he must stack the rope to ensure it is free of twists and tangles that might hinder rope management in the belay.

(1) On small ledges, the rope can be stacked on top of the anchor attachments if there is no other place to lay it, but make sure to stack it carefully so it won't tangle with the anchored portion of the rope or other slings. The belayer must also ensure that the rope will not get tangled around his legs or other body parts as it "feeds" out.

(2) The rope should never be allowed to hang down over the ledge. If it gets caught in the rock below the position, the belayer may have to tie-off the climber and come out of the belay to free the rope. The final point to remember is the rope must be stacked "from the belayer's end" so the rope running to the climber comes off the "top" of the stacked pile.

The final step of the procedure is to attach the belay. With the rope properly stacked, the belayer takes the rope coming off the top of the pile, removes any slack between himself and the climber, and applies the actual belay technique. If using a body belay, ensure the rope is clipped into the guide carabiner.

(1) The belayer should make one quick, final inspection of his belay. If the belay is set up correctly, the anchor attachments, guide carabiner if applicable, and the rope running to the climber will all be on the "guide hand" side, which is normally closest to the rock (Figure 6-28). If the climber takes a fall, the force, if any, should not have any negative effect on the belayer's involvement in the system. The brake hand is out away from the slope where it won't be jammed between the body and the rock. The guide hand can be placed on the rock to help support the stance when applying the brake.

(2) When the belayer is satisfied with his position, he gives the signal, "BELAY ON!". When belaying the "second", the same procedure is used to set up the belay. Unless the belay is aimed for an upward pull, the fall force is of course downward and the belayer is usually facing away from the rock, the exception being a hanging belay on a vertical face. If the rope runs straight down to the climber and the anchors are directly behind the position, the belayer may choose to brake with the hand he feels most comfortable with. Anchor attachments, guide carabiner, and rope running to the climber through the guide hand must still be aligned on the same side to prevent the belayer from being rotated out of position, unless the belayer is using an improvised harness and the anchor attachment is at the rear.

VERBAL COMMANDS

ROPE TUG COMMANDS

Sometimes the loudest scream cannot be heard when the climber and belayer are far apart. This is especially true in windy conditions, or when the climber is around a corner, above an overhang, or at the back of a ledge. It may be necessary to use a series of "tugs" on the rope. To avoid any possible confusion with interpretation of multiple rope tug commands, use only one.

a. While a lead climb is in progress, the most important command is "BELAY ON." This command is given only by the climber when the climber is anchored and is prepared for the second to begin climbing. With the issue of this command, the second knows the climber is anchored and the second prepares to climb.

b. For a rope tug command, the leader issues three distinct tugs on the rope AFTER anchoring and putting the second on belay. This is the signal for "BELAY ON" and signals the second to climb when ready. The new belayer keeps slack out of the rope.

10-6. ROPED CLIMBING ON ICE AND SNOW

When crevasses are expected, a three-man rope team is recommended.

a.Tie-In Method. same as for rock climbing; however, when moving over snow-covered glaciers, the tie-in is modified slightly. (See paragraph 10-7, Movement on Glaciers, for more information).

Movement on gentle or moderate slopes all climbers move simultaneously. Normally the climbers move in single file using the steps created by the lead climber and improving them when necessary. The rope between the climbers should be fully extended and kept reasonably tight. Should any member fall, the other members immediately drop into a self-arrest position. On steeper slopes, the climbers use techniques as in rock climbing.

d. Fixed Ropes. Recommended for moving units through icefall areas on glaciers or other steep ice conditions. The procedures are basically the same as on rock with the exception that anchors need more attention, both in initial placement and in subsequent inspection, and steps may have to be cut to assist personnel.

In military mountaineering, the primary mission of a roped climbing team is to "fix" a route with some type of rope installation to assist movement of less trained personnel in the unit.

6-22. LEAD CLIMBING

A lead climb consists of a belayer, a leader or climber, rope(s), and webbing or hardware used to establish anchors or protect the climb. As he climbs the route, the leader emplaces "intermediate" anchors, and the climbing rope is connected to these anchors with a carabiner. These "intermediate" anchors protect the climber against a fall-thus the term "protecting the climb."

Note:

Intermediate anchors are commonly referred to as "protection," "pro," "pieces," "pieces of pro," "pro placements," and so on. For standardization within this publication, these specific anchors will be referred to as "protection;" anchors established for other purposes, such as rappel points, belays, or other rope installations, will be referred to as "anchors."

CAUTION

During all lead climbing, each climber in the team is either anchored or being belayed.

a. Lead climbing with two climbers is the preferred combination for movement on difficult terrain. Two climbers are at least twice as fast as three and are efficient for installing a "fixed rope," probably the most widely used rope installation in the mountains. A group of three climbers are typically used on moderate snow, ice, and snow-covered glaciers where the rope team can often move at the same time.

b. When the difficulty of the climbing is within the "leading ability" of both climbers, valuable time can be saved by "swinging leads." This is normally the most efficient method for climbing multipitch routes. The second finishes cleaning the first pitch and continues climbing, taking on the role of lead climber. The belayer simply adjusts his position, re-aiming the belay once the new leader begins placing protection. Swinging leads, or "leap frogging," should be planned before starting the climb so the leader knows to anchor the upper belay for both upward and downward pulls during the setup.

The leader must ensure the route is well within his ability and the ability of the second. The lead climber carries most of the climbing equipment in order to place protection along the route and set up the next belay. The leader must also ensure that the second has the necessary equipment, such as a piton hammer, nut tool, etc., to remove any protection that the leader may place.

(1) The leader is responsible for emplacing protection frequently enough and in such a manner that, in the event that either the leader or the second should fall, the fall will be neither long enough nor hard enough to result in injury. The leader must also ensure that the rope is routed in a way that will allow it to run freely through the protection placements, thus minimizing friction, or "rope drag".

(2) The other member of the climbing team, the belayer (sometimes referred to as the "second"), is responsible for belaying the leader, removing the belay anchor, and retrieving the protection placed by the leader between belay positions (also called "cleaning the pitch").

(3) Before the climb starts, the second will normally set up the first belay while the leader is arranging his rack. When the belay is ready, the belayer signals, "BELAY ON", affirming that the belay is "on" and the rope will be managed as necessary. When the leader is ready, he double checks the belay.

(4) While belaying, the second must pay close attention to the climber's every move, if he cannot see the climber, he must "feel" the climber through the rope. Unless told otherwise by the climber, the belayer can slowly give slack on the rope as the climber proceeds. The belayer should keep just enough slack in the rope so the climber does not have to pull it through the belay. If the climber wants a tighter rope, it can be called for.

(5) As the leader protects the climb, slack will sometimes be needed to place the rope through the carabiner (clipping), in a piece of protection above the tie-in point on the leaders harness. In this situation, the leader gives the command "SLACK". When the leader has completed the connection, or the clip, the command "TAKE ROPE" is given.

(6) The leader continues on the route until either a designated belay location is reached or he is at the end of or near the end of the rope. At this position, the leader sets an anchor, connects to the anchor and signals "OFF BELAY". The belayer prepares to climb by removing all but at least one of his anchors and secures the remaining equipment. The belayer remains attached to at least one anchor until the command "BELAY ON" is given.

The leader will assemble, or "rack," the necessary equipment onto his harness or onto slings around the head and shoulder. A typical leader "rack" consists of:

Six to eight small wired stoppers on a carabiner.

Four to six medium to large wired stoppers on a carabiner.

Assorted hexentrics, each on a separate carabiner.

SLCDs of required size, each on a separate carabiner.

Five to ten standard length runners, with two carabiners on each.

Two to three double length runners, with two carabiners on each.

Extra carabiners.

Nut tool.

Note:

The route chosen will dictate, to some degree, the necessary equipment. Members of a climbing team may need to consolidate gear to climb a particular route.

(2) The belayer and the leader both should carry many duplicate items while climbing.

Short Prusik sling.

Long Prusik sling.

Cordellette.

10 feet of 1-inch webbing.

20 feet of 1-inch webbing.

Belay device (a combination belay/rappel device is multifunctional).

Rappel device (a combination belay/rappel device is multifunctional).

Large locking carabiner (pear shape carabiners are multifunctional).

Extra carabiners.

Nut tool (if stoppers are carried).

Note:

If using an over the shoulder gear sling, place the items in order from smallest to the front and largest to the rear.

e. Leading a difficult pitch is the most hazardous task in roped climbing. The lead climber may be exposed to potentially long, hard falls and must exercise keen judgment in route selection, placement of protection, and routing of the climbing rope through the protection. The leader should try to keep the climbing line as direct as possible to the next belay to allow the rope to run smoothly through the protection with minimal friction. Protection should be placed whenever the leader feels he needs it, and BEFORE moving past a difficult section.

CAUTION

The climber must remember he will fall twice the distance from his last piece of protection before the rope can even begin to stop him.

Placing Protection. Generally, protection is placed from one stable position to the next. The anchor should be placed as high as possible to reduce the potential fall distance between placements. If the climbing is difficult, protection should be placed more frequently. If the climbing becomes easier, protection can be placed farther apart, saving hardware for difficult sections. On some routes an extended diagonal or horizontal movement, known as a traverse, is required. As the leader begins this type of move, he must consider the second's safety as well as his own. The potential fall of the second will result in a pendulum swing if protection is not adequate to prevent this. The danger comes from any objects in the swinging path of the second.

CAUTION

Leader should place protection prior to, during, and upon completion of any traverse. This will minimize the potential swing, or pendulum, for both the leader and second if either should fall.

(2) Correct Clipping Technique. Once an anchor is placed, the climber "clips" the rope into the carabiner (Figure 6-29). As a carabiner hangs from the protection, the rope can be routed through the carabiner in two possible ways. One way will allow the rope to run smoothly as the climber moves past the placement; the other way will often create a dangerous situation in which the rope could become "unclipped" from the carabiner if the leader were to fall on this piece of protection. In addition, a series of incorrectly clipped carabiners may contribute to rope drag. When placing protection, the leader must ensure the carabiner on the protection does not hang with the carabiner gate facing the rock; when placing protection in a crack ensure the carabiner gate is not facing into the crack.

Grasp the rope with either hand with the thumb pointing down the rope towards the belayer

Pull enough rope to reach the carabiner with a bight

Note the direction the carabiner is hanging from the protection

Place the bight into the carabiner so that, when released, the rope does not cause the carabiner to twist.

(a) If the route changes direction, clipping the carabiner will require a little more thought. Once leaving that piece of protection, the rope may force the carabiner to twist if not correctly clipped. If the clip is made correctly, a rotation of the clipped carabiner to ensure that the gate is not resting against the rock may be all that is necessary.

CAUTION

Ensure the carabiner gate is not resting against a protrusion or crack edge in the rock surface; the rock may cause the gate to open.

(b) Once the rope is clipped into the carabiner, the climber should check to see that it is routed correctly by pulling on the rope in the direction it will travel when the climber moves past that position.

(c) Another potential hazard peculiar to leading should be eliminated before the climber continues. The carabiner is attached to the anchor or runner with the gate facing away from the rock and opening down for easy insertion of the rope. However, in a leader fall, it is possible for the rope to run back over the carabiner as the climber falls below the placement. If the carabiner is left with the gate facing the direction of the route there is a chance that the rope will open the gate and unclip itself entirely from the placement. To prevent this possibility, the climber should ensure that after the clip has been made, the gate is facing away from the direction of the route. There are two ways to accomplish this: determine which direction the gate will face before the protection or runner is placed or once clipped, rotate the carabiner upwards 180 degrees. This problem is more apt to occur if bent gate carabiners are used. Straight gate ovals or "Ds" are less likely to have this problem and are stronger and are highly recommended. Bent gate carabiners are easier to clip the rope into and are used mostly on routes with bolts preplaced for protection. Bent gate carabiners are not recommended for many climbing situations.

image edited

(3) Reducing Rope Drag; Using Runners. No matter how direct the route, the climber will often encounter problems with "rope drag" through the protection positions. The friction created by rope drag will increase to some degree every time the rope passes through a carabiner, or anchor. It will increase dramatically if the rope begins to "zigzag" as it travels through the carabiners. To prevent this, the placements should be positioned so the rope creates a smooth, almost straight line as it passes through the carabiners (Figure 6-30). Minimal rope drag is an inconvenience; severe rope drag may actually pull the climber off balance, inducing a fall.

image edited

CAUTION

Rope drag can cause confusion when belaying the second or follower up to a new belay position. Rope drag can be mistaken for the climber, causing the belayer to not take in the necessary slack in the rope and possibly resulting in a serious fall.

(a) If it is not possible to place all the protection so the carabiners form a straight line as the rope moves through, you should "extend" the protection (Figure 6-31). Do this by attaching an appropriate length sling, or runner, to the protection to extend the rope connection in the necessary direction. The runner is attached to the protection's carabiner while the rope is clipped into a carabiner at the other end of the runner. Extending placements with runners will allow the climber to vary the route slightly while the rope continues to run in a relatively straight line.

image edited

(b) Not only is rope drag a hindrance, it can cause undue movement of protection as the rope tightens between any "out of line" placements. Rope drag through chock placements can be dangerous. As the climber moves above the placements, an outward or upward pull from rope drag may cause correctly set chocks to pop out, even when used "actively". Most all chocks placed for leader protection should be extended with a runner, even if the line is direct to eliminate the possibility of movement.

(c) Wired chocks are especially prone to wiggling loose as the rope pulls on the stiff cable attachment. All wired chocks used for leader protection should be extended to reduce the chance of the rope pulling them out (Figure 6-32). Some of the larger chocks, such as roped Hexentrics and Tri-Cams, have longer slings pre-attached that will normally serve as an adequate runner for the placement. Chocks with smaller sling attachments must often be extended with a runner. Many of today's chocks are manufactured with pre-sewn webbing installed instead of cable.

image edited

(d) When a correctly placed piton is used for protection, it will normally not be affected by rope drag. A correctly placed piton is generally a multi-directional anchor, therefore, rope drag through pitons will usually only affect the leader's movements but will continue to protect as expected.

(e) Rope drag will quite often move SLCDs out of position, or "walk" them deeper into the crack than initially placed, resulting in difficult removal or inability to remove them at all. Furthermore, most cases of SLCD movement result in the SLCD moving to a position that does not provide protection in the correct direction or no protection at all due to the lobes being at different angles from those at the original position.

Note:

Any placement extended with a runner will increase the distance of a potential fall by the actual length of the sling. Try to use the shortest runners possible, ensuring they are long enough to function properly.

f. Belaying the follower is similar to belaying a top-roped climb in that the follower is not able to fall any farther than rope stretch will allow. This does not imply there is no danger in following. Sharp rocks, rock fall, and inadequately protected traverses can result in damage to equipment or injury to the second.

g. Following, or seconding, a leader has a variety of responsibilities. The second has to issue commands to the leader, as well as follow the leader's commands. Once the lead climber reaches a good belay position, he immediately establishes an anchor and connects to it. When this is completed he can signal "OFF BELAY" to the belayer. The second can now remove the leader's belay and prepare to climb. The second must remain attached to at least one of the original anchors while the leader is preparing the next belay position. The removed materials and hardware can be organized and secured on the second's rack in preparation to climb.

(1) When the leader has established the new belay position and is ready to belay the follower, the "new" belayer signals "BELAY ON." The second, now the climber, removes any remaining anchor hardware/materials and completes any final preparations. The belayer maintains tension on the rope, unless otherwise directed, while the final preparations are taking place, since removal of these remaining anchors can introduce slack into the rope. When the second is ready, he can, as a courtesy, signal "CLIMBING," and the leader can, again as a courtesy, reply with "CLIMB."

(2) Upon signaling "BELAY ON," the belayer must remove and keep all slack from the rope. (This is especially important as in many situations the belayer cannot see the follower. A long pitch induces weight and sometimes "drag" on the rope and the belayer above will have difficulty distinguishing these from a rope with no slack.)

h. When removing protection, the man cleaning the pitch should rack it properly to facilitate the exchange and or arrangement of equipment at the end of the pitch. When removing the protection, or "cleaning the pitch", SLCDs or chocks may be left attached to the rope to prevent loss if they are accidentally dropped during removal. If necessary, the hardware can remain on the rope until the second reaches a more secure stance. If removing a piton, the rope should be unclipped from the piton to avoid the possibility of damaging the rope with a hammer strike.

(1) The second may need to place full body weight on the rope to facilitate use of both hands for protection removal by giving the command "TENSION." The second must also ensure that he does not climb faster than the rope is being taken in by the belayer. If too much slack develops, he should signal "TAKE ROPE" and wait until the excess is removed before continuing the climb. Once the second completes the pitch, he should immediately connect to the anchor. Once secured, he can signal "OFF BELAY." The leader removes the belay, while remaining attached to an anchor. The equipment is exchanged or organized in preparation for the next pitch or climb.

(2) When the difficulty of the climbing is within the "leading ability" of both climbers, valuable time can be saved by "swinging leads." This is normally the most efficient method for climbing multi-pitch routes. The second finishes cleaning the first pitch and continues climbing, taking on the role of lead climber. Unless he requires equipment from the belayer or desires a break, he can climb past the belay and immediately begin leading. The belayer simply adjusts his position, re-aiming the belay once the new leader begins placing protection. Swinging leads, or "leap frogging," should be planned before starting the climb so the leader knows to anchor the upper belay for both upward and downward pulls during the setup.

6-23. AID CLIMBING

When a route is too difficult to free climb and is unavoidable, if the correct equipment is available you might aid climb the route. Aid climbing consists of placing protection and putting full body weight on the piece. This allows you to hang solely on the protection you place, giving you the ability to ascend more difficult routes than you can free climb. Clean aid consists of using SLCDs and chocks, and is the simplest form of aid climbing.

a. Equipment. Aid climbing can be accomplished with various types of protection. Regardless of the type of protection used, the method of aid climbing is the same. In addition to the equipment for free climbing, other specialized equipment will be needed.

(1) Pitons. Pitons are used the same as for free climbing. Most piton placements will require the use of both hands. Piton usage will usually leave a scar in the rock just by virtue of the hardness of the piton and the force required to set it with a hammer. Swinging a hammer to place pitons will lead to climber fatigue sooner than clean aid. Since pitons are multidirectional, the strength of a well-placed piton is more secure than most clean aid protection. Consider other forms of protection when noise could be hazardous to tactics.

(2) Bolts. Bolts are used when no other protection will work. They are a more permanent form of protection and more time is needed to place them. Placing bolts creates more noise whether drilled by hand or by motorized drill. Bolts used in climbing are a multi-part expanding system pounded into predrilled holes and then tightened to the desired torque with a wrench or other tool. Bolts are used in many ways in climbing today. The most common use is with a hanger attached and placed for anchors in face climbing. However, bolts can be used for aid climbing, with or without the hanger.

(a) Placing bolts for aid climbing takes much more time than using pitons or clean aid. Bolting for aid climbing consists of consecutive bolts about 2 feet apart. Drilling a deep enough hole takes approximately thirty minutes with a hand drill and up to two minutes with a powered hammer drill. A lot of time and work is expended in a short distance no matter how the hole is drilled. (The weight of a powered hammer drill becomes an issue in itself.) Noise will also be a factor in both applications. A constant pounding with a hammer on the hand drill or the motorized pounding of the powered drill may alert the enemy to the position. The typical climbing bolt/hanger combination normally is left in the hole where it was placed.

(b) Other items that can be used instead of the bolt/hanger combination are the removable and reusable "spring-loaded removable bolts" such as rivets (hex head threaded bolts sized to fit tightly into the hole and pounded in with a hammer), split-shaft rivets, and some piton sizes that can be pounded into the holes. When using rivets or bolts without a hanger, place a loop of cable over the head and onto the shaft of the rivet or bolt and attach a carabiner to the other end of the loop (a stopper with the chock slid back will suffice). Rivet hangers are available that slide onto the rivet or bolt after it is placed and are easily removed for reuse. Easy removal means a slight loss of security while in use.

(3) SLCDs. SLCDs are used the same as for free climbing, although in aid climbing, full body weight is applied to the SLCD as soon as it is placed.

(4) Chocks. Chocks are used the same as for free climbing, although in aid climbing, weight is applied to the chock as soon as it is placed.

(5) Daisy Chains. Daisy chains are tied or presewn loops of webbing with small tied or presewn loops approximately every two inches. The small loops are just large enough for two or three carabiners. Two daisy chains should be girth-hitched to the tie-in point in the harness.

(6) Etriers (or Aiders). Etriers (aiders) are tied or presewn webbing loops with four to six tied or presewn internal loops, or steps, approximately every 12 inches. The internal loops are large enough to easily place one booted foot into. At least two etriers (aiders) should be connected by carabiner to the free ends of the daisy chains.

(7) Fifi Hook. A fifi hook is a small, smooth-surfaced hook strong enough for body weight. The fifi hook should be girth-hitched to the tie-in point in the harness and is used in the small loops of the daisy chain. A carabiner can be used in place of the fifi hook, although the fifi hook is simpler and adequate.

(8) Ascenders. Ascenders are mechanical devices that will move easily in one direction on the rope, but will lock in place if pushed or pulled the other direction. (Prusiks can be used but are more difficult than ascenders.)

b. Technique. The belay will be the same as in normal lead climbing and the rope will be routed through the protection the same way also. The big difference is the movement up the rock. With the daisy chains, aiders, and fifi hook attached to the rope tie-in point of the harness as stated above, and secured temporarily to a gear loop or gear sling, the climb continues as follows:

(1) The leader places the first piece of protection as high as can safely be reached and attaches the appropriate sling/carabiner

(2) Attach one daisy chain/aider group to the newly placed protection

(3) Clip the rope into the protection, (the same as for normal lead climbing)

(4) Insure the protection is sound by weighting it gradually; place both feet, one at a time, into the steps in the aider, secure your balance by grasping the top of the aider with your hands.

(5) When both feet are in the aider, move up the steps until your waist is no higher than the top of the aider.

(6) Place the fifi hook (or substituted carabiner) into the loop of the daisy chain closest to the daisy chain/aider carabiner, this effectively shortens the daisy chain; maintain tension on the daisy chain as the hook can fall out of the daisy chain loop if it is unweighted.

Note:

Moving the waist higher than the top of the aider is possible, but this creates a potential for a fall to occur even though you are on the aider and "hooked" close to the protection with the daisy chain. As the daisy chain tie-in point on the harness moves above the top of the aider, you are no longer supported from above by the daisy chain, you are now standing above your support. From this height, the fifi hook can easily fall out of the daisy chain loop if it is unweighted. If this happens, you could fall the full length of the daisy chain resulting in a static fall on the last piece of protection placed.

(7) Release one hand from the aider and place the next piece of protection, again, as high as you can comfortably reach; if using pitons or bolts you may need both hands free- "lean" backwards slowly, and rest your upper body on the daisy chain that you have "shortened" with the fifi hook

(8) Clip the rope into the protection

(9) Attach the other daisy chain/aider group to the next piece of protection

(10) Repeat entire process until climb is finished

c. Seconding. When the pitch is completed, the belayer will need to ascend the route. To ascend the route, use ascenders instead of Prusiks, ascenders are much faster and safer than Prusiks. Attach each ascender to a daisy chain/aider group with carabiners. To adjust the maximum reach/height of the ascenders on the rope, adjust the effective length of the daisy chains with a carabiner the same as with the fifi hook; the typical height will be enough to hold the attached ascender in the hand at nose level. When adjusted to the correct height, the arms need not support much body weight. If the ascender is too high, you will have difficulty reaching and maintaining a grip on the handle.

(1) Unlike lead climbing, there will be a continuous load on the rope during the cleaning of the route, this would normally increase the difficulty of removing protection. To make this easier, as you approach the protection on the ascenders, move the ascenders, one at a time, above the piece. When your weight is on the rope above the piece, you can easily unclip and remove the protection.

CAUTION

If both ascenders should fail while ascending the pitch, a serious fall could result. To prevent this possibility, tie-in short on the rope every 10-20 feet by tying a figure eight loop and clipping it into the harness with a separate locking carabiner as soon as the ascent is started. After ascending another 20 feet, repeat this procedure. Do not unclip the previous figure eight until the new knot is attached to another locking carabiner. Clear each knot as you unclip it.

Notes:

Ensure the loops formed by the short tie-ins do not catch on anything below as you ascend.

2. If the nature of the rock will cause the "hanging loop" of rope, formed by tying in at the end of the rope, to get caught as you move upward, do not tie into the end of the rope.

(2) Seconding an aid pitch can be done in a similar fashion as seconding free-climbed pitches. The second can be belayed from above as the second "climbs" the protection. However, the rope is unclipped from the protection before the aider/daisy chain is attached.

d. Seconding Through a Traverse. While leading an aid traverse, the climber is hanging on the protection placed in front of the current position. If the second were to clean the section by hanging on the rope while cleaning, the protection will be pulled in more than one direction, possibly resulting in the protection failing. To make this safer and easier, the second should hang on the protection just as the leader did. As the second moves to the beginning of the traverse, one ascender/daisy chain/aider group is removed from the rope and clipped to the protection with a carabiner, (keep the ascenders attached to the daisy chain/aider group for convenience when the traverse ends). The second will negotiate the traverse by leapfrogging the daisy chain/aider groups on the next protection just as the leader did. Cleaning is accomplished by removing the protection as it is passed when all weight is removed from it. This is in effect a self-belay. The second maintains a shorter safety tie-in on the rope than for vertical movement to reduce the possibility of a lengthy pendulum if the protection should pull before intended.

e. Clean Aid Climbing. Clean aid climbing consists of using protection placed without a hammer or drill involvement: chocks, SLCDs, hooks, and other protection placed easily by hand. This type of aid climbing will normally leave no trace of the climb when completed. When climbing the aiders on clean aid protection, ensure the protection does not "move" from it's original position.

(1) Hooks are any device that rests on the rock surface without a camming or gripping action. Hooks are just what the name implies, a curved piece of hard steel with a hole in one end for webbing attachment. The hook blade shape will vary from one model to another, some have curved or notched "blades" to better fit a certain crystal shape on a face placement. These types of devices due to their passive application, are only secure while weighted by the climber.

(2) Some featureless sections of rock can be negotiated with hook use, although bolts can be used. Hook usage is faster and quieter but the margin of safety is not there unless hooks are alternated with more active forms of protection. If the last twenty foot section of a route is negotiated with hooks, a forty foot fall could result.

6-24. THREE-MAN CLIMBING TEAM

Often times a movement on steep terrain will require a team of more than two climbers, which involves more difficulties. A four-man team (or more) more than doubles the difficulty found in three men climbing together. A four-man team should be broken down into two groups of two unless prevented by a severe lack of gear.

a. Given one rope, a three-man team is at a disadvantage on a steep, belayed climb. It takes at least twice as long to climb an average length pitch because of the third climber and the extra belaying required. The distance between belay positions will be halved if only one rope is used because one climber must tie in at the middle of the rope. Two ropes are recommended for a team of three climbers.

Note:

Time and complications will increase when a three-man team uses only one rope. For example: a 100-foot climb with a 150-foot rope would normally require two belays for two climbers; a 100-foot climb with a 150-foot rope would require six belays for three climbers.

b. At times a three-man climb may be unavoidable and personnel should be familiar with the procedure. Although a team of three may choose from many different methods, only two are described below. If the climb is only one pitch, the methods will vary.

CAUTION

When climbing with a team of three, protected traverses will require additional time. The equipment used to protect the traverse must be left in place to protect both the second and third climbers.

(1) The first method can be used when the belay positions are not large enough for three men. If using one rope, two climbers tie in at each end and the other at the mid point. When using two ropes, the second will tie in at one end of both ropes, and the other two climbers will each tie in to the other ends. The most experienced individual is the leader, or number 1 climber. The second, or number 2 climber, is the stronger of the remaining two and will be the belayer for both number 1 and number 3. Number 3 will be the last to climb. Although the number 3 climber does no belaying in this method, each climber should be skilled in the belay techniques required. The sequence for this method (in one pitch increments) is as follows (repeated until the climb is complete):

(a) Number 1 ascends belayed by number 2. Number 2 belays the leader up the first pitch while number 3 is simply anchored to the rock for security (unless starting off at ground level) and manages the rope between himself and number 2. When the leader completes the pitch, he sets up the next belay and belays number 2 up.

(b) Number 2 ascends belayed by number 1, and cleans the route (except for traverses). Number 2 returns the hardware to the leader and belays him up the next pitch. When the leader completes this pitch, he again sets up a new belay. When number 2 receives "OFF BELAY" from the leader, he changes ropes and puts number 3 on belay. He should not have to change anchor attachments because the position was already aimed for a downward as well as an upward pull when he belayed the leader.

(c) Number 3 ascends belayed by number 2. When number 3 receives "BELAY ON," he removes his anchor and climbs to number 2's position. When the pitch is completed he secures himself to one of number 2's belay anchors. When number 1's belay is ready, he brings up number 2 while number 3 remains anchored for security. Number 2 again cleans the pitch and the procedure is continued until the climb is completed.

(d) In this method, number 3 performs no belay function. He climbs when told to do so by number 2. When number 3 is not climbing, he remains anchored to the rock for security. The standard rope commands are used; however, the number 2 climber may include the trailing climber's name or number in the commands to avoid confusion as to who should be climbing.

(d) Normally, only one climber would be climbing at a time; however, the number 3 climber could ascend a fixed rope to number 2's belay position using proper ascending technique, with no effect on the other two members of the team. This would save time for a team of three, since number 2 would not have to belay number 3 and could be either belaying number 1 to the next belay or climbing to number 1. If number 3 is to ascend a fixed rope to the next belay position, the rope will be loaded with number 3's weight, and positioned directly off the anchors established for the belay. The rope should be located so it does not contact any sharp edges. The rope to the ascending number 3 could be secured to a separate anchor, but this would require additional time and gear.

(2) The second method uses either two ropes or a doubled rope, and number 2 and number 3 climb simultaneously. This requires either a special belay device that accepts two ropes, such as the tuber type, or with two Munter hitches. The ropes must travel through the belay device(s) without affecting each other.

(a) As the leader climbs the pitch, he will trail a second rope or will be tied in with a figure eight in the middle of a doubled rope. The leader reaches the next belay position and establishes the anchor and then places both remaining climbers on belay. One remaining climber will start the ascent toward the leader and the other will start when a gap of at least 10 feet is created between the two climbers. The belayer will have to remain alert for differences in rope movement and the climbers will have to climb at the same speed. One of the "second" climbers also cleans the pitch.

(b) Having at least two experienced climbers in this team will also save time. The belayer will have additional requirements to meet as opposed to having just one second. The possible force on the anchor will be twice that of one second. The second that is not cleaning the pitch can climb off route, but staying on route will usually prevent a possible swing if stance is not maintained.

image edited

(Reference, Step # 3, General phases of an attack, Phase one the attack and Phase two contact)

I'm going to see if this all post now before adding the "Conduct of engagements" section.

G-day!

Newjarheaddean Rumor Board

Welcome Aboard!

Total Pageviews

Fragmented Fighting Facts 2013

Preface

(Reference, Planning, Step # 3, Debriefs)

FRAGMENTED FIGHTING FACTS

(Reference also see Step # 2 Cmdrs intent, Decision guidance, part B) Time available and Step # 3, Pro guerrilla/insurgency operations, “Exploitation phase”)

STEP 1) Gathering information;

(Reference, Step # 2 Commander’s intent, Decision guidance.)

Intelligence preparation of the battle field, I.P.B., Area studies, Net assessments:

(Reference, PCP, rule # 8)

(Reference, COE, rule # 17)

(Reference, Def. rule # 3, “IEDs share a common set of components” # 4 containers part C) suicide bomers)

Psychological Operations:

(Reference; COE rule # 17.)

STEP # 2 Commander’s intent:

(Reference, Decision Guidance, part D, below)

(Reference, also mentioned earlier in the Planning section, Execution phase.)

(Reference, the beginning of step # 2)

(Reference, Planning, Step # 1, Gathering info. Prioritizing criteria.)

Qualities of leaderships

(Reference, Leadership guidelines, Platoon commander)

(Reference, Leadership Guidelines, squad leader/ squad leader group and platoon Commander, below)

Leadership Guidelines

(Reference, company cmdr 2inC notes below and the last step i.e. # 6 Supervise)

Squad leaders;

(Reference, Qualities of leadership, Competence above and Company Cmdr. 2inC notes below.)

Light Machine Gun group;

(Reference, COE rule # 3 and COE overall tips; machine gun sections)

Platoon commander;

(Reference, Qualities of leadership, commitment)

(Reference, Step # 3, Pro-guerrilla/insurgency operations, Organization celluar structure)

Company commander;

(Reference, Leadership Guidelines “A Staff Officer” in bold print.)

Infantry battalion;

STEP # 3 Concepts of operations:

Part A)

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, ISALUTE RWP)

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, I salute R.W.P etc.)

(Reference, Defense rule # 5 under principal # 1, I salute R.W.P and Appendix ISALUTERWP for more detailed examples.)

Part B) MAPS, MODELS AND WEATHER;

(Reference, PCP rule # 11 for information on avalanches. COE over all tips, characteristics of military operations in cold climates etc., and Appendix PCP rule # 13 for information on glaciers and Appendix MM&W for more information.)

Part C) ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS:

Part D) PATROL ORDER:

(Reference, COE rule # 16)

General phases of an attack;

(Reference, Preparations and Conduct of patrols, all the rules and info of that section)

(Reference, Defense, rule # 5, Disguises, Decoys, Diversions)

(Reference, Appendix patrol order part A, for info continuing from “another day”, up to point of “continuation of other considerations” below.

(Reference, Appendix patrol order part B for details on parachuting.)

(Reference, Conduct of Engagements, basically all rules and info)

(Reference, Defense, all rule especially Conduct of Defense, COE overall tips; Organizing the Assault unit, Reorganization and True V formation)

Debriefs;

(Reference, Study notes at the begaining of the Fragmented Fighting Facts)

(Reference, Step # 2 Leadership guidelines, company cmdr)

82d Airborne Division Standing ROE

(Pocket Card) ARMED

Maneuver vs. Attrition

(Reference, 3rd generation warfare notes below.)

Generations of War

(Reference, Manuver Vs Attrition above.)

Three levels

(Reference, Def. Rule # 7, 4th Generation warfare)

Pro guerrilla / insurgency operations

(Reference, Planning summery Execution at the beginning of Fragment fighting facts)

(Reference, Step # 2, leadership guidelines, Platoon cmdr, “there is a limit”)

Anti guerrilla / insurgence operations

STEP # 4

STEP# 5

STEP# 6

(Reference, Leadership guidelines, A staff officer, in bold print and Company cmdr 2inC)

DEFENSE

1) Pass by circle back,

2) Pause before interring,

3) Bobby trap entries,

(Reference, Planning step # 1, types of campaigns, Destructive, suicide mission vs suicide attack)

Vehicle check points.

(Reference, COE, Over all tips, “Plum card”)

(Reference, appendix DEF. rule # 3.)

(Reference, 3^rd generation warfare notes below.)

(Reference, Def. Rule # 7, 4^th Generation warfare)